Home

82-0075-000--Manual, User`s

Contents

1. State INITiate IMMediate 1 Initiatated State HO TRIG SOUR Ss yes LX TIMer lt F ULA no Waiting for Arm yes ARM Event OS NOTE For continuous algorithm no GG D execution use TRIG COUNT 0 or INF A a o gt This is the default setting RIG pa Reset and Y TES a San mer Waiting for Trigger no p yes Ss ABORT gt lioc od Scan Inputs VERG ei and Increment Trig Counter Y Execute Control Loop Algorithm Update Control Outputs Figure 6 6 Trigger Scan Sequence Diagram Subsystem Syntax TRIGger COUNt trig count gt COUNt IMMediate SOURce BUS EXTernal HOLD SCP IMMediate TIMer TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce TIMer PERiod trig interval PERiod 306 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference TRIGger TRIGger COUNt TRIGger COUNt trig count sets the number of times the module can be triggered before it returns to the Trigger Idle State The default count is O same as INF so accepts continuous triggers See Figure 6 6 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig count numeric uint16 0 to 65535 INF none string Comments e When lt trig count is set to 0 or INF the trigger counter is disabled Once INITiated the module will return to the Waiting For Trigger State after each trigger event The ABORT preferred and
2. 2 2 Figure E 1 Haversine Function 378 Appendix E Generating User Defined Functions A typical use of this function would be to output an analog voltage or current at each Scan Trigger of the VT1419A and over the range of the haversine For example suppose a new position of an analog output to move from 1 mA to 3 mA over a period of 100 ms is required If the TRIG TIMER setting or the EXTernal trigger was set to 2 ms then force fifty intervals over the range of the haversine This can be easily done by using a scalar variable to count the number of times the algorithm has executed and to scale the variable value to the 7 2 to 1 2 range 3 mA is multiplied times the custom function result over each interval which will yield the shape of the haversine 0 003x sin x 0 001 Try the eufn1419 vee example program and define some custom functions to illustrate this discussion Table 1 shows some examples of the accuracy of the custom function with various input values compared to an evaluation of the actual transcendental function found in C or RMB Please note that the Mx B segments are located on boundaries specified by 2 64 on each side of X 0 This means that if the exact input value is selected that was used for the beginning of each segment the exact value of the function at that point will be calculated Any point between segments will be an approximation dependent upon the linearity of that segmen
3. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weighted 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 Value Event Operation Request Standard Message Questionable not used notused not used Status Service Event Available Status SRE STB TRG Status Register Enable Query Returns the weighted sum of all enabled unmasked events those enabled to assert SRQ in the Status Byte Register The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Status Byte Register Query Returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Status Byte Register Refer to the ESE command earlier in this chapter for a table showing the contents of the Status Byte Register STB does not clear bit 6 Service Request The Message Available bit bit 4 may be cleared as a result of reading the response to STB The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Trigger Triggers an instrument when the trigger source is set to bus TRIG SOUR BUS command and the instrument is in the Wait for Trigger state 316 Chapter 6 TST NOTES VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference Self Test Causes an instrument to execute extensive internal self tests and returns a response showing the results of the self test 1 During the first 5 minutes after power is applied TST may fail Allow the module to warm up before executing TST 2 Module must be screwed securely to mainframe 3 The VT1419A C SCPI driver for MS DOS implements
4. Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only e Returned Value An example of the response string format is AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES E1419 Option lt option number and description gt SCP 0 0 The C SCPI type is string For specific response string refer to the appropriate SCP manual If lt channel gt specifies a position where no SCP is installed the module returns the response string 0 No SCP at this Address 0 0 Usage SYST CTYPE 0100 return SCP type install at channel 0 Chapter 6 303 SYSTem ERRor SYSTem ERRor returns the latest error entered into the Error Queue Comments SYST ERR returns one error message from the Error Queue returned error is removed from queue To return all errors in the queue repeatedly execute SYST ERR until the error message string 0 No error Returned Value Errors are returned in the form lt error number gt lt error message string gt e RST Condition Error Queue is empty Usage SYST ERR returns the next error message from the Error Queue SYSTem VERSion SYSTem VERSion returns the version of SCPI this instrument complies with Comments Returned Value String 1990 The C SCPI type is string Usage SYST VER Returns 1990 304 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference TRIGger TRIGger The TRIGger command subsystem controls the behavior of the trigger system once it is initiated see INITia
5. 000 pe 000b ni ri 000 HI HiHH 0009 e OU OL 0008 00 06 00001 00011 opazi 000 1 00 0p1 00051 00091 mt 00 0L1 330 2914 61 340 VOOSLLA auem RT era ALARM A EE EER SR ERA HAE AdO 12114 81 dO VSOSLLA 00081 spas GOOG 00 007 c 01 XD Fog 333 Appendix A 2 Sed H O II p9X 1 WO VEOSILA daO Tenta T1 140 VZOSTLA NA OU UCU ea Pr Lua UU Apa AIO 19354 11 340 VIOSILA 00008 00009 00 00p 00007 000 4 ceperint 00 08 In anh AA oooor O o A A A di fonte ES remit 00051 A PPT La Soldado i A DUO ee 3 zd UA CRE E Oo os Ws p 0000 Al CR O E I 00 05 00 00t i 00 0Sp 0000 00099 coxo Seg Appendix A 334 o 88d AAO A 81 1d0 VSOSILA 00 008 00009 00 00p 00 007 000 00 00C Appendix A 335 cor XO Bea AAO 39i POX 1 300 VEOSLLA AJO 39114 11 300 VIOSLLA as AN m M 00 S1 o 24 pepuspxy A ad L Appendix A 336 010 Bea got 0071 PRA REA AA 410 19174 81 1d0 VSOS TLLA OOF HOPI O Bag popuojxj 4 od T Appendix A 337 o Seq 440 19314 Z1 100 VZOSTLA MAREA MAA LRM eee rele ARANA AAA 440 MA 11300
6. EX sol O RES Ec ae ES selo la EN a ES Oo fon a E The Power on default condition is All Positive Transition Filter Register bits set to one and all Negative Transition Filter Register bits set to O This applies to both the Operation and Questionable Data Groups An Example using the Operation Group Suppose that it is necessary for a module to report via the Status System when it had completed executing the CAL operation The Calibrating bit bit 0 in the Operation Condition Register goes to 1 when CAL is executing and returns to O when CAL is complete In order to record only the negative transition of this bit in the STAT OPER EVEN register send STAT OPER PTR 32766 All ones in Pos Trans Filter register except bit 0 0 STAT OPER NTR 1 All zeros in Neg Trans Filter register except bit 0 1 Now when CAL completes and Operation Condition Register bit zero goes from 1 to 0 Operation Event Register bit zero will become a 1 Note in Figure 3 12 that each Status Group has an Enable Register These control whether or not the occurrence of an individual status condition will be reported by the group s summary bit in the Status Byte Questionable Data Group Examples To have only the FIFO Overflowed condition reported by the QUE bit bit 3 of the Status Byte execute STAT QUES ENAB 1024 1024 decimal value for bit 10 Chapter 3 91 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Using the Status
7. 54 Chapter 3 VXI Interrupts INPut FiLter INPut GAIN OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut SHUNt OUTPut VOLTage AMPlitude Programming the VT1419A Multifunction INPut POLarity SENSe FREQuency APERature SENSe FUNCtion CONDition SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize SENSe FREQuency SENSe TOTalize RESetMODE SCP Data Bus Executing The Programming Model OUTPut POLarity OUTPut TYPe SOURce FM STATe SOURce FUNCtion CONDition SOURce FUNCtion PULSe SOURce FUNCtion SQUare SOURce PULM STATe SOURce PULSe PERiod SOURce PULSe WIDth ALG DEF GLOBALS I analog input SCP config analog output SCP programming digital SCP 1 0 ond config 1 Y vx th 09 oo 2 gt Status o ScE 5 System ALG DEF ALGn Algorithm o ALG ARRay Memory E gt 5 ALG SCALar El STATus b ALG SCAN RATio S un lt ALG UPDate SENSe FUNCtion RESistance ri Error SENSe FUNCtion STRAIN see E Queue
8. Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYST ERR See Error Messages in Appendix B The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands CALibration SETup CALibration SETup CALibration STORe ADC e CAL STOR ADC stores the calibration constants for CAL and CAL SETup into non volatile memory e Executing this command does not alter the module s programmed state function range etc It does however clear STAT QUES COND register bit 13 If Open Transducer Detect OTD is enabled when CAL is executed the module will disable OTD wait 1 minute to allow channels to settle perform the calibration and then re enable OTD If the program turns off OTD before executing CAL it should also wait 1 minute for settling Chapter 6 311 CLS DMC lt name gt lt cmd_data gt Clear Status Command The CLS command clears all status event registers Standard Event Status Event Register Standard Operation Status Event Register Questionable Data Event Register and the instrument s error queue This clears the corresponding summary bits bits 3 5 amp 7 in the Status Byte Register CLS does not affect the enable bits in any of the status register groups The SCPI command STATus PRESet does clear the Operation Status Enable and Questionable Data Enable registers CLS disables the Operation
9. 0x 1000 DSP Overvoltage on input 0x2000 DSP reserved error condition 0x4000 DSP ADC hardware failure 0x8000 DSP reserved error condition Calibration or Test in Process Calibration not in Process ZERO must be sent before FSCale Perform A D Cal sequence as shown in Command Reference under CAL CONF VOLT Memory size must be multiple of 4 From MEM VME SIZE Each VT1419A reading requires 4 bytes Self test failed Test info in FIFO Use SENS DATA FIFO ALL to retrieve data from FIFO NOTE TST always sets the FIFO data FORMat to ASCII 7 Read FIFO data into string variables Meaning of TST FIFO data by Value FIIFO Value Definition 1 99 ID number of failed test see following table for possible corrective actions 100 163 Channel number s associated with test ch 0 63 164 Special channel used for A D tests only 200 A D range 0 0625 V associated with failed test 201 A D range 0 25 V associated with failed test 202 A D range 1 V associated with failed test 203 A D range 4 V associated with failed test 204 A D range 16 V associated with failed test Possible Corrective Action by Failed Test ID Number Test ID Corrective Actions 1 19 21 29 VXI Technology Service Appendix B 361 Error Messages Possible Corrective Action by Failed Test ID Number Test ID Corrective
10. The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel Related Commands SENS CHAN SETT SAMP TIMER RST Condition will return 1 for all channels Returned Value returns numeric number of samples The type is int16 SENSe DATA CVTable SENSe DATA CV Table lt element_list gt returns from the Current Value Table the most recent values stored by algorithms Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units element list channel list 10 511 none Comments SENSe DATA CV Table lt element_list gt allows the latest values of internal algorithm variables to be viewed while algorithms are executing The Current Value Table is an area in memory that can contain as many as 502 32 bit floating point values Algorithms can copy any of their variable values into these CVT elements while they execute The algorithm statements to put data into the CVT are writecvt lt expr gt element number and writeboth lt expr gt element number gt See Chapters 3 and 4 for usage Elements 0 through 9 are not accessible They are used internally by the DSP The format of values returned is set using the FORMat DATA command Returned Value ASCII values are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each value is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOI follow the last valu
11. 0000 Routine to write recent output to FIFO 0001 writefifo 1100 End Loop Figure 5 14 Example of Variable and Array Modification Analog output channel 132 is assumed connected to analog input channel 100 for this example Rather than use a custom function to generate the sine wave Agilent VEE s function generator objects are used to generate a sine wave triangle wave and square wave There are three 100 element arrays created that will be downloaded into the VT1419A s memory dependent upon the waveform to be generated Algorithm 1 is expanded in the picture above and shows how it sequences through the array waveform to send values to the analog output With each trigger cycle Algorithm 1 executes and picks a value from the array dependent upon a counter variable i The variable inc is used to increment the counter so elements in the array can be skipped to generate a higher frequency waveform Also note in Algorithm 1 that the output value to 0132 consists of both the waveform array plus the variable offset 166 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Modification of Variables and Arrays The vertical slider controls the value of offset and the horizontal slider controls the variable inc When the toggle switch is in the DDS direct digital synthesis mode the horizontal slider modifies inc to generate lower resolution higher frequency waveforms When in the PPC point p
12. Figure 2 2 Pairing Source and Sense SCP Channels Thermocouples and the thermocouple reference temperature sensor can be wired to any of the VT1419A s channels When the scan list is executed make sure that the reference temperature sensor is specified in the channel sequence before any of the associated thermocouple channels see the SENSe JREF CHAN command External wiring and connections to the VT1419A are made using the Terminal Module see page 39 The isothermal reference temperature measurement made by a VT1419A applies only to thermocouple measurements made by that instrument and through the terminal blocks associated with the reference temperature sensor for increased isothermal reference accuracy the VT1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel has three reference temperature thermistors In systems with multiple VT1419As each instrument must make its own reference measurements The reference measurement made by one VT1419A can not be used to compensate thermocouple measurements made by another VT1419A 28 Chapter 2 Field Wiring Faceplate Connector Pin Signal Lists Faceplate Connector Pin Signal Lists Figure 2 3 shows the Faceplate Connector Pin Signal List for the VT1419A Count Count From From Top Bottom 1 32 2 31 3 30 4 29 5 28 6 27 r 7 26 8 25 uos T 9 24 rs S 10 23 a o 11 22 sa 4 12 21 ane 6 13 20 aa a 14 19 a D 15 18 d 5 16 17 Eae 17 16 a 18 15 ea 19 14 Es 20 13 ade 2
13. 156 SCP in SCP position 7 To configure the upper 4 bits of a VT1534A for active pull up OUTP TYPE ACT 148 155 SCP in SCP position 6 68 Chapter 3 Setting Output Functions Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels Both the VT1533A Digital I O SCP and VT1534A Frequency Totalizer SCP can output static digital states The VT1534A Frequency Totalizer SCP can also output single pulses per trigger continuous pluses that are width modulated PWM and continuous pulses that are frequency modulated FM Static State CONDition Function To configure digital channels to output static states use the SOURce FUNCtion CONDition lt ch_list gt command Examples To set the upper 8 bit channel of a VT1533A in SCP position 7 to output SOUR FUNC COND 157 To set the lower 4 channels bits of a VT1534A in SCP pos 6 to output states SOUR FUNC COND 156 159 Variable Width Pulse Per Trigger This function sets up one or more VT1534A channels to output a single pulse per trigger per algorithm execution The width of the pulse from these channels is controlled by Algorithm Language statements Use the command SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe lt ch_list gt Example command sequence To set VT1534A channel 2 at SCP position 6 to output a pulse per trigger SOUR FUNC PULSE 149 Example algorithm statement to control pulse width to I ms 0149 0 001 Variable Width Pulses at Fixed Fr
14. Calibration relays opened if JM2202 not cut to protect module inputs and Questionable Data Status bit 11 set Execute RST to close relays and or reset status bit FIFO overflow Indicates that the FIFO buffer has filled and that one or more readings have been lost Usually caused by algorithm values stored in FIFO faster than FIFO was read Calibration failed Unable to map A24 VXI memory Incorrect range value Range value sent is not supported by instrument Command not yet implemented 0x1 DSP Unrecognized command code 0x2 DSP Parameter out of range 0x4 DSP Flash rom erase failure 0x8 DSP Programming voltage not present 0x10 DSP Invalid SCP gain value Check that SCP is seated or replace SCP Channel numbers are in FIFO 0x20 DSP Invalid CAL constant or checksum CAL required 0x40 DSP Couldn t cal some channels Check that SCP is seated or replace SCP Channel numbers are in FIFO 0x80 DSP Re Zero of ADC failed 360 Appendix B 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 Error Messages 0x100 DSP Invalid Tare CAL constant or checksum Perform CAL TARE CAL TARE procedure 0x200 DSP Invalid Factory CAL constant or checksum Perform A D Cal procedure 0x400 DSP DAC adjustment went to limit Execute TST 0x800 DSP Status Do CAL
15. Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels Setting Up Digital Inputs Setting Input Polarity Digital inputs can be configured for polarity and depending on the SCP model a selection of input functions as well The following discussion will explain which functions are available with a particular Digital I O SCP model For Digital SCPs whose data direction is programmable setting a digital channel s input function is what defines it as an input channel The VT1536A Isolated Digital I O SCP s data direction is set by configuration switches so the SENSe FUNCtion and SOURce FUNCtion commands do not apply To specify the input polarity logical sense for digital channels use the command INPut POLarity lt mode gt lt ch_list gt This capability is available on all digital SCP models This setting is valid even while the specified channel in not an input channel If and when the channel is configured for input an input FUNCtion command the setting will be in effect For the VT1536A the INP POL command is disallowed for output channels e The lt mode gt parameter can be either NORMal or INVerted When set to NORM an input channel with 3 V applied will return a logical 1 When set to INV a channel with 3 V applied will return a logic 0 e The lt ch_list gt parameter specifies the channels to configure The VT1533A has two channels of 8 bits each All 8 bits in a channel take on the configuration specified for the channel The
16. TRIGger Generated every time a scan is triggered see TRIG SOUR lt trig source e FTRigger First TRigger is used to generate a single TTL TRG output when repeated triggers are being used to make multiple executions of the enabled algorithms The TTLTRG line will go low asserted at the first trigger event and stay low through subsequent triggers until the trigger count as set by TRIG COUNT is exhausted At this point the TTL TRG line will return to its high state de asserted This feature can be used to signal when the VT1419A has started running its control algorithms e Related Commands OUTP TTLT lt n gt STATE OUTP TTLT SOUR TRIG SOUR TRIG COUNT e RST Condition OUTP TTLT SOUR TRIG Usage OUTP TTLT SOUR TRIG OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce toggle TTLTRG line every time module is triggered use to trigger other VT1419As OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce returns the current setting for the TTL TRG line Source Comments Returned Value Discrete either TRIG FTR or SCP C SCPI type is string e Related Commands OUTP TTLT SOUR Usage OUTP TTLT SOUR OUTPut TTLTrg n STATe enter statement will return on of FTR SCP or TRIG OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt ttltrg_ cntrl gt specifies which VXIbus TTLTRG line is enabled to source a trigger signal when the module is triggered TTLTrg lt n gt can specify line 0 through 7 For example TTLTRG4 or TTLT4 for VXIbus TTLTRG line 4 Paramet
17. The thin white Mylar thermal barrier must be inserted over the Terminal Module connector Option 12 only This prevents airflow from the VT1419A into the Terminal Module The Terminal Module must also be in a fairly stable temperature environment and it is best to minimize the temperature gradient between the VT1419A and the Terminal Module The VXI mainframe cooling fan filters must be clean and there should be as much clear space in front of the fan intakes as possible Recirculating warm air inside a closed rack cabinet can cause a problem if the Terminal Module is suspended into ambient air that is significantly warmer or cooler If the mainframe recess is mounted in a rack with both front and rear doors closing both doors helps keep the entire VT1419A at a uniform temperature If there is no front door try opening the back door to allow the mainframe to cool to the temperature of the Terminal Module VXI Technology recommends that the cooling fan switch on the back of the of an Agilent HP E1401 Mainframe is in the High position The normal variable speed cooling fan control can make the internal VT1419A module temperature cycle up and down which affects the amplifiers with these microvolt level signals Chapter 2 35 Field Wiring Preferred Measurement Connections Preferred Measurement Connections IMPORTANT HINTS For any A D Module to scan channels at high speeds it must use a very shor
18. decimal point Remaining characters if present are 0 9 a one only a single E or e optional or 0 9 For example 0 32 2 123 123 456 1 23456e 2 12 34E3 NOTE Decimal constants without a decimal point character are treated by the translator as 32 bit integer values See Data Types on page 125 Hexadecimal Constant First characters are 0x or 0X Remaining characters are 0 9 and A F or a f No allowed Octal Constant First character is 0 Remaining characters are 0 7 If e or E is found the number is assumed to be a Decimal Constant as above Primary Expression constant expression scalar identifier scalar identifier bitnumber array identifier expression abs expression max expression expression min expression expression Chapter 4 129 The Algorithm Language and Environment Language Syntax Summary Bit Number Bn where n 0 9 Ban where nn 10 15 Unary Expression primary expression unary operator unary expression Unary Operator Multiplicative Expression unary expression multiplicative expression multiplicative operator unary expression Multiplicative Operator Additive Expression multiplicative expression additive expression additive operator multiplicative expression Additive Operator Relational Expression additive expression relational expression relational operator additive expression
19. ow 30 Appendix A Temperature Accuracy The following pages have temperature accuracy graphs that include instrument and firmware linearization errors The linearization algorithm used is based on the IPTS 68 78 standard transducer curves Add the transducer accuracy to determine total measurement error The thermocouple graphs on the following pages include only the errors due to measuring the voltage output of the thermocouple as well as the algorithm errors due to converting the thermocouple voltage to temperature To this error must be added the error due to measuring the reference junction temperature with an RTD or a 5k thermistor See the graphs for the RTD or the 5k thermistor to determine this additional error Also the errors due to gradients across the isothermal reference must be added If an external isothermal reference panel is used consult the manufacturer s specifications If VXI Technology termination blocks are used as the isothermal reference see the notes below NOTE 1 When using the Terminal Module as the isothermal reference add 0 6 C to the thermocouple accuracy specs to account for temperature gradients across the Terminal Module The ambient temperature of the air surrounding the Terminal Module must be within 2 C of the temperature of the inlet cooling air to the VXI mainframe 2 When using the VT1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel as the isothermal reference add 0 2 C to the thermocouple accura
20. page 25 e Faceplate Connector Pin Signal List 0 page 29 e Optional Terminal Modules 0 0 00000 eee page 30 e Reference Temperature Sensing with the VT1419A page 33 e Configuring the On Board Remote Reference Jumpers page 34 e Preferred Measurement Comnecti0MS o ooooooooooo page 37 e Wiring and Attaching the Terminal Modules page 39 e Attaching Removing the Terminal Modules page 41 e Adding Components to the Option 12 Terminal Module page 43 e Option 11 Terminal Module Wiring Map page 44 e Option 12 Terminal Module Wiring Map page 45 e The Option AGE va bens RB e ES page 46 Planning the Wiring Layout To help plan the field wiring connections to the VT1419A this section provides a high level overview of the VT1419A s signal paths between the face plate connectors and the Control Processor DSP To eliminate any surprises after the system is wired it also cover any configuration interdependencies or other limiting situations there are very few with the VT1419A SCP Positions and The VT1419A has a fixed relationship between Signal Conditioning Plug On Channel Numbers positions and their channel assignments See Figure 2 1 for this discussion Each of the eight SCP positions can connect to eight channels Each channel signal path consists of both a High and Low signal path for differential analog signals Some
21. unary minus Examples a b c unary plus a c b Here there are some differences BASIC C Notes is equal to Different hard to remember lt gt or is not equal to t Different but obvious gt is greater than gt Same lt is less than gt Same gt is greater than or equal to gt Same lt is less than or equal to lt Same A common C programming error for BASIC programmers is to inadvertently use 6 the assignment operator statement Fortunately the VT1419A will flag this as algorithm is loaded instead of the comparison operator in an if a Syntax Error when the There are three operators They are very different from those in BASIC BASIC Examples C Examples AND IF A B AND B C amp amp if a OR IF A B OR A C li if a NOT IF NOT B if b b Il I The VT1419A Algorithm Language provides the if else construct for conditional execution The following figure compares the elements of the C if else construct with the BASIC if then else end if construct The general form of the if else construct is if expression statement else statement where statementl is executed if expression evaluates to non zero true and statement2 is executed if expression evaluates to zero false Statement and or statement2 can be compound statements That is multiple simple statements within curly braces See Figure 4 3 134 Chapter 4
22. 214 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe e The sub type gt parameter values of 85 and 92 differentiate between 100 Q 0 C RTDs with temperature coefficients of 0 00385 and and 0 00392 ohm ohm C respectively The lt sub_type gt values of 2250 5000 and 10000 refer to thermistors that match the Omega 44000 series temperature response curve These 44000 series thermistors are selected to match the curve within 0 1 or 0 2 C For thermistors lt sub_type gt may be specified in KQ kohm The lt sub_type gt EEXTended applies to E type thermocouples at 800 C and above CUSTom is pre defined as Type K with no reference junction compensation reference junction assumed to be at 0 C e The CAL command calibrates temperature channels based on Current Source SCP and Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again e See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion on page 57 for more information e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands CAL OUTP CURR for RTDs and Thermistors SENS REF and SENS REF TEMP for Thermocouples e RST Condition SENSE FUNC VOLT AUTO 100 163 Usage Link two channels to the K type thermocouple temperature conversion SENS FUNC TEMP TCOUPLE K 101 102 Link channel 0 to measure reference temperature using 5k thermistor SENS REF THER 5000 100
23. MA AB ME A E MAR e d RM dk Mem Am Me um m ARA AAA AAA A AAO 29114 11 3d0 VIOSLLA 00708 00 09 00 0t ODOC 000 GO i 08 0 m X UYL MS 347 Appendix A 00 08 2 seq 00 09 0004 0007 er er re rrr re rer freer Ai kAd M AERE RA S O 190414 81 140 V80S1LA HAA GL Y MS 08 0 09 0 040 0c 0 000 2 330 Appendix A 348 o 89d AJO RHA p9X 1 300 VEOSLLA S O Jeu CT 330 VZOSTLA FARHHEEREFARET ERE E Ad nd Abe RHAFTIRATTATREAAATREARATAREEKRMRER 440 loa CET 130 VIOSILA 00 00T T eee QUOS mE m on ie Q0 001 p MM M 9 cc QOCl 1 emo ap meom oon a eomm m o aa am qu O a oa aa a e e M 0002 orosz 00 00 em u OU OSE i 00 00v pibus 00 05 0000 OO OSS e 00009 uc cd s 00059 mare uem GGO PTT mA amarte ec hun ia T aauuradotot 00 0SL 01 X Ba AAA ALLA 349 Appendix A 01 X o eq AAO 191114 p9X 1 3d0 VEOSLLA is ee JAO HA SX E1 3d0 VEOSLIA J O Uld 21 140 VZOSLLA A a Rm TR ken era nba tee 34O 391114 11 140 VIOSILA 097 oF o 000 OO OSE Ue Ara ra e OEE rene 00 00b 00 0s nde 00 006 I DOSS 01 X o Sag GLa Ap
24. Returned Value String value either BLOCK or OVERWRITE The C SCPI type is string e Related Commands SENSE DATA FIFO MODE 264 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE Usage DATA FIFO MODE Enter statement returns either BLOCK or OVERWRITE SENSe DATA FIFO PART SENSe DATA FIFO PART lt n values returns n values from the FIFO buffer Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n values numeric int32 1 2 147 483 647 none Comments e Use the DATA FIFO COUNT command to determine the number of values in NOTE the FIFO buffer The format of values returned is set using the FORMat DATA command Returned Value ASCII values are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each value is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOT follow the last value The C SCPI data type is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 values are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter For REAL 32 each value is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 each value is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float64 array Algorithm values which are a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF and a negative overvolt
25. SENSe DATA FIFO HALF SENSe JDATA FIFO HALF returns 32 768 values if the FIFO buffer is at least half full This command provides a fast means of acquiring blocks of values from the buffer Comments For acquiring data from continuous algorithm executions an application needs to execute a DATA FIFO HALF command and a read statement often enough to keep up with the rate that values are being sent to the FIFO Use the DATA FIFO ALL command to acquire the values remaining in the FIFO buffer after the ABORT command has stopped execution The format of values returned is set using the FORMat DATA command Returned Value ASCII values are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each value is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOI follow the last value The C SCPI data type is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 values are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter For REAL 32 each value is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 each value is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float64 array NOTE Algorithm values which are a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF and a negative overvoltage return IEEE INF see table on page 230 for actual values fo
26. STRain FBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt FBPoisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt FPOisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt HBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt HPOisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt QUARter lt range gt lt ch_list gt TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt TOTalize lt ch_list gt VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt REFerence lt sensor type gt lt sub_type gt lt ch_list gt CHANnels lt ref_channel gt lt ch_list gt TEMPerature lt degrees celsius gt STRain EXCitation lt excite_v gt lt ch_list gt EXCitation lt channel gt GFACtor gage factor gt lt ch_list gt GFACtor lt channel gt POISson poisson ratio7 Q ch list POISson lt channel gt UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt UNSTrained lt channel gt TOTalize RESet MODE INIT TRIGger lt ch_list gt TOTalize RESet MODE lt channel gt 258 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe CHANnel SETTling SENSe CHANnel SETTling lt num_samples gt lt ch_list gt specifies the number of measurement samples to make on channels in ch list gt SENS CHAN SETTLING 1s used to provide additional settling time only to selected channels that might need 1t See the Settling Characteristics discussion on page 101 Parameters
27. Since ALG STATE is valid for an undefined algorithm ALG STATE will return the current state for lt alg name gt even if it is not currently defined e Returned Value Numeric 0 or 1 Type is uint16 e RST Condition ALG STATE 1 ALGorithm EXPLicit TIME ALGorithm EXPLicit TIME lt alg_name gt computes and returns a worst case execution time estimate in seconds Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg_name string ALGI ALG32 or MAIN none Comments When alg name is ALGI through ALG32 ALG TIME returns only the time required to execute the algorithm s code 196 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm e When lt alg_name gt is MAIN ALG TIME returns the worst case execution time for an entire measurement 8 control cycle sum of MAIN all enabled algorithms analog and digital inputs and control outputs e If triggered more rapidly than the value returned by ALG TIME MAIN the VT1419A will generate a Trigger too fast error NOTE If alg name gt specifies an undefined algorithm ALG TIME returns 0 This can be used to determine whether algorithm lt alg_name gt is defined e When Accepted Before INIT only e Returned Value numeric value The type is float32 ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine lt function_name gt lt range gt lt offset gt lt func_data gt defines a cu
28. The commands for linking EU conversion to channels are SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt for resistance measurements SENSe FUNCtion STRain lt 3 gt lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt for strain bridge measurements SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt for temperature measurements with thermocouples thermistors or RTDs SENSe FUNCtion VOL Tage lt range gt lt ch_list gt for voltage measurements SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt for custom EU conversions 58 Chapter 3 NOTE Linking Voltage Measurements Note Programming the VT1419A Muttifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels At Power on and after RST the default EU Conversion is autorange voltage for analog input channels To link channels to the voltage conversion send the SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage lt range gt lt ch_list gt command e The lt ch_list gt parameter specifies which channels to link to the voltage EU conversion e The optional lt range gt parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range Valid values are 0 0625 0 25 1 4 16 or AUTO When not specified the module uses auto range AUTO To set channels 0 through 15 to measure voltage using auto range SENS FUNC VOLT AUTO 100 115 To set channels 0 and 23 to the 16 volt range and 28 through
29. The gain command for SCPs with programmable amplifiers is INPut GAIN lt gain gt lt ch_list gt to select SCP channel gain The gain selections provided by the SCP can be assigned to any channel individually or in groups Send a separate command for each gain selection An example for the VT1503A programmable Amp amp Filter SCP To set the SCP gain to 8 for channels 40 44 46 and 48 through 51 send INP GAIN 8 140 144 146 148 151 To set the SCP gain to 16 for channels 56 through 59 and to 64 for channels 60 through 63 send INP GAIN 16 156 159 INP GAIN 64 160 163 56 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels Setting Filter The commands for programmable filters are Cutoff Freq uency INPutFILTer LPASs FREQuency cutoff freq gt lt ch_list gt to select cutoff frequency INPut FILTer LPASs STATe ON OFF D lt ch list to enable or disable input filtering The cutoff frequency selections provided by the SCP can be assigned to any channel individually or in groups Send a separate command for each frequency selection For example To set 10 Hz cutoff for channels 40 44 46 and 48 through 51 send INP FILT FREQ 10 140 144 146 148 151 To set 10 Hz cutoff for channels 56 through 59 and 100 Hz cutoff for channels 60 through 633 send INP FILT FREQ 10 156 159 INP FILT FREQ 100 160 163 By default after RST or at power on the
30. Your algorithms go here First loop 0 reset First loop after last alg has been called BORER CORO end function main ii f Figure 4 1 Source Listing of Function main Accessing the VT1419A s Resources This section describes how an algorithm accesses hardware and software resources provided by the VT1419A The following is a list of these resources e O channels e Global variables defined before the algorithm is defined e The value ALG NUM which the VT1419A makes available to the algorithm ALG NUM 1 for ALGI 2 for ALG2 etc e User defined functions defined with the ALG FUNC DEF command e The Current Value Table CVT and the data FIFO buffer FIFO to output algorithm data to an application program e VXIbus Interrupts Chapter 4 109 The Algorithm Language and Environment Accessing the VT1419A s Resources Accessing I O Channels In the Algorithm Language channels are referenced as pre defined variable identifiers The general channel identifier syntax is Iccc for input channels and Occc for output channels where ccc is a channel number between 100 channel 0 and 163 channel 63 inclusive Like all VT1419A variables channel identifier variables always contain 32 bit floating point values even when the channel is part of a digital I O SCP If the digital I O SCP has 8 bit channels like the VT1533A the channel s identifiers Occc and Iccc can take on the values 0 through 255 To
31. as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the VXI Technology standard software agreement for the product involved Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol affixed to iT product Indicates that the user must refer to the manual for specific WARNING or CAUTION information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product Direct current dc Alternating current ac Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates the field wiring terminal that must be connected to earth ground before operating the equipment protects against Calls attention to a procedure practice or Moser e aa of on E WARNING condition that could cause bodily injury or death Calls attention to a procedure practice or or T Frame or chassis ground CAUTION condition that could possibly cause damage to terminal typically connects to the equipment or permanent loss of data equipment s metal frame Warnings The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this product Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design m
32. not equal to Boolean Functions and amp amp or not Variables scalars oftype static float and single dimensioned arrays of type static float limited to 1024 elements Constants 32 bit decimal integer Dddd where D and d are decimal digits but D is not zero No decimal point or exponent specified 32 bit octal integer Ooo where O is a leading zero and o is an octal digit No decimal point or exponent specified 32 bit hexadecimal integer OXhhh or Oxhhh where his a hex digit 32 bit floating point ddd ddd ddd ddde dd dddE dd ddd dddedd or ddd dddEdd where d is a decimal digit Flow Control conditional construct if f else Intrinsic Functions Return the absolute value abs lt expr gt Return minimum min lt exprl gt lt expr2 gt Return maximum max lt expr gt lt expr2 gt User defined function user name lt expr gt Write value to CVT element writecvt lt expr gt lt expr gt Write value to FIFO buffer writefifo lt expr gt Write value to both CVT and FIFO writeboth lt expr gt lt expr gt Global variables are necessary when communicating information from one algorithm to another Globals are initialized to O unless specifically assigned a value at define time The initial value is only valid at the time of definition That is globals remain around and may be altered by other SCPI commands or algorithms Globals are removed only by power ON or RS
33. 108 111 Thermistor measured before chs 8 11 SENS REF CHAN 107 112 115 RTD measured before chs 12 15 278 Chapter 6 SENSe REFerence TEMPerature VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe JREFerence TEMPerature lt degrees_c gt stores a fixed reference junction temperature in the Reference Temperature Register Use when the thermocouple reference junction is kept at a controlled temperature NOTE This reference temperature is used to compensate all subsequent thermocouple measurements until the register is overwritten by another SENSE REF TEMP value or by scanning a channel linked with the SENSE REFERENCE command If used SENS REF TEMP must be executed before scanning any thermocouple channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units degrees c numeric float32 126 to 126 none Comments This command is used to specify to the VT1419A the temperature of a controlled temperature thermocouple reference junction e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands FUNC TEMP TC e RST Condition Reference temperature is 0 C Usage SENSE REF TEMP 40 SENSe STRain EXCitation subsequent thermocouple conversion will assume compensation junction at 40 C SENSe STRain EXCitation lt excite_v gt lt ch_list gt specifies the excitation voltage value to be used to convert strain bridge readings for the channels specified by lt
34. Algorithm data acquisition 121 Algorithm exiting the 124 Algorithm process monitoring 121 Algorithm running the 120 Algorithm writing the 120 ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine 197 ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 198 ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 199 ALGorithm UPDate IMMediate 199 ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel 200 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 202 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 203 Algorithm definition 132 Algorithms disabling 85 enabling 85 Algorithms defining 116 119 Algorithms INITiating Running 80 Algorithms non control 121 Algorithms starting 80 ALL DATA FIFO ALL 261 AMPLitude OUTP CURRent AMPLitude 245 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude 246 An example using the operation group 91 APERture SENSe FREQuency APERture 266 APERture SENSe FREQuency APERture 267 Arithmetic operators 123 Arm and trigger sources 77 ARM subsystem 204 206 ARM SOURCce 205 ARM SOURce 206 ARRay Index 381 ALGorithm EXPLicit 187 ARRay ALGorithm EXPLicit 188 Assigning values 133 Assignment operator 123 Attaching and removing the terminal module 41 42 Attaching the terminal module 39 40 Attaching the VT1419A terminal module 41 42 Autoranging more on 101 Available Power for SCPs 329 Before INIT 52 Bitfield access 127 Bit number 130 BLOCK continuously reading the FIFO FIFO mode 83 Byte enabling events to be reported in the status 91 Byte reading the status 92 C C language algorithms defining 73 74
35. Complete 312 Chapter 6 ESE ESR GMC lt name gt IDN LMC NOTE VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference Standard Event Status Enable Query Returns the weighted sum of all enabled unmasked bits in the Standard Event Status Register The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Standard Event Status Register Query Returns the weighted sum of all set bits in the Standard Event Status Register After reading the register ESR clears the register The events recorded in the Standard Event Status Register are independent of whether or not those events are enabled with the ESE command to set the Standard Event Summary Bit in the Status Byte Register The Standard Event bits are described in the ESE command The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Get Macro query Returns arbitrary block response data which contains the command or command sequence defined for lt name gt For more information on arbitrary block response data see page 180 Identity Returns the device identity The response consists of the following four fields fields are separated by commas e Manufacturer e Model Number e Serial Number returns 0 if not available e Driver Revision returns O if not available IDN returns the following response strings depending on model and options AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES E1419B lt serial number gt lt revision number e The C SCPI type for this returned value is str
36. Condition Filter Event Enable real time latched 1 enable Summary Bit Logical OR Summary Bit OPERATION STATUS GROUP STATus OPERation CONDition reads register STATus OPERation NTR and STATus OPERation PTR set filters STATus OPERation EVENt reads clears register FT STATus OPERation ENABle sets mask STB SPOLL SRE mask value SRE Summary Bit QUE Questionable Data MAV Message Available ESB Standard Event RQS Request Service OPR Operation Status O m F pi Q L El E AA Summary Bit EE STANDARD EVENT GROUP Event Enable latched 1 enable Measuring JE E Operation Complete J Ti Request Control Scan Complete Logical OR Query Error SCP Trigger FIFO Half Full Algorithm Interrupt Condition Filter real time a E BERR REBAR SNNNNNNNNSNNNNNEA Event latched 1 enable Enable Device Dependent Error Execution Error Command Error User request Power On Figure 3 12 VT1419A Status System Logical OR ESR ESE lt mask_value gt ESE Chapter 3 89 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Using the Status System Status Bit Descriptions Questionable Data Group Bit Bit Value Event Name Description 8 256 Lost Calibra
37. OUTPut DELay delay AUTO DELay UPDate IMMediate CHANnel lt channel gt WINDow num updates WINDow ARM IMMediate SOURce BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce CALibration CONFigure RESistance VOLTage lt range gt ZERO FSCale SETup SETup STORe ADC TARE SCPI Command Quick Reference Description Stops scanning immediately and sets trigger system to idle state scan lists are unaffected Subsystem to define configure and enable loop control algorithms Defines contents of array lt array name gt in algorithm lt alg name gt or if lt alg name gt is GLOBALS defines values global to all algorithms Returns block data from lt array name gt in algorithm lt alg name gt or if lt alg name gt is GLOBALS returns values from a global array Defines algorithms or global variables program data gt is C source of algorithm or global declaration Defines value of variable var name in algorithm alg name gt or if lt alg name gt is GLOBALS defines a value global to all algorithms Returns value from lt var name gt in algorithm lt alg name gt or if lt alg name gt is GLOBALS returns a value from global variable Sets scan triggers per execution of lt alg_name gt send also ALG UPD Returns scan triggers per execution of lt alg_name gt Returns size in words of named algorithm Enables disables named algorithm after ALG UPDAT
38. RST commands will return the module to the Trigger Idle State ABORT is preferred since RST also returns other module configurations to their default settings e The default count is O e Related Commands TRIG COUNT e RST Condition TRIG COUNT 0 Usage TRIG COUNT 10 Set the module to make 10 passes all enabled algorithms TRIG COUNT 0 Set the module to accept unlimited triggers the default TRIGger COUNt TRIGger COUNt returns the currently set trigger count Comments If TRIG COUNT returns 0 the trigger counter is disabled and the module will accept an unlimited number of trigger events e Returned Value Numeric 0 through 65 535 The C SCPI type is int32 e Related Commands TRIG COUNT e RST Condition TRIG COUNT returns 0 Usage TRIG COUNT Query for trigger count setting enter statement Returns the TRIG COUNT setting Chapter 6 307 VT1419A Command Reference TRIGger TRIGger IMMediate TRIGger IMMediate causes one trigger when the module is set to the TRIG SOUR BUS or TRIG SOUR HOLD mode Comments e This command is equivalent to the TRG common command or the IEEE 488 2 GET bus command e Related Commands TRIG SOURCE Usage TRIG IMM Use TRIGGER to start a measurement scan TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SOURce trig source configures the trigger system to respond to the trigger event Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig source discrete string
39. Retrieving Algorithm Data The VT1419A has four major operating phases Figure 3 8 shows these phases A trigger event starts the sequence 1 INPUT the state of all digital inputs are captured and each analog input channel that is linked to an algorithm variable is scanned UPDATE The update phase is a window of time made large enough to process all variables and algorithm changes made after INTT Its width is specified by ALG UPDATE WINDOW This window is the only time variables and algorithms can be changed Variable and algorithm changes can actually be accepted during other phases but the changes don t take place until an ALG UPDATE command is received and the update phase begins Ifno ALG UPDATE command is pending the update phase is simply used to accept variable and algorithm changes from the application program using ALG SCAL ALG ARR ALG DEF Data acquired by external specialized measurement instruments can be sent to an algorithm at this time EXECUTE ALGS all INPUT and UPDATE values have been made available to the algorithm variables and each enabled algorithm is executed The results to be output from algorithms are stored in the Output Channel Buffer OUTPUT each Output Channel Buffer value stored during EXECUTE ALGS is sent to its assigned SCP channel The start of the OUTPUT phase relative to the Scan Trigger can be set with the SCPI command ALG OUTP DELay Retrieving Algorithm Data The most eff
40. SCP models will connect to fewer of these eight channels and those left unconnected cannot be used for other purposes The VT1533A Digital I O SCP on the other hand will use each High and Low channel to provide 16 digital bits from a single SCP position SCP Types and Different SCP types analog sense analog source digital I O use different signal Sig nal Paths paths in the VT1419A Each of these basic types will be discussed Chapter 2 25 Field Wiring Planning the Wiring Layout AE q l A chog Do l Doo i Do Doo l Doo Doo Ch 07 i l Non Programmable Ch 08 E lt Sense SCPs Only i L l ED l So Ch 45 E chie 2 Note 31 Each channel line DT 2 represents both a LI 34 Hi and Lo Signal Ch23 O gt ch24 Dl a Do S 5 E S sO 2 e si BE Sui O i A D System T 5 c lt Ch32 pl o HH 9 2 Doo O cE co I c lt E S o E cn39 81 I jum a HE CHAO a HE Control pH al Processor Eg DSP Do Ch 47 i I Any Sense or Ch 48 l Source SCP z HE l Do l HE Ch55 E Bus Do Ch 56 l Do l L l HE l Do cnes SCP control and digital data Analog Sense SCPs Figure 2 1 Channel Numbers at SCP Positions Analog sense SCPs connect signals at the faceplate connector and pass these signals most with signal amplification and or filtering to the analog multiplexer and thus to th
41. SOUR PULS POLarity The variable pulse width control for this channel is provided by the algorithm language When the algorithm executes an assignment statement to this channel the value assigned will be the pulse width setting For example 0150 0025 set channel 50 pulse width to 2 5 ms Usage SOUR PULS PER 005 148 set PWM pulse train to 200 Hz on chn 48 288 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SOURce SOURce PULSe PERiod SOURce PULSe PERiod lt channel gt returns the fixed pulse period value on the pulse width modulated pulse channel in lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments Ifthe channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e Returned Value numeric period The type is float32 SOURce PULSe WIDTh SOURce PULSe WIDTh lt pulse_width gt lt ch_list gt sets the fixed pulse width value on the frequency modulated pulse channels in lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units pulse_width numeric float32 7 87E 6 to 7 8125E 3 seconds 238 4E 9 resolution ch_list string 132 163 none Comments If the channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e RST Condition SOUR FM STATE OFF and SOUR PULM STATE OFF e Relate
42. TOTalize RESet MODE SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE lt select gt lt ch list gt sets the mode for resetting totalizer channels in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units select discrete string INIT TRIGger seconds ch_list string 132 163 none Comments In the INIT mode the total is reset only when the INITiate command is executed In the TRIGger mode the total is reset every time a new scan is triggered e Ifthe channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e Related Commands SENS FUNC TOT INPUT POLARITY e RST Condition SENS TOT RESET MODE INIT Usage SENS TOT RESET MODE TRIG 148 totalizer at channel 48 resets at each trigger event Chapter 6 283 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE lt channel gt returns the reset mode for the totalizer channel in lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Ifthe channel specified is not on a frequency totalize SCP an error will be generated e Returned Value returns INIT or TRIG The type is string 284 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SOURce SOURce The SOURce command s
43. TRIGger SOURce Module TRIGger SOURce returns the current trigger source configuration Returned Value Discrete one of BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TIM or TTLTO through TTLT7 The C SCPI type is string See the TRIG SOUR command for more response data information Usage TRIG SOUR ask VT1419A to return trigger source configuration TRIGger TIMer PERiod TRIGger TIMer PERiod lt trig_interval gt sets the interval between scan triggers Used with the TRIG SOUR TIMER trigger mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig interval numeric float32 100E 6 to 6 5536 seconds string MIN MAX Comments e In order for the TRIG TIMER to start 1t must be Armed For information on timer arming see the ARM subsystem in this command reference The default interval is 10E 3 seconds lt interval gt may be specified in seconds milliseconds ms or microseconds us For example 0 0016 1 6 ms or 1600 us The resolution for lt interval gt is 100 us When Accepted Before INIT only Related Commands TRIG SOUR TIMER ARM SOUR ARM IMM INIT TRIG SOUR ALG EXPL TIME Chapter 6 309 VT1419A Command Reference TRIGger e RST Condition TRIG TIM 1 0E 3 Usage TRIG TIMER 1 0E 1 Set the module to scan inputs and execute all algorithms every 100 ms TRIG TIMER 1 Set the module to scan inputs and execute all algorithms every second TRIGger TIM
44. The Watchdog SCP even has an input which can command all of the VT1419A s channels to disconnect from the system e Sets the trigger system as follows TRIGGER SOURCE TIMER TRIGGER TIMER 10E 3 TRIGGER COUNT 0 infinite ARM SOURCE IMMEDIATE e SAMPLE TIMER 10E 6 e Aborts all pending operations returns to Trigger Idle state e Disables the OPC and OPC modes e MEMORY VME ADDRESS 240000 MEMORY VME STATE OFF MEMORY VME SIZE 0 e Sets STAT QUES COND bit 13 Chapter 6 315 VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference SRE lt mask gt RST does not affect e Calibration data e The output queue e The Service Request Enable SRE register e The Event Status Enable ESE register Service Request Enable When a service request event occurs it sets a corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register this happens whether or not the event has been enabled unmasked by SRE The SRE command allows events to be identified that will assert a GPIB service request SRQ When an event is enabled by SRE and that event occurs it sets a bit in the Status Byte Register and issues an SRQ to the computer sets the GPIB SRQ line true Enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for lt mask gt To enable more than one event specify the sum of the decimal weights Refer to The Status Byte Register for a table showing the contents of the Status Byte Register The C SCPI type for lt mask gt is int16
45. ae eect een eens 158 Curve Fitting and EU Generation 0 0 0 eener 160 Interr pt Handlimg a A A Base ANE Riad ees 161 Simple Data Logger Example 0 2 00 cece cece eee eens 163 Modification of Variables and Arrays 166 Algorithm Modification me 168 Driver Download sata ane prr ihe pct eie elc E OE ROS ee nre eee e RUD deen seed 170 Firmware Update Downl0ad oooococcoccoccooc an 171 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference 0c cece cece cere eee eene 173 ADORO a Du age sana Se 185 ALGO 42 ueteres Pa each eed das ePi postal deer tet aan 186 ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay 00 ccc ccc e neeeee 187 ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay 2 0 0 0 0 ccc ccc eet eens 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit DEFine 0 00 e 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar 2 0 0 0 00 tenes 192 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar 2 20 0 sser 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATIO 0 00 0 cre 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATIO annuun nananana 194 ALGorithm EXPLicit SIZe lesse 194 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe cccc cer 195 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe 0 0 0 0 0 ccc cette eens 196 ALGorithm EXPLicit TIME 0 0 0 0 eee 196 ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine 0 00 197 AL Goth OUTPUEDELS as ia elas 198 ALGorithm OUTPut DELay ocooccoccooccoccncc era 199 ALGorithm UPDate IMMediate 0 ect e eee 199 ALGorithm UPDate CHANDe o ooocoococcoo n eens 200 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 0 0 00 cece cette
46. amp a c D 5 b 5 c abs c c 2 c else c a b Figure 4 4 Examples of C and BASIC if Statements Overall Prog ram The preceding discussion showed the differences between individual statements in BASIC and C The following shows how the VT1419A s Algorithm Language Structure elements are arranged into a program Here is a simple example algorithm that shows most of the elements discussed so far Example Algorithm to show language elements in the context of a complete custom algorithm Program variables user flag Set this value with the SCPI command ALG SCALAR user value Set this value with the SCPI command ALG SCALAR Program Function Algorithm returns user flag in CVT element 330 and another value in CVT element 331 each time the algorithm is executed When user flag 0 returns zero in CVT 331 When user flag is positive returns user value 2 in CVT 331 When user flag is negative returns user value 2 in CVT 331 and in FIFO Use the SCPI command ALGorithm SCALar followed by ALGorithm UPDate to set user flag and user value de static float user_flag 0 static float user_value writecvt user_flag 330 if user_flag user flag will be initialized to O when alg is defined not when run Declaration statements end with Always write user flag in CVT statement ends with if statement note no Chapter 4 13
47. check output less than limit output_val output_min if so output min limit 0140 output_val 2 split output val between two SCP 0141 output_val 2 channels to get up to 20 mA max Example 2 same function as example 1 above but shows a different approach static float max_output 020 20 mA max output static float min_output 004 4 mA min output following lines input limit output between min and max output and outputs output is split to two current output channels wired in parallel to provide 20 mA 0140 max min output min max output 12 5 1108 2 0141 max min output min max output 12 5 1108 2 Chapter 4 107 The Algorithm Language and Environment The Algorithm Execution Environment The Algorithm Execution Environment The Main Function How User Algorithms Fit In This section describes the execution environment that the VT1419A provides for algorithms Here the relationship between an algorithm and the main function that calls it is described All C language programs consist of one or more functions A C program must have a function called main In the VT1419A the main function is usually generated automatically by the driver when the INIT command is executed The main function executes each time the module is triggered and controls execution of an algorithm s functions See Figure 4 1 for a partial lis
48. command The choices for lt excite_current gt are 30E 6 or MIN and 488E 6 or MAX The lt excite_current gt parameter may be specified in milliamps ma and microamps ua The CAL command calibrates resistance channels based on Current Source SCP and Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion on page 57 for more information When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands OUTP CURR CAL RST Condition SENSE FUNC VOLT 100 163 FUNC RES 30ua 100 105 107 Set channels 0 5 and 7 to convert voltage to resistance assuming current source set to 30 uA use auto range default SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBENding FBPoisson FPOisson HBENding HPOisson QUARter Note on Syntax Although the strain function is comprised of six separate SCPI commands the only difference between them is the bridge type they specify to the strain EU conversion algorithm 272 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe e SENSe FUNCtion STRain lt bridge_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt links the strain EU conversion with the channels specified by ch list to measure the bridge voltage See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion on page 57 for more information lt bridge type gt is not a parameter but is part of the command syntax The followin
49. lt settle_time gt lt ch_list gt aoaaa a page 259 SENSe CHANnel SETTling lt channel gt 2 aaa page 260 SENSe DATA CVTable D lt element list ee page 260 SENSe DATA CVTable RESet lees page 261 SENSe DATA FIFOE ALL scam ma be ORWELL OSES EOS ms page 261 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNT lees ss page 262 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNT HALF 2er page 263 SENSe DATA FIFO HALF eee Sh S ro page 263 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK OVERwrite es page 264 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE 2 22 lel s rr page 264 SENSe DATA FIFO PART n readings ooo page 265 SBNSe DATA BIEO RESGE infos sms Rome x e X OR RO ee dex ROUES dn page 265 SENSe FREQuency APERture gate time gt O lt ch lis ss page 266 SENSe FREQuency APERture lt channel gt nnna page 267 SENSe FUNCtion CONDition lt ch_list gt 2 o page 267 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_lis gt o mo page 268 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt o o o o ooo page 269 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple lt type gt lt range gt lt ch_lis gt clic page 270 SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency lt ch_lisf gt 2 22e page 271 SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt Q ch list page 271 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBENding lt range gt DECh_liSt gt ee page 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBPoisson c
50. performing channel calibration 71 72 PWM variable width pulses at fixed frequency 69 CAL how to use 71 RST and power on defaults 53 4 20 mA adding sense circuits for 43 A A common error to avoid 116 A complete thermocouple measurement command sequence 64 A very simple first algorithm 120 Abbreviated Commands 178 ABORt subsystem 185 abs expression 124 Access bitfield 127 Accessing I O channels 110 Accessing the VT1419A s resources 109 113 Accessories Rack Mount Terminal Panel 46 Accuracy de volts 330 Sample timer 329 Temperature 331 Adding settling delay for specific channels 103 Adding terminal module components 43 Additive expression 130 Additive operator 130 ADDRess MEM VME ADDR 242 ADDRess MEM VME ADDR 242 After INIT 52 ALG DEFINE in the programming sequence 116 ALG DEFINE s three data formats 117 ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay 187 ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit DEFine 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar 192 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit SIZe 194 Index ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe 195 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe 196 ALGorithm EXPLicit TIMe 196 Algorithm definition 74 Algorithm execution order 116 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio 194 Algorithm Language reference 122 128 Algorithm language statement writecvt 112 writefifo 113 Algorithm A very simple first 120
51. start 1 2345 ALG ARR alg1 some_array 232 LF EOI ALG UPD The ALG SCAL command designates the name of the algorithm of where to find the local variable start and assigns that variable the value of 1 2345 Likewise the ALG ARRAY command designates the name of the algorithm the name of the local array and a definite length block for assigning the four real number values As can be seen the scalar assignment uses ASCII and the array assignment uses binary The later makes for a much faster transfer especially for large arrays The format used is IEEE 754 8 byte binary real numbers The header is 4232 which states the next 2 bytes are to be used to specify how many bytes are coming In this case 32 bytes represent the four 8 byte elements of the array A 100 element array would have a header of 43800 To pre initialize a global scalar or array the word globals must be used instead of the algorithm name The name simply specifies the memory space of where to find those elements 74 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Defining Data Storage As stated earlier in the chapter all updates changes are held in a holding buffer until the computer issues the update command The ALG UPD is that command Executing ALG UPD before INIT does not make much difference since there is no concern as to how long it takes or how it is implemented After INIT forces the buffered changes to all take place
52. the FIFO or both Using these functions algorithms can be created that simply perform a data acquisition function The following example shows acquiring eight channels of analog input from SCP position O and one channel 8 bits of digital input from a VT1533A in SCP position 7 The results of the acquisition are placed in the CVT and FIFO Data acquisition to CVT and FIFO writeboth 1100 330 channel O to FIFO and CVT element 330 writeboth 1101 331 channel 1 to FIFO and CVT element 331 writeboth 1102 332 channel 2 to FIFO and CVT element 332 writeboth 1103 333 channel 3 to FIFO and CVT element 333 writeboth 1104 334 channel 4 to FIFO and CVT element 334 writeboth 1105 335 channel 5 to FIFO and CVT element 335 writeboth 1106 336 channel 6 to FIFO and CVT element 336 writeboth 1107 337 channel 7 to FIFO and CVT element 337 writeboth 1156 338 channel 56 to FIFO and CVT element 338 Using SENS DATA FIFO and the SENS DATA CVT commands the application program can access the data Process Monitori Ng Another function the VT1419A performs well is monitoring input values and Al gorith m testing them against pre set limits If an input value exceeds its limit the algorithm can be written to supply an indication of this condition by changing a CVT value or even forcing a VXIbus interrupt The following example shows acquiring one analog input value
53. 0 1 MODE CHECksum CUSTom LINear lt table_range gt lt table_block gt lt ch list PIECewise table range gt lt table block aQ ch list REFerence TEMPerature IEEE 1 0 TEEE INTerrupt LINe lt intr_line gt LINe OTDetect STATe 1 0 ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt QUERy SSCPREAD lt reg_addr gt VERSion 218 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE mode sets the type of calibration to use for analog output SCPs like the VT1531A and VT1532A when CAL or CAL SET are executed Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean uint 16 0 1 volts Comments When lt mode gt is set to 1 the RST Default channels are calibrated using the Least Squares Fit method to provide the minimum error overall over the entire output range When lt mode gt is 0 channels are calibrated to provide the minimum error at their zero point See the SCPs User s Manual for its accuracy specifications using each mode e Related Commands CAL CAL SET DIAG CAL SET MODE e RST Condition DIAG CAL SET MODE 1 Usage set analog DAC SCP cal mode for best zero accuracy DIAG CAL SET MODE 0 set mode for best zero cal CAL start channel calibration DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE
54. 130 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Language Syntax Summary Relational Operator Equality Expression relational expression equality expression equality operator relational expression Equality Operator Logical AND Expression equality expression logical AND expression amp amp equality expression Expression logical AND expression expression logical AND expression Declarator identifier identifier integer constant expression NOTE integer constant expression in array identifier above must not exceed 1023 Init Declarator declarator declarator constant expression NOTES 1 May not initialize array declarator 2 Arrays limited to single dimension of 1024 maximum Init Declarator List init declarator init declarator list init declarator Chapter 4 131 The Algorithm Language and Environment Language Syntax Summary Declaration static float init declarator list Declarations declaration declarations declaration Intrinsic Statement interrupt writefifo expression writecvt expression constant expression writeboth expression constant expression return Expression Statement scalar identifier expression scalar identifier bit number expression array identifier integer constant expression expression intrinsic statement Selection Statement if expression statement if expression statement else statement Compound
55. 20 using an RTD SENSE REF RTD 92 120 SENSe JREFerence CHANnels Parameters Comments Usage SENSe REFerence CHANnels lt ref_channel gt lt ch_list gt causes channel specified by lt ref channel gt to appear in the scan list just before the channel s specified by lt ch list gt This command is used to include the thermocouple reference temperature channel in the scan list before other thermocouple channels are measured Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ref_channel channel list string 100 163 none ch_list channel list string 100 163 none e Use SENS FUNC TEMP to configure channels to measure thermocouples Then use SENS REF to configure one or more channels to measure an isothermal reference temperature Now use SENS REF CHAN to group the reference channel with its thermocouple measurement channels in the scan list e Ifthermocouple measurements are made through more than one isothermal reference panel set up a reference channel for each Execute the SENS REF CHAN command for each reference measurement channel group e Related commands SENS FUNC TEMP SENS REF e RST Condition Scan List contains no channel references SENS FUNC TEMP TC E 0625 108 115 E type TCs on channels 8 through 15 SENS REF THER 5000 1 106 Reference ch is thermistor at channel 6 SENS REF RTD 85 25 107 Reference ch is RTD at channel 7 SENS REF CHAN 106
56. 31 to the 0 0625 volt range SENS FUNC VOLT 16 100 123 SENS FUNC VOLT 625 128 131 must send a command per range When using manual range in combination with amplifier SCPs the EU conversion will try to return readings which reflect the value of the input signal However the user must choose range values that will provide good measurement performance avoiding over ranges and select ranges that provide good resolution based on the input signal In general measurements can be made at full speed using auto range Chapter 3 59 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels Linking Resistance To link channels to the resistance EU conversion send the Measurements SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt command Resistance measurements assume that there is at least one Current Source SCP installed eight current sources per SCP See Figure 3 6 Two Wire Measurement Four Wire Measurement not recommended Current Source SCP Current Source SCP Hi Field Wiring HI Field Wiring 2 A AVA A AVA 5 150 Ohm 5 8 O R 0 9 Lo LO o MN ANN o 150 Ohm 596 Because of the 150 Ohm resistor in series with each of the current source outputs Two Wire resistance and temperature measurements will have a 300 Ohm offset Any Sense SCP HI The current source HI terminal is the negative voltage node The
57. 4 TN OUTPUT FIFO Trigger 4 amp TRIG TIMER gt Trigger Buffer A A yl 5 E s 5 PHASE 3 alg 3 e CALCULATE 5 2 3 o 4 _ ALG OUTP DELAY gt 115 iagram Sequence Di ing VXlbus Algorithm Operat igure 4 2 F Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Defining Algorithms ALG DEF A Common Error to Avoid Algorithm Execution Order In other words algorithms don t actually read inputs at the time they reference input channels and they don t send values to outputs at the time they reference output channels Algorithms read channel values from an input buffer and write and can read output values to from an output buffer Here are example algorithm statements to describe operation inp_val 1108 inp_val is assigned a value from input buffer element 8 0137 22 3 output buffer element 37 assigned the value 22 3 0133 0132 output buffer 32 is read and assigned to output buffer 33 Since the buffered input algorithm execution buffered output sequence is probably not a method many are familiar with a programming mistake associated with it is easy to make It is hoped that once seen here that it will not be duplicated The following algorithm statements will help explain 0156 B0 1 digital output bit on VT1533A in SCP position 3 0156 B0 0 Traditionally the first of these two statements is expected to
58. 4 7 INPUT FILTER FREQUENCY 2 140 143 INPUT GAIN 64 140 143 INPUT GAIN 8 144 147 set up digital channel characteristics INPUT POLARITY NORM 156 RST default OUTPUT POLARITY NORM 157 RST default OUTPUT TYPE ACTIVE 157 link channels to EU conversions measurement functions SENSE FUNCTION VOLTAGE AUTO 100 107 RST default SENSE REFERENCE THER 5000 AUTO 108 SENSE FUNCTION TEMPERATURE TC T AUTO 109 123 SENSE REFERENCE CHANNELS 108 109 123 configure digital output channel for alarm channel SOURCE FUNCTION CONDITION 157 execute channel calibration CAL can take several minutes Configure the Trigger System ARM SOURCE IMMEDIATE RST default TRIGGER COUNT INF RST default TRIGGER TIMER 010 RST default 86 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Example Command Sequence TRIGGER SOURCE TIMER RST default specify data format FORMAT ASC 7 RST default select FIFO mode SENSE DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK may read FIFO while running Define algorithm ALG DEFINE ALG1 static float a b c div mult sub if First_loop a 1 b 2 c 3 writecvt a 10 writefifo b 11 writefifo c 12 writecvt a div 13 writecvt b mult 14 writecvt c sub 15 Pre set coefficients ALG SCAL ALG1 div 5 ALG SCAL ALG1 mult 5 ALG SCAL ALG1 sub 0 ALG UPDATE initiate trigger system start algorithm INITIATE retr
59. 47 to 488 uA Set Current Source SCP at ch 48 to 30 uA OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt channel gt returns the range setting of the Current Source SCP channel specified by lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel If lt channel gt specifies an SCP which is not a Current Source a 3007 Invalid signal conditioning plug on error is generated Returned Value Numeric value of amplitude set The C SCPI type is float32 Related Commands OUTP CURR AMPL 246 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut Usage OUTP CURR AMPLITUDE 140 Check SCP current set for channel 40 returns 3 0E 5 or 4 88E 4 OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut CURRent STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables current source on channels specified in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none ch_list channel list string 132 163 none Comments OUTP CURR STAT does not affect a channel s amplitude setting A channel that has been disabled when re enabled sources the same current set by the previous OUTP CURR AMPL command e OUTP CURR STAT is most commonly used to turn off excitation current
60. 6 VT1419A Command Reference Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference Command LOW lt channel gt POLarity NOR mal INVerted lt ch_list gt POLarity lt channel gt AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt STATe ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt POLarity NOR mal INVerted lt ch_list gt POLarity lt channel gt SHUNt ON OFF lt ch_list gt SHUNt lt channel gt TYPE PASSive ACTive lt ch_list gt TYPE A lt channel gt VOLTage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt TIMer lt num_samples gt lt ch_list gt TIMer lt channel gt APERture lt gate_time gt lt ch_list gt APERture lt channel gt Description Returns the LO connection for the Strain Bridge at channel Sets input polarity on a digital SCP channel Returns digital polarity currently set for lt channel MEMory VME ADDRess mem address gt Specify address of VME memory card to be used as reading storage ADDRess Returns address of VME memory card SIZE lt mem_size gt Specify number of bytes of VME memory to be used to store readings SIZE Returns number of VME memory bytes allocate to reading storage STATe 1 0 ON OFF Enable or disable reading storage in VME memory at INIT STATe Returns state of VME memory 1 enabled 0 disabled OUTPut CURRent S
61. A programmable Filter SCP has a choice of several discrete cutoff frequencies The cutoff frequency set will be the one closest to the value specified by cutoff freg gt Refer to Chapter 6 for specific information on the SCP being programmed Sending MAX for the cutoff freg gt selects the SCP s highest cutoff frequency Sending MIN for the cutoff freq selects the SCP s lowest cutoff frequency To disable filtering the pass through mode execute the INP FILT STATE OFF command e Sending a value greater than the SCP s highest cutoff frequency or less than the SCP s lowest cutoff frequency generates a 222 Data out of range error e When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands INP FILT FREQ INP FILT STAT ON OFF e RST Condition set to MIN INP FILT FREQ 100 140 143 Set cutoff frequency of 100 Hz for channels 40 through 43 INPUT FILTER FREQ 2 155 Set cutoff frequency of 2 Hz for channel 55 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency Parameters Comments INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt channel gt returns the cutoff frequency currently set for lt channel gt Non programmable SCP channels may be queried to determine their fixed cutoff frequency If the channel is not on an input SCP the query will return zero Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none e The lt channel gt parameter must specify a
62. Actions 20 30 37 Remove all SCPs and see if TST passes If so replace SCPs one at a time until the one causing the problem is found 38 71 VXI Technology Service 72 74 76 80 93 Re seat the SCP that the channel number s 301 354 points to or move the SCP and see if the failure s follow the SCP If the problems move with the SCP replace the SCP 73 T1 79 94 99 VXI Technology Service Must send module to a VXI Technology Service Center for repair Record information found in FIFO to assist the VXI Technology Service Center in repairing the problem Refer to the Command Reference under TST for a list of module functions tested NOTE During the first five minutes after power is applied TST may fail Allow the module to warm up before executing TST 3053 Corrupt on board Flash memory 3056 Custom EU not loaded May have erased custom EU conversion table with RST May have linked channel with standard EU after loading custom EU this erases the custom EU for this channel Reload custom EU table using DIAG CUST LIN or DIAG CUST PIEC 3057 Invalid ARM or TRIG source when S H SCP s enabled Don t set TRIG SOUR or ARM SOUR to SCP with VT1510A or VT15114A installed 3058 Hardware does not have D32 S H or new trigger capabilities Module s serial number is earlier than 3313A00530 3067 Multiple attempts to erase flash memory failed 3068 Multiple a
63. Algorithmic error queue full ALG DEF has generated too many errors from the algorithm source code Error 1 Error 2 Error 3 Error 4 Error 5 Error 6 Error 7 Error 8 Error 9 Error 10 Error 11 Error 12 Error 13 Error 14 Error 15 Error 16 Error 17 Error 18 Error 19 Error 20 Error 21 Error 22 Error 23 Error 24 Error 25 Error 26 Error 27 Error 28 Error 29 Error 30 Error 31 Error 32 Error 33 Error 34 Error 35 Error 36 Error 37 Error 38 Error 39 Number too big for a 32 bit float Number too big for a 32 bit integer 8 or 9 not allowed in an octal number Syntax error Expecting Expecting Expecting an expression Out of driver memory Expecting a bit number Bn or Bnn Expecting Expecting an identifier Arrays can t be initialized Expecting static Expecting float Expecting Expecting Expecting Expecting Expecting Expecting a statement Expecting if Can t write to input channels Expecting a constant expression Expecting an integer constant expression Reference to an undefined variable Array name used in a scalar context Scalar name used in an array context Variable name used in a custom function co
64. CAL CONF RES 208 CAL CONF VOLT 209 CAL SETup 210 CAL SETup 210 CAL STORe 211 CAL TARE 212 CAL TARE and thermocouples 98 CAL TARE resetting 99 CAL TARE RESet 214 CAL TARE 214 CAL VAL RESistance 214 CAL VAL VOLTage 215 CAL ZERO 216 CALibration subsystem 207 217 Calibration channel CAL 311 Calibration control of 21 Calling user defined functions 114 Capability maximum tare 99 CAUTIONS Loss of process control by algorithm 185 195 305 Safe handling procedures 16 Certification 2 Changing an algorithm while it s running 118 Changing gains 99 Changing gains or filters 99 Changing timer interval while scanning 308 CHANnel ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel 200 Channel calibration CAL 311 Channels defined input 111 output 56 70 111 setting up analog input 56 65 setting up digital input 66 70 CHANnels SENSe REFerence CHANnels 278 Channels accessing I O 110 Channels adding settling delay for specific 103 Channels input 110 Channels output 110 Channels special identifiers for 123 Characteristics settling 101 104 Checking for problems 102 CHECksum DIAG CHECK 221 Clearing event registers 94 Clearing the enable registers 93 Coefficients 85 Command Abbreviated 178 Implied 179 Linking 181 Separator 178 Command Quick Reference 321 323 328 Command Reference Common CAL 311 CLS 312 DMC 312 EMC 312 EMC 312 ESE 312 ESE 313 ESR 313 GMC
65. CALibration TARE lt ch_list gt 2 rs page 212 CALibration TARE RESOt a uos sues x de a ri E E o E du CR s page 214 CALibration TARE 2248466846 ro tidra ie E Eae o E Eee X A ow 9b d E EG page 214 CALibration VALue RESistance ref ohms gt ee page 214 CALibration VALue VOL Tage ref volts 22e page 215 CAlabratiot ZBRO Y us oue aot te oe ee A A Rae eS ee Ergo page 216 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup IMODE 0 l o e e page 219 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE o page 219 DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE 0 l o o page 220 DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect IMODE 2 0 2 200000 page 220 DiIAGnostic CHECKSUM cs ip oy ee ee Re Y Y EE ED awd aed ee RO e page 221 DIAGnostic CUStom LINear lt table_range gt lt table_block gt lt ch_lis gt page 221 DIAGnostic CUStom PIECewise lt table_range gt lt table_block gt lt ch_list gt page 222 DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature page 222 DIAGnostic IEEE OI usas as as pe ee hae OG BOX E GH ee Eee PADS eee ERS as page 223 DIAGnostic IEEE ee ee es page 223 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe lt int_line gt 2 ee page 223 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe 2 ee page 224 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe 1 0 ON OFF Q ch list ee es page 224 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe lt channel gt ooo page 225 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD reg addr gt aa
66. Commands SENSE DATA CVT e RST Condition SENSE DATA CVT RESET Usage SENSE DATA CVT RESET Clear the Current Value Table SENSe DATA FIFO ALL SENSe DATA FIFO ALL returns all values remaining in the FIFO buffer until all measurements are complete or until the number of values returned exceeds FIFO buffer size 65 024 Comments DATA FIFO may be used to acquire all values even while they are being made into a single large buffer or can be used after one or more DATA FIFO HALF commands to return the remaining values from the FIFO Chapter 6 261 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe e The format of values returned is set using the FORMat DATA command e Returned Value ASCII values are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each value is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOI follow the last value The C SCPI data type is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 values are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter For REAL 32 each value is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 each value is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float64 array NOTE Algorithm values which are a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF and a negative overvoltage
67. E DO gt er _ Ooo er O DO DOr On p 0 3 9400 O og o ER g2 a Terminal Blocks for O Signal Connections DO m Jumper to select On board or Remote Temperature Sensing E ns NES EN Ir O Oo mom as O O NS Terminal block with Remote Reference Temperature Sensing Trigger and A D Calibration Bus Connections Thermistor for On boar Reference Temperature Figure 2 5 The Option 12 Spring Terminal Module 32 Chapter 2 Field Wiring Reference Temperature Sensing with the VT1419A Reference Temperature Sensing with the VT1419A The Terminal Modules provide an on board thermistor for sensing isothermal reference temperature of the terminal blocks Also provided is a jumper set JM1 in Figures 2 5 and 2 4 to route the VT1419A s on board current source to a thermistor or RTD on a remote isothermal reference block Figures 2 6 and 2 7 show connections for both local and remote sensing Terminal Module i Field Wiring HTI 9 ON REM BOARD HI On Board Current Source LI H Any Sense Channel i Lnn Figure 2 6 Remote Thermistor or RTD Connections Terminal Module Field Wir
68. FIFO SENSe JDATA CVTable and FETCh commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units format discrete string REAL ASCii PACKed none size numeric for ASCii 7 none for REAL 32 64 for PACKed 64 Comments e The REAL format is IEEE 754 Floating Point representation REAL 32 provides the highest data transfer performance since no format conversion step is placed between reading and returning the data The default size for the REAL format is 32 bits Also see DIAG IEEE command PACKed 64 returns the same values as REAL 64 except for Not a Number NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF The NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF values returned by PACKed 64 are in a form compatible with HP Workstation BASIC and HP BASIC UX see table on following page REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Arbitrary Block Data format The Block Data may be either Definite Length or Indefinite Length depending on the data query command executed These data return formats are explained in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter For REAL 32 readings are 4 bytes in length C SCPI type is float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are 8 bytes in length C SCPI type is float64 array ASCii is the default format ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Eac
69. Model 00 0 0 ccc page 51 e Executing the Programming Model suus page 51 Programming Overview Diagram oo oooooooooo page 55 Setting up Analog Input and Output Channels page 55 Configuring Programmable SCP Parameters page 55 Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion page 57 Linking Output Channels to Functions page 66 Setting up Digital Input and Output Channels page 66 Digital Input Channels lees page 66 Digital Output Channels o oocooccocccccoccoc o page 67 Performing Channel Calibration Important page 71 Defining C Language Algorithms page 73 Pre setting Algorithm variables and coefficients page 74 Defining Data Storage 0 0 0 eee page 75 Specifying the Data Format 2005 page 75 Selecting the FIFO Mode 00000005 page 76 Setting up the Trigger System 0 00005 page 77 Arm and Trigger Sources 00 cee eee ee page 77 Programming the Trigger Timer page 79 INITiating Running Algorithms page 80 Retrieving Algorithm Data 0 0 0 0 00 00 page 81 Reading Algorithm Variables 0204 page 81 Modifying Algorithm Variables 000 page 85 Updating Algorithm Variables 0 page 85 Enabling Disablin
70. Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units settle time numeric int16 1 to 64 none ch_list string 100 163 none Comments SENS CHAN SETTLING causes each channel specified in cA list gt that is also referenced in an algorithm to appear lt num samples gt times in the analog input Scan List Channels that do not appear in any SENS CHAN SETT command will be entered into the scan list only once when referenced in an algorithm Since the scan list is limited to 64 entries an error will be generated if the number of channels referenced in algorithms plus the additional entries from any SENS CHAN SETTLING commands that coincide with algorithm referenced channels exceeds 64 The SAMPLE TIMER command can change the effect of the SENS CHAN SETTLING command since SAMPLE TIMER changes the amount of time for cach measurement sample When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands SENSe JCHANnel SETTling SAMPLE TIMER RST Condition SENS CHAN SETTLING 1 0100 163 Usage SENS CHAN SETT 4 144 156 settle channels 44 and 56 for 4 measurement periods Chapter 6 259 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe CHANnel SETTling SENSe CHANnel SETTling channel returns the current number of samples to make on channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 100 163 none Comments
71. RES 30e 6 100 103 link channels 0 through 4 to resistance EU conversion 8 kQ or greater OUTP CURR AMPL 488e 6 136 139 set 4 channels to output 488 uA for less than 8 kQ resistances SENS FUNC RES 488e 6 104 107 link channels 4 through 7 to resistance EU conversion less than 8 kQ Linking Temperature To link channels to temperature EU conversion send the Measurements SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt type gt sub type lt range gt lt ch_list gt command e The lt ch list gt parameter specifies which channel s to link to the temperature EU conversion e The lt type gt parameter specifies RTD THERmistor or TC for ThermoCouple e The optional lt range gt parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified defaulted the module uses auto range RTD and Thermistor Measurements Temperature measurements using resistance type sensors involve all the same considerations as resistance measurements discussed in the previous section See the discussion of Figure 3 6 in Linking Resistance Measurements For resistance temperature measurements the sub type gt parameter specifies e For RTDs 85 or 92 for 100 ohm RTDs with 0 003 85 or 0 00392 ohms ohm C temperature coefficients respectively e For Thermistors 2250 5000 or 10000 the nominal value of these devices at25 C NOTES 3 Resistance temperature measurements RTDs and THERmistors require the use of Curre
72. Related Commands CAL VAL VOLT STOR ADC CAL CONF VOLTAGE 0625 ZERO connect voltage reference to Calibration Bus OPC or SYST ERR must wait for CAL CONF VOLT to complete now measure voltage with external DMM CAL VAL VOLT measured value Send measured value to module repeat above sequence for full scale repeat zero and full scale for remaining ranges 0 25 1 4 16 CAL STORE ADC Store cal constants in non volatile memory used only at end of complete cal sequence Chapter 6 209 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration CALibration SETup CALibration SETup causes the Channel Calibration function to be performed for every module channel with an analog SCP installed input or output The Channel Calibration function calibrates the A D Offset and the Gain Offset for these analog channels This calibration is accomplished using internal calibration references For more information see CAL on page 311 Comments CAL SET performs the same operation as the CAL command except that since it is not a query command it doesn t tie up the C SCPI driver waiting for response data from the instrument If there are multiple VT1419As in a system start a CAL SET operation on each and then execute a CAL SET command to complete the operation on each instrument e Related Commands CAL SETup CAL e When Accepted Not while INITiated Usage CAL SET start SCP Calibration on Ist VT1419A start SCP Calibration on more
73. SENSe STRain POISS0n Poisson 281 SENSe STRain UNSTrained 0 0 0 0 cece ene eens 282 SENSe STRain UNSTrained eiae n e ene ear 282 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 00 0000 ccc tenes 283 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 00 0 eee 284 SOURCE A IS 285 SOURce EM ESTA Toi eremo ERR ii dra ER 285 SOURGe EM STTATS6 a a elt sauna E 286 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CONDition oooooooooroooc eee 286 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe 0 0 ce ences 287 Contents SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare oooococoococcrr e 287 SOURce PULMESTA TE iaa dada 287 SOURCce PULMESTA Te ua uet te SER HER See gad ii 288 SOURce PULSs PERIOA ss as asian ydp e bop Gand P US ER 288 SOURce PULESe PBRiOd 512 4 iria dO aul Kee eh Petit ded aah we dd 289 SOURce PULSe WIDTH cassa ssa aiii D e pee RC ee daa ea 289 SOURce PULSe WID Th ia gt 289 SS DOSE age de si E eadera O SR t Ee EE 291 STATus OPERation CONDition 0 usores cee ee 293 STATus OPERation ENABle sssseseeseeeseeeee erroreren 294 STATus OPERation ENABle ccccc ne eens 294 STATus OPERation EVENt 20 00 0200 ccc cee es 295 STATus OPERation NTRansition es 0 20 0 0 cette eens 295 STATus OPERation NTRansition 2 2 0 tte eens 296 STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 00 0 cece 296 STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 2 0 0 0c ete eens 297 STATUS PRESET Son a a Ce qo dee sited a wae dl da UR casas 297 STATus QUEStionable CONDiti
74. Since the algorithm has no way to specify that an input channel is a reference temperature channel the command SENSe REFerence CHANnels lt ref_chan gt lt meas_ch_list gt is used to place the ref chan channel in the scan list before the related thermocouple measuring channels Now when analog channels are scanned the VT1419A will include the reference channel in the scan list and will scan it before the specified thermocouples are scanned The reference measurement will be stored in the Reference Temperature Register The reference temperature value is applied to the thermocouple EU conversions for thermocouple channel measurements that follow A Complete Thermocouple Measurement Command Sequence The command sequence performs these functions e Configures reference temperature measurement on channel 15 e Configures thermocouple measurements on channels 16 through 23 e Instructs the VT1419A to add channel 15 to the Scan List and order channels so channel 15 will be scanned before channels 16 through 23 SENS REF THER 5000 0115 5k thermistor temperature for channel 15 SENS FUNC TEMP TC J 116 123 Type J thermocouple temperature for channels 16 through 23 SENS REF CHAN 115 116 123 configure reference channel to be scanned before channels 16 23 Supplying a Fixed Reference Temperature The SENSe REFerence TEMPerature degrees c gt command immediately stores the temperature of a controlled temperature re
75. VT1534A has 8 I O bits that are individually configured as channels To configure the lower 8 bit channel of a VT1533A for inverted polarity INP POLARITY INV 156 SCP in SCP position 7 To configure the lower 4 bits of a VT1534A for inverted polarity INP POL INV 148 151 SCP in SCP position 6 66 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels Setting Input Function Both the VT1533A Digital I O SCP and VT1534A Frequency Totalizer SCP can input static digital states The VT1534A Frequency Totalizer SCP can also input Frequency measurements and Totalize the occurrence of positive or negative digital signal edges Static State CONDition Function To configure digital channels to input static states use the SENSe FUNCtion CONDition lt ch_list gt command Examples To set the lower 8 bit channel of a VT1533A in SCP position 4 to input SENS FUNC COND 132 To set the upper 4 channels bits of a VT1534A in SCP pos 5 to input states SENS FUNC COND 144 147 Frequency Function The frequency function uses two commands For more on this VT1534A capability see the SCP s User s Manual To set the frequency counting gate time execute SENSe FREQuency APERature lt gate_time gt lt ch_list gt Sets the digital channel function to frequency SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency lt ch_list gt Totalizer Function The totalizer function uses two commands also One
76. ZB VXI Interrupts When bits 9 10 or 11 are enabled and C SCPI overlap mode is on or if using non compiled SCPI VXI card interrupts will be enabled When the event corresponding to bit 9 10 or 11 occurs the card will generate a VXI interrupt Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT QUES COND STAT QUES EVENT STAT QUES ENABLE Cleared By STAT PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Usage STAT QUES ENABLE 128 Set bit 7 in the Questionable Enable register STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle returns the value of bits set in the Questionable Enable register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT QUES COND STAT QUES EVENT STAT QUES ENABLE RST Condition No change Usage STAT QUES ENABLE Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the Questionable Enable register STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Event register Chapter 6 299 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS Comments Usage STAT QUES EVENT When using the Questionable Event register to cause SRQ interrupts STAT QUES EVENT must be executed after an SRQ to clear the register and re enable future interrupts Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 Cleared By CLS power on and by readi
77. allowable for the SCP will generate a 222 Data out of range error e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands INP GAIN e RST Condition gain set to MIN Usage INP GAIN 8 140 147 INPUT GAIN 64 155 Set gain of 8 for channels 40 through 47 Set gain of 64 for channel 55 INPut GAIN INPut GAIN lt channel gt returns the gain currently set for lt channel gt If the channel is not on an input SCP the query will return zero Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments channel must specify a single channel only e f the channel specified does not have a programmable amplifier INP GAIN will return the nominal as designed gain for that channel Chapter 6 237 VT1419A Command Reference INPut e Returned Value Numeric value as set by the INP GAIN command The C SCPI type is float32 e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands INP GAIN e RST Condition gain setto 1 Usage INPUT GAIN 0105 Check gain on channel 5 INP GAIN 100 Check gain on channel O INPut LOW INPut LOW lt wvolt_type gt lt ch_list gt controls the connection of input LO at a Strain Bridge SCP channel specified by lt ch list gt LO can be connected to the Wagner Voltage ground or left floating Parameters Param
78. and ALG OUTP DEL commands to determine the new delay that includes the added algorithm When Accepted Before INIT only RST Condition ALG OUTP DELAY AUTO ALGorithm OUTPut DELay ALGorithm OUTPut DELay returns the delay setting from ALG OUTP DEL Comments The value returned will be either the value set by ALG OUTP DEL lt delay gt or the value determined by ALG OUTP DEL AUTO When Accepted Before INIT only RST Condition ALG OUTP DEL AUTO returns delay setting determined by AUTO mode Returned Value number of seconds of delay The type is float32 ALGorithm UPDate IMMediate ALGorithm UPDate IMMediate requests an immediate update of any scalar array algorithm code ALG STATE or ALG SCAN RATIO changes that are pending Comments e Variables and algorithms can be accepted during Phase 1 INPUT or Phase 2 UPDATE in Figure 6 1 when INIT is active All writes to variables and algorithms occur to their buffered elements upon receipt However these changes do not take effect until the ALG UPD IMM command is processed at the beginning ofthe UPDATE phase The update command can be received at any time prior to the UPDATE phase and will be the last command accepted Note that the ALG UPD WINDow command specifies the maximum number of Chapter 6 199 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Command Sequence updates to do If no update command is pending when entering the UPDATE phase then this time is d
79. and analysis to perform Agilent VEE can quickly read the buffered data when required Data is retrieved from the FIFO with DATA FIFO PART count The lt count gt parameter can be a number larger than the FIFO up to 2 1 billion if reading data continuously with Agilent VEE READ transactions is desired The amount of data that is in the FIFO can also be queried using the DATA FIFO COUNT command 82 Chapter 3 Read Variables Directly Which FIFO Mode Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Retrieving Algorithm Data To directly read algorithm variables that are not stored in the FIFO or CVT simply specify the memory space algorithm name or globals and the name of the variable To read the values of scalar variables or single array elements use the command ALG SCALar To read an entire array use ALG ARRay The former returns data in ASCII and the later returns data in REAL 64 8 byte IEEE 754 format This coincides with the ALG SCAL and ALG ARR commands form writing data to these variables Here are some examples ALG SCAL globals my_var ALG SCAL alg1 my_array 6 ALG ARR alg2 my other array The ALG ARR response data will consist of a block header and real 64 data bytes For example ifmy other array was 10 elements the block header would be 4280 which says there are two bytes of count that specify 80 bytes of data to follow Data from the VT1419A is terminated with the GPIB EOI signal
80. as algorithms because an algorithm is a step by step procedure for solving some problem or accomplishing some end Though the documentation continues to refer to the C code as algorithms they may be thought of in traditional terms with each algorithm representing a C function with a main program which calls them The user written C algorithms execute after all analog digital inputs have been stored in the Input Buffer The C code accesses the measurement data like constants with the names of 1100 1163 representing the 32 bit real EU converted numbers As seen in Figure 3 1 the algorithms have access to both local and global variables and arrays The I variables are inherently global and accessible by any algorithm Local variables are only visible to the particular algorithm just like in C functions Declared global variables can be shared by any algorithm Agilent s VEE can read or write any local or global variable in any algorithm by using SCPI syntax that actually identifies the variable by name but a more efficient means of reading data is available through the VT1419A s FIFO and Current Value Table CVT As seen in Figure 3 1 any algorithm can write any expression or constant to the FIFO CVT Agilent VEE can then read the FIFO CVT to characterize what s happening inside the VT1419A and to provide an operator view of any input output channel variable or constant Output SCP s derive their channel valu
81. bake xoa rde BORE RESP Gee XP See das xus page 313 BOPE mas 4 aca GU a Ae oon ee ee a ee Se ee oe Ae IRE ae A page 314 AA AE deuce ig Bt gs Bees Sie Ws Me ee eN page 314 PMC Ro rear o BH DS aa CE Ae PA ees hoe ae ER he oe aS page 315 MS PR cat Se oes Smee cet ts cg SO Hs My ecm ded Sp a Beart ye Deak E page 315 BRST anew te os aes A AO A deg A BS ee a ee ae page 315 ASE geet isc di chet aoe Gated Gees ene ae Behe Me ee Boa eee sn Ge page 316 SRE aportada aaa ds page 316 A BE qu GA IN NE page 316 MERO proa Sroka te o e A O ein Ge ea GR E to ta St page 316 A EII GE ee eee SH page 317 WALD sd E ss Tam eee dee bees dead aa bas Hebd eo eds page 320 Chapter 6 177 VT1419A Command Reference Command Fundamentals Common Command Format SCPI Command Format Command Separator Abbreviated Commands Commands are separated into two types IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Commands The SCPI command set for the VT1419A is 1990 compatible The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the Common commands that perform functions like reset self test status byte query etc Common commands are four or five characters in length always begin with the asterisk character and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of Common commands are RST ESR 32 STB The SCPI commands perform functions like configuring channels setting up the trigger system a
82. by channel references in the algorithms currently defined e The type parameter selects which channel list will be queried AIN selects the Analog Input list AOUT selects the Analog Output list DIN selects the Digital Input list DOUT selects the Digital Output list e Returned Value Numeric The C SCPI type is int16 e RST Condition The Analog Input list returns 8 the others return 0 Usage ROUT SEQ POINTS AIN query for analog input channel count Chapter 6 255 SAMPle The SAMPle subsystem provides commands to set and query the interval between channel measurements pacing Subsystem Syntax SAMPle TIMer lt interval gt TIMer SAMPle TIMer SAMPle TIMer lt interval gt sets the time interval between channel measurements It is used to provide additional channel settling time See Settling Characteristics discussion on page 101 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units interval numeric float32 string 1 0E 5 to 16 3825E 3 seconds MIN MAX Comments The minimum interval is 10 us The resolution for lt interval gt is 2 5 us e Ifthe Sample Timer interval multiplied by the number of channels in the specified Scan List is longer than the Trigger Timer interval at run time a Trigger too fast error will be generated e The SAMP TIMER interval can change the effect of the SENS CHAN SETTLI
83. complete Any changes to the measurement set up will not be allowed until the TRIG COUNT is reached or an ABORT command is given Of course any commands or queries can be given to other instruments while the VT1419A is running algorithms 94 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Updating the Status System and VXIbus Interrupts Updating the Status System and VXIbus Interrupts Note The driver needs to update the status system s information whenever the status of the VT1419A changes This update is always done when the status system 1s accessed or when CALibrate INITiate or ABORt commands are executed Most of the bits in the OPER and QUES registers represent conditions which can change while the VT1419A is measuring initiated In many circumstances it is sufficient to have the status system bits updated the next time the status system is accessed or the INIT or ABORt commands are given When it is desired to have the status system bits updated closer in time to when the condition changes on the VT1419A the VT1419A interrupts can be used The VT1419A can send VXI interrupts upon the following conditions e Trigger too Fast condition is detected Trigger comes prior to trigger system being ready to receive trigger e FIFO overflowed In either FIFO mode data was received after the FIFO was full e Overvoltage detection on input If the input protection jumper has not been cut the input relays have all been op
84. completely loaded into space B and an ALG UPDATE command has been sent the VT1419A simply switches to executing ALG3 s new algorithm from space B at the next Update Phase see Figure 3 8 If yet another ALG3 were sent it would be loaded and executed from ALG3 s space A 118 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Defining Algorithms ALG DEF Determining an In order to define an algorithm for swapping it is necessary to know how much Algorithm s Size algorithm memory to allocate for it or any of its replacements This information can be queried from the VT1419A Use the following sequence 1 Define the algorithm without swapping enabled This will cause the VT1419A to allocate only the memory actually required by the algorithm 2 Execute the ALG SIZE lt alg_name gt command to query the amount of memory allocated The minimum amount of memory required for the algorithm is now known 3 Repeat 1 and 2 for each of the algorithms that will be swapped with the original From this the minimum amount of memory required for the largest is determined 4 Execute RST to erase all algorithms 5 Re define one of the algorithms with swapping enabled and specify lt swap_size gt at least as large as the value from step 3 above and probably somewhat larger because as alternate algorithms declare different variables space is allocated for total of all variables declared 6 Swap each of the alternate algorithms for
85. current source LO terminal is the positive voltage node LO Sense Channel Figure 3 6 Resistance Measurement Sensing e The lt excite current gt parameter is used only to tell the EU conversion what the Current Source SCP channel is now set to lt excite current gt is specified in amps dc and the choices for the VT1505A SCP are 30e 6 or MIN and 488e 6 or MAX Select 488 uA for measuring resistances of less than 8 000 Q Select 30 yA for resistances of 8 000 Q and above e The optional lt range gt parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified defaulted the module uses auto range e The lt ch_list gt parameter specifies which channel s to link to the resistance EU conversion These channels will sense the voltage across the unknown resistance Each can be a Current Source SCP channel a two wire resistance measurement or a sense channel separate from the Current Source SCP channel a four wire resistance measurement See figure 3 6 for diagrams of these measurement connections To set channels 0 through 3 to measure resistances greater than 8 000 ohms and set channels 4 through 7 to measure resistances less than 8k in this case paired to current source SCP channels 32 through 39 60 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels OUTP CURR AMPL 30e 6 132 135 set 4 channels to output 30 uA for 8 kQ or greater resistances SENS FUNC
86. data byte s gt lt NL END gt Examples of sending or receiving 4 data bytes 0 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt NL END gt Optional Parameters Parameters shown within square brackets are optional parameters Note that the brackets are not part of the command and should not be sent to the instrument If a value for an optional parameter is no specified the instrument chooses a default value For example consider the FORMAT DATA lt type gt lt length gt command If the command is sent without specifying lt ength gt a default value for lt ength gt will be selected depending on the type of format specified For example FORMAT DATA ASC will set lt ength gt to the default for ASC of 7 FORMAT DATA REAL will set lt ength gt to the default for REAL of 32 FORMAT DATA REAL 64 will set lt ength gt to 64 Be sure to place a space between the command and the first parameter Linking commands is used to send more than one complete command in a single command statement Linking IEEE 488 2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands Use a semicolon between the commands For example RST OUTP TTLT3 ON or TRIG SOUR IMM TRG Linking Multiple complete SCPI Commands Use both a semicolon and a colon between the commands For example OUTP TTLT2 ON TRIG SOUR EXT The semicolon as well as separating commands tells the SCPI parser to expect the command keyword following the semicolon to be at th
87. dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified 1s auto range If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if the expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 range must be set no lower than 1 V dc or an input out of range condition will exist The channel calibration command CAL calibrates the excitation voltage source on each Bridge Completion SCP Chapter 6 273 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands CAL SENSE STRAIN RST Condition SENSE FUNC VOLT 0 100 163 Usage FUNC STRAIN 1 100 105 107 quarter bridge sensed at channels 0 5 and 7 SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels to an EU conversion for temperature based on the sensor specified in type and sub type Not for sensing thermocouple reference temperature for that use the SENS REF lt type gt lt sub_type gt lt channel gt command Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete string RTD THERmistor TCouple none sub type numeric float32 for RTD use 85 92 none numeric float32 for THER use 2250 5000 10000 ohms discrete stri
88. defined names The VT1419A can extract function values from these tables in under 18 us regardless of the function s original complexity This method provides faster algorithm execution by moving the complex math operations off board This section assumes that the user already programs in some language If already programming in the C language this chapter is probably all that will be needed to create algorithms If unfamiliar with the C programming language study the Program Structure and Syntax section before beginning to write custom algorithms This section will present a quick look at the Algorithm Language The complete language reference is provided later in this chapter Arithmetic Operators add subtract multiply divide NOTE Also see Calling User Defined Functions on page 114 Assignment Operator Comparison Functions less than lt less than or equal lt greater than gt greater than or equal gt equal to not equal to Boolean Functions and amp amp or not Variables scalars of type static float and single dimensioned arrays of type static float limited to 1024 elements 106 Chapter 4 Example Language wka Usage The Algorithm Language and Environment Overview of the Algorithm Language Constants 32 bit decimal integer Dddd where D and d are decimal digits but D is not zero No decimal point or exponent specified 32 bit octal integer 000 where O
89. during the next Update Phase in the trigger cycle after reception of the ALG UPD command Defining Data Storage Specifying the Data Format Turning Off IEEE INF and NaN Values The format of the values stored in the FIFO buffer and CVT never changes They are always stored as IEEE 32 bit Floating point numbers The FORMat lt format gt lt length gt command merely specifies whether and how the values will be converted as they are transferred from the CVT and FIFO to the host computer e The lt format gt lt length gt parameters can specify PACKED Same as REAL 64 except for the values of IEEE INF IEEE INF and Not a Number NaN See FORMat command in Chapter 5 for details REAL 32 means real 32 bit no conversion fastest REAL same as above REAL 64 means real 64 bit values converted ASCii 7 means 7 bit ASCII values converted ASCii same as above the RST condition To specify that values are to remain in IEEE 32 bit Floating Point format for fastest transfer rate FORMAT REAL 32 To specify that values are to be converted to 7 bit ASCII and returned as a 15 character per value comma separated list FORMAT ASC 7 The RST TST and power on default format or FORM ASC same operation as above The VT1419A stores data in its FIFO and CVT in a data format adhering to the IEEE 754 This format yields INF and NaN numbers for those values that indicate an out of bound condition overrange reading or some un
90. exceed the lifetime of the flash memory for approximately 27 years an application that stored constants many times each day would unnecessarily shorten the flash memory s lifetime See Comments below Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete string ADC TARE none e The flash memory Protect jumper JM2201 must be set to the enable position before executing this command see Chapter 1 e Channel offsets are compensated by the CAL TARE command even when not stored in the flash memory There is no need to use the CAL STORE TARE command for channels which are re calibrated frequently e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands CAL VAL RES CAL VAL VOLT e RST Condition Stored calibration constants are unchanged CAL STORE ADC Store cal constants in non volatile memory after A D calibration CAL STORE TARE Store channel offsets in non volatile memory after channel tare Storing A D cal constants perform complete A D calibration then CAL STORE ADC Storing channel tare offset values CAL TARE lt ch_list gt to correct channel offsets CAL STORE TARE Optional depending on necessity of long term storage Chapter 6 211 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration CALibration TARE CALibration TARE lt ch_list gt measures offset or tare voltage present on the channels specified and stores the value in on board RAM as a calibr
91. executes a CAL command Chapter 6 207 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration D 7 7 770700700 I jue Se ee ie S q 8 CAL SETup lt 7 or CAL 8 lt 7 E a a i 5 l 3 E CAL TARE o o l 8 a p wr l p l l 8 o l l P 2 i l l l 8 CAL ZERO A L ee es ee ES 8 7 da Essen Esse CDE Rr De SE E EE E E E E N EAT l Figure 6 3 Levels of Working Calibration Subsystem Syntax CALibration CONFigure RESistance VOLTage range ZERO FS SETup SETup STORe ADC TARE TARE lt ch_list gt RESet TARE VALue RESistance lt ref ohms gt VOLTage lt ref volts gt ZERO CALibration CONFigure RESistance CALibration CONFigure RESistance connects the on board calibration reference resistor to the Calibration Bus A four wire measurement of the resistor can be made with an external calibration DVM connected to the H Cal L Cal H ohm and L ohm terminals on the Terminal Module or the V H V L H and O L terminals on the Cal Bus connector 208 Chapter 6 Comments Command Sequence VT1419A Command Reference CALibration e Related Commands CAL VAL RES CAL STOR ADC e When Accepted Not while INITiated CAL CONF RES c
92. for UPDATE Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units num_updates numeric int16 1 512 none Comments The default value for lt num updates gt is 20 If it is known that fewer updates will be needed specifying a smaller number will result in slightly faster loop execution speeds e This command creates a time interval in which to perform all pending algorithm and variable updates To keep the loop times predictable and stable the time interval for UPDATE is constant That is it exists for all active algorithms each time they are executed whether or not an update is pending e RST Condition ALG UPD WIND 20 e When Accepted Before INIT only Usage It is decided that a maximum of eight variables per execution of ALG UPDATE will need to be updated ALG UPD WIND 8 NOTES 1 When the number of update requests exceeds the Update Queue size set with ALG UPD WINDOW by one the module will refuse the request and will issue the error message Too many updates in queue Must send UPDATE command Send ALG UPDATE then re send the update request that caused the error 2 The Too many updates in queue error can occur before the module is INITialized It s not uncommon with several algorithms defined to have more variables that need to be pre set before INIT than will be changed in one update after the algorithms are running INIT may need to be se
93. for the Option 11 terminal module For these SCPs use the connection tables in the SCP s manual along with the Option 11 wiring map on page 44 30 Chapter 2 Field Wiring Optional Terminal Modules Option 11 Terminal Figure 2 4 shows the VT1419A 011 Screw Terminal Module feature and Module Layout connector locations On Board Reference Temperature Sensing Y NO Remote Reference Temperature Sensing Figure 2 4 The Option 11 Screw Terminal Module Chapter 2 31 Field Wiring Optional Terminal Modules Option 12 Terminal Figure 2 5 shows the VT1419A 012 Spring Terminal Module features and Module Layout connector locations Jumper for Guard to Ground Connections EL100 o I 300 utl g 8 00 O Hz ooo Aji Es TO LJ Ol UU S 2 00 LJ ti lide E DI L x o Ld _ mo a sro D B D E o eft Cl LJ q JUL TOO Toon mom fo ES E Dor 2 00 Ls COM L1 c do oL Ol Hx 00 EI uy s 8 00 O 1 L Lo onul L1 DU o E _ DO g LHn IL to oO e 00
94. from channel O and one VT1533A digital channel from channel 56 and limit testing them Limit test inputs send values to CVT and force interrupt when exceeded static float Exceeded Exceeded is set by boolean operations to either O or 1 static float Max chan0 Min chanO Max chan1 Min chan1 static float Max chan2 Min chan2 Max chan3 Min chan3 static float Mask chan56 if First loop Exceeded 7 0 initialize Exceeded on each INIT writecvt 1100 330 write analog value to CVT Exceeded 1100 gt Max chan0 1100 lt Min chanO limit test analog writecvt 1101 331 write analog value to CVT Exceeded Exceeded 1101 gt Max chan1 1101 lt Min chan1 writecvt 1102 332 write analog value to CVT Exceeded Exceeded 1102 gt Max chan2 1102 Min chan2 writecvt 1103 333 write analog value to CVT Exceeded Exceeded 1103 gt Max chan3 1103 Min chan3 writecvt 1156 334 write 8 bit value to CVT Exceeded Exceeded 1156 Mask chan56 limit test digital If Exceeded interrupt Chapter 4 121 The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference Algorithm Language Reference Standard Reserved Keywords NOTE Special VT1419A Reserved Keywords Identifiers This section provides a summary of reserved keywords operators data types constructs intrinsic functions and st
95. improvement is seen increase the sample period again and perform another test When the sample period is increased and no improvement is seen the maximum settling delay has been found that any single channel requires 5 Ifthe quality of the measurements does not respond to this increase in sample period then inadequate settling time 1s not likely to be causing measurement problems If the system scans fast enough with the increased sample period the problem is solved The system is only running as fast as the slowest channel allows but if it s fast enough that s OK If on the other hand getting quality readings has slowed the scan rate too much there are two other methods that will either separately or in combination have the system making good measurements as fast as possible Amplifier SCPs can remove the need to increase settling delays How Each gain factor of four provided by the SCP amplifier allows the Range Amplifier to be set one range higher and still provide the same measurement resolution Amplifier SCPs for the VT1419A are available with gains of 0 5 8 16 64 and 512 Return now to the earlier difficult measurement example of a where one channel is measuring 15 5 volts on the 16 volt range and the next a thermocouple on the 0 0625 range If the thermocouple channel is amplified through an SCP with a gain of 16 the Range Amplifier can be set to the 1 volt range On this range the A D 102 Chapter 3 Programming t
96. in ch list SETTling lt channel gt Returns the channel settling time for channel DATA CVTable lt ch_list gt Returns elements of Current Value Table specified by ch list RESet Resets all entries in the Current Value Table to IEEE Not a number FIFO ALL Fetch all readings until instrument returns to trigger idle state COUNt Returns the number of measurements in the FIFO buffer HALF Returns 1 if at least 32 768 readings are in FIFO else returns 0 HALF Fetch 32 768 readings half the FIFO when available MODE BLOCK OVERwrite Set FIFO mode MODE Return the currently set FIFO mode PART lt n_readings gt Fetch n_readings from FIFO reading buffer when available RESet Reset the FIFO counter to 0 FREQuency Sets the gate time for frequency counting Returns the gate time set for frequency counting Chapter 6 323 VT1419A Command Reference Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference Command FUNCtion CONDition lt ch_list gt CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt TC lt type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt FREQuency lt ch_list gt RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt STRain FBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt FBPoisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt FPOisson lt range gt lt ch_list gt HBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt HPOisson lt
97. lt num_samples gt lt ch_list gt command to add extra settling time for just these problem channels What SENS CHAN SETTLING does is instructs the VT1419A to replace single instances of a channel in the Scan List with multiple repeat instances of that channel if it is specified in lt ch_list gt The number of repeats is set by num samples Example Normal Scan List 100 101 102 103 104 Scan List after SENS CHAN SETT 3 2100 103 100 100 100 101 102 103 103 103 104 When the algorithms are run channels 0 and 3 will be sampled three times and the final value from each will be sent to the Channel Input Buffer This provides extra settling time while channels 1 2 and 4 are measured in a single sample period and their values also sent to the Channel Input Buffer Chapter 3 103 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Settling Characteristics 104 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Learning Hint This chapter builds upon the VT1419A Programming Model information presented in Chapter 3 Read that section before moving on to this one About This Chapter This chapter describes how to write algorithms that apply the VT1419A s measurement calculation and control resources It describes these resources and how they can be accessed with the VT1419A s Algorithm Language This manual assumes that the user already has programming experience ideally in the C pro
98. lt type gt parameter selects which channel list will be queried AIN selects the Analog Input channel list this is the Scan List AOUT selects the Analog Output channel list DIN selects the Digital Input channel list DOUT selects the Digital Output channel list Returned Value Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter Each value is 2 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is an int16 array RST Condition To supply the necessary time delay before Digital inputs are read the analog input AIN scan list contains eight entries for channel 0 100 This minimum delay is maintained by replacing these default channels as others are defined in algorithms After algorithm definition if some delay is still required there will be repeat entries of the last channel referenced by an algorithm The three other lists contain no channels Usage ROUT SEQ DEF AIN query for analog input Scan List sequence 254 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ROUTe ROUTe SEQuence POINts ROUTe SEQuence POINts lt type gt returns the number of channels defined in each of the four channel list types Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type string AIN AOUT DIN DOUT none Comments The channel list contents and sequence are determined
99. modifying running algorithm 85 Verifying a successful configuration 23 VERsion DIAG VERSion 226 VERsion SYST VERSion 304 Voids Warranty Cutting Input Protect Jumper 21 Voltage CAL VALue VOLTage 215 VOLTage Index 393 CAL CONF VOLT 209 SENS FUNC VOLTage 276 Voltage setting the VT1511A strain bridge SCP excitation 58 VOLTage AMPLitude OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 252 VT1419A background operation 94 VT1419A configuring the 15 22 W Warranty 2 Voided by cutting Input Protect Jumper 21 What CAL does 71 When to make shield connections 373 When re execute CAL 72 Which FIFO mode 83 WIDTh SOURce PULSe WIDTh 289 WIDTh SOURce PULSe WIDTh 289 WINDow ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 202 WINDow ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 203 Wiring planning for thermocouple 28 planning layout 25 28 signal connection 36 38 Wiring and attaching the terminal module 39 40 Wiring maps Terminal Module 44 45 Wiring techniques for noise reduction 372 Wiring the terminal module 39 40 writeboth expression cvt_element 124 writecvt expression cvt element 124 writefifo expression 113 124 Writing the algorithm 120 Writing values to CVT elements 112 Writing values to the FIFO 113 Z ZERO CAL ZERO 216 394 Index
100. ms SOUR PULSE WIDTH 0 3333e 3 151 To set function of VT1534A s fourth channel in SCP position 6 to PULSE SOUR FUNCTION PULSE 151 Example algorithm statement to control frequency to 1000 Hz 0151 1000 Variable Frequency Square Wave Output FM To set function of VT1534A s fifth channel in SCP position 6 to output a variable frequency square wave SOUR FUNCTION SQUare 152 Example Algorithm Language statement to set output to 20 kHz 0152 20e3 For complete VT1534A capabilities see the SCP s User s Manual 70 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Performing Channel Calibration Important Performing Channel Calibration Important Operation and Restrictions How to Use CAL What CAL Does The CAL also performed using CAL SETup then CAL SETup is a very important step CAL generates calibration correction constants for all analog input and output channels CAL must be performed in order for the VT1419A to deliver its specified accuracy Wait for the module to thoroughly warm up 1 hour before executing a CAL operation See the guidelines and notes on the following page The Front Panel example program shown in Chapter 5 provides a calibration function that executes CAL and also performs the CAL STORE ADC command to store the results of the calibration to the VT1419A s non volatile flash memory cal_1419 vee can be merged into any VEE application to perf
101. needs 48 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction The input and output SCP s are configured using the SCPI programming language Analog SCP s are measured with the VT1419A s A D Configuring analog SCP s includes specifying what type of Engineering Unit EU conversion are desired for each analog input channel For example one channel may require a type T thermocouple conversion and another may be a resistance measurement The on board Digital Signal Processor DSP converts the voltage read across the analog input channel and applies a high speed conversion which results in temperature resistance etc Digital input SCP s perform their own conversions as configured by the SCPI language When the Trigger System is configured and either generates its own trigger or accepts a trigger from an external source all digital input SCP s latch their current input state and the A D starts scanning the analog channels All measurement data is represented as 32 bit real numbers even if the input channel is inherently integer The EU converted numbers such as temperature strain resistance volts state frequency etc are stored in an Input Buffer and later accessed by C programs executing on the VT1419A card Approximately 2 000 lines of user written C code can be downloaded into the VT1419A s memory and can be split among up to 32 algorithms VXI Technology refers to these
102. re configured to different locations This is true even if an SCP is replaced with an identical model SCP because the calibration constants are specific to each SCP channel s individual performance When the ambient temperature within the mainframe changes significantly Temperature changes affect accuracy much more than long term component drift See temperature coefficients in Appendix A Specifications To save time when performing channel calibration on multiple VT1419As in the same mainframe use the CAL SETup and CAL SETup commands see Chapter 6 for details It is not necessary to execute CAL or CAL SETup each time an algorithm is run See When to Execute CAL above for guidelines 72 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Defining C Language Algorithms Defining C Language Algorithms Global Variable Definition This section is an overview of how to write and download C algorithms into the VT1419A s memory The assumption is that the user has some programming experience in C but since the VT1419A s version of C is limited just about any experience with a programming language will suffice See Chapter 4 for a complete description of the VT1419A s C language and functionality Arithmetic Operators add subtract multiply divide Assignment Operator Comparison Functions less than lt less than or equal lt greater than gt greater than or equal gt equal to
103. returned to a service facility designated by VXI Technology Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to VXI Technology and VXI Technology shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to VXI Technology from another country VXI Technology warrants that its software and firmware designated by VXI Technology for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that product VXI Technology does not warrant that the operation of the product or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied products or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer VXI Technology does not warrant the Buyer s circuitry or malfunctions of VXI Technology products that result from the Buyer s circuitry In addition VXI Technology does not warrant any damage that occurs as a result of the Buyer s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer supplied products NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED VXI TECHNOLOGY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF M
104. returns the currently set calibration mode for analog output DAC SCPs Comments Returns a 1 when channels are calibrated using the Least Squares Fit method to provide the minimum error overall over the entire output range Returns a 0 when channels are calibrated to provide the minimum error at their zero point See the SCPs User s Manual for its accuracy specifications using each mode The C SCPI type is int16 e Related Commands DIAG CAL SET MOD CAL CAL SET e RST Condition DIAG CAL SET MODE 1 Chapter 6 219 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE Parameters Comments Usage DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE lt mode gt sets whether Open Transducer Detect current will be turned off or left on the default mode during the CAL TARE operation Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean uint 16 0 1 volts e When lt mode gt is set to O the RST Default channels are tare calibrated with their OTD current off When lt mode gt is 1 channels that have their OTD current on DIAGnostic OTDetect ON lt ch_list gt are tare calibrated with their OTD current left on By default RST the CALibration TARE command will calibrate all channels with the OTD circuitry disabled This is done for two reasons first most users do not leave OTD enabled while taking readings and second the
105. specified Input Data File as though it were coming from the input channels The assumption is that this data file was created with this example using the LOG ON mode or created with the logging function of the example pan 419 vee Note that both the LOG ON OFF and the FILE E1419 switches come BEFORE the REPEAT loop Therefore these parameters cannot be modified AFTER executing the RUN The REPEAT provides the rate at which Agilent VEE can perform the following actions e Reads the desired algorithm execution rate for storing data into the FIFO e Reads the desired channels to display on the strip chart e Reads 10 scans 320 values of data from the FIFO e Writes 10 readings for each selected channel to the strip chart e Reads the desired SCP channels to display a Current Value Table CVT of data returned and displays that data The more operations placed in this loop the more time will placed between accesses to the FIFO The execution speed of Agilent VEE is dependent upon the speed of the computer how many I O operations it is performing and whether or not the Compiled mode of Agilent VEE 4 0 is being used If running a Pentium class PC the REPEAT loop will easily keep up with the acquisition rate of the VT1419A card and provide very near real time data on the strip chart Slower computers may fall behind The TRIG TIMER interval can be altered to slow down the acquisition rate or move the slider control to slow down the rate
106. tenn eens 202 ALGOrithm UPDate WINDow 0000 cece ES TESTI eens 203 MPR Ma et ga gee ses eda soa gs a SN E 204 ARM IMMedi te 30 tpa Neb pe ar ir UE uad obest 205 ARVMESQUECO NT Cr 205 ARM SOURGe rii leere epe pego beats do E gud 206 CAE Drato it tea sace pets d RU prn port ir tede edis 207 CALibration CONFigure RESistance 2 208 CALibration CONFigure VOLTage nre aagi iae aae iie a A teen E i 209 CALibration SE TUD eo acicate fea a 210 CAL bration SETUP usa sas diode etd di sued ae ge Rd 210 CALibr tion STORe 2 39 A A Xie Rss 211 CALabration TARE agudas cita gigas era Rr ttes ee greed edes 212 CALibration TARE RESet 0 05 00 504 cet bee e e e y e Rar Y Ra 214 CALibration T ARE cena ore ope a ea de eka ges 214 CALibration VALue RESistance oooooocoocororr een 214 CALibration VALue VOLTage sorcerien mensona ea iisa Rh 215 CALibration ZERO orde ai 216 DIAGNOS UC Rca 218 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE ononon nnana 219 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE onnon nunnana 219 DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE sels 220 DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE 0 02 cece eee 220 Contents DIA Gnostic CHECKSUM ico a ec 221 DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear 0 cette SE 221 DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise 5 222 DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature 0 0 0 cece en 222 DIAGnostic IEBE oi b rer pepe dp Rd a va ded e 223 DIAGnostc IEBBJ d etd id
107. the algorithm is executed module INITed and triggered the value will be as initialized But when the module is stopped ABORt command and then re INITiated the variable will not be re initialized but will contain the value last assigned during program execution In order to initialize variables each time the module is re INITialized see Determining First Execution on page 111 To declare global variables execute the SCPI command ALG DEF GLOBALS lt program_string gt The program string gt can contain simple variable and array variable declaration initialization statements The string must not contain any executable source code Example global definition for lt program_string gt less than 256 characters ALG DEF GLOBALS static float Scalar_global Array_glob 10 Example global definition for lt program_string gt greater than 256 characters which requires the Indefinite Block Program Data format ALG DEF GLOBALS 0static float Scalar global Array glob 10 LF EOI 128 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Language Syntax Summary Language Syntax Summary This section documents the VT1419A s Algorithm Language elements Identifier First character is A Z a z or _ optionally followed by characters A Z a z 0 9 or Only the first 31 characters are significant For example a abc al al2 a_12 now is the time gainl Decimal Constant First character is 0 9 or
108. the algorithm writes a value to a CVT element the previous value in that element is overwritten 112 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Accessing the VT1419A s Resources Reading CVT elements The application program reads one or more CVT elements by executing the SCPI command SENSe DATA CVT lt element_list gt where lt element_list gt specifies one or more individual elements and or a range of contiguous elements The following example command will help to explain the lt element list gt syntax DATA CVT 10 20 30 33 40 43 330 Return elements 10 20 30 33 40 43 and element 330 Individual element numbers are isolated by commas A contiguous range of elements is specified by lt starting element gt colon lt ending element gt Writing values to the FIFO The FIFO as the name implies is a First In First Out buffer It can buffer up to 65 024 values This capability allows an algorithm to send a continuous stream of data values related in time by their position in the buffer This can be thought of as an electronic strip chart recorder Each value is sent to the FIFO by executing the Algorithm Language intrinsic statement writefifo lt expression gt The following is an example algorithm statement writefifo 0139 send output channel 39 s value to the FIFO Since the actual algorithm execution rate can be determined see Programming the Trigger Timer on page 79 the time relationship
109. the one defined in step 5 ending with the one that will be run now Remember not to send the lt swap_size gt parameter with these If an Algorithm too big error is not received then the value for lt swap_size gt in step 5 was large enough 7 Define any other algorithms in the normal manner NOTES 1 Channels referenced by algorithms when they are defined are only placed in the channel list before INIT The channel list cannot be changed after INIT If an algorithm is redefined by swapping after INIT and it references channels not already in the channel list these channels will only return a floating point zero No error message will be generated To make sure all required channels will be included in the channel list define lt alg_name gt and re define all algorithms that will replace lt alg_name gt by swapping them before INIT is sent This insures that all channels referenced in these algorithms will be available after INIT 2 The driver only calculates overall execution time for algorithms defined before INIT This calculation is used to set the default output delay same as executing ALG OUTP DELAY AUTO If an algorithm is swapped after INIT that take longer to execute than the original the output delay will behave as if set by ALG OUTP DEL 0 rather than AUTO see ALG OUTP DEL command Use the same procedure from note 1 to make sure the longest algorithm execution time is used to set ALG OUTP DEL AUTO before INIT T
110. the upper bank channels or all four of the lower bank channels or all eight channels for a given SCP This is because the VT1536A has two debounce timers one for its lower four channels and one for its upper four channels Note The INP DEB TIME generate the error 3108 E1536 debounce each referenced 4 Ch bank must contain at least one input This error indicates that lt ch list referenced a bank of channels that contains no input configured channel e Usage To set the debounce period to 153 6 ms for the lower four channels on a VT1536A in SCP position 0 send INP DEB 0 1536 100 103 To set the debounce period to 1 229 seconds for the upper four channels on a VT1536A in SCP position 3 send INP DEB 1 229 128 131 e There is also the query form INPut DEBounce TIME lt channel gt where lt channel gt must specify a single channel INP DEB TIME returns the currently set debounce period INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt cutoff_freq gt lt ch_list gt sets the cutoff frequency of the filter on the specified channels 234 Chapter 6 Parameters Comments Usage VT1419A Command Reference INPut Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units cutoff freq numeric float32 see comment Hz string MIN MAX ch list channel list string 132 163 none e The cutoff freq parameter may be specified in kilohertz KHz
111. to module CALibration ZERO CALibration ZERO corrects Analog to Digital converter offset for any drift since the last CAL or CAL ZERO command was executed The offset calibration takes about five seconds and should be done as often as the control set up allows Comments The CAL ZERO command only corrects for A D offset drift zero Use the CAL common command to perform on line calibration of channels as well as A D offset CAL performs gain and offset correction of the A D and each channel with an analog SCP installed both input and output 216 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration e Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYST ERR See Error Messages in Appendix B The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 e Executing this command does not alter the module s programmed state function range etc e Related Commands CAL e RST Condition A D offset performed Usage CAL ZERO enter statement here returns 0 or 1 Chapter 6 217 DIAGnostic The DIAGnostic subsystem allows special operations to be performed that are not standard in the SCPI language This includes checking the current revision of the Control Processor s firmware and that it has been properly loaded into flash memory Subsystem Syntax DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 0 1 MODE TARe OTD MODE
112. two versions of TST The default version is an abbreviated self test that executes only the Digital Tests By loading an additional object file the full self test can be executed as described below See the documentation that comes with the VT1419A C SCPI driver for MS DOS Comments Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 TST OK None 1 TST Error Query the Error Queue SYST ERR for error 3052 See explanation below e IF error 3052 Self test failed Test info in FIFO is returned A FIFO value of 1 through 99 or gt 300 is a failed test number A value of 100 through 163 is a channel number for the failed test A value of 200 through 204 is an A D range number for the failed test where 200 0 0625 V 201 0 25 V 202 1 V 203 4 V and 204 16 V ranges For example DATA FIFO returns the values 72 and 108 This indicates that test number 72 failed on channel 8 Test numbers 20 30 37 72 74 76 and 80 93 may indicate a problem with a Signal Conditioning Plug On For tests 20 and 30 37 remove all SCPs and see if TST passes If so replace SCPs one at a time until the one causing the problem is found For tests 72 74 76 and 80 93 try to re seat the SCP that the channel number s points to or move the SCP and see if the failure s follow the SCP If the problems move with the SCP replace the SCP These are the only tests where the user should troubleshoot a proble
113. while the VT1533A provides 16 digital bits from a single SCP position by connecting 8 bits to the channel Hi lines and another 8 bits to the channel Lo lines With digital SCPs the SCP Bus is the only data path between the Control Processor and the SCP for both data and configuration control Resistance measurements and resistance temperature measurements require supplying an excitation current to the resistive element to be measured With the VT1419A two channels are required for each resistance to be measured Resistance is always measured in a Four Wire configuration The VT1505A Current Source SCP provides eight excitation supplies that can be paired with any available analog sense channels to complete the measurement circuit The VT1518A Resistance Measurement SCP provides four excitation supplies and four amplified sense channels on a single SCP In either case the source and sense channels must be paired together to make the resistance measurement Figure 2 2 illustrates an example of pairing source SCP channels with sense SCP channels Chapter 2 27 Field Wiring Planning the Wiring Layout Note Each channel line represents both a Hi and Lo signal VT1518A Analog Multiplexer Planning for Thermocouple Measurements NOTE sense Hi sense Lo Or a Single For 4 Channels source Lo source Hi lt lt Ch 39 Faceplate Conns or Terminal Module
114. 0 0 ccc eee page 23 e About Example Programs 0 0 00 eee eee eee page 23 e Verifying a Successful Configuration page 23 Configuring the VT1419A NOTE Setting the Logical Address Switch There are several aspects to configuring the module before installing it in a VXIbus mainframe They are e Setting the Logical Address Switch 0 page 15 e Installing Signal Conditioning Plug ons page 16 e Disabling the Input Protect Feature 0 page 21 e Disabling Flash Memory Access 00000 ee eee page 21 For most applications only the Logical Address switch need be changed and the SCPs installed in the mainframe prior to installation The other settings can be used as delivered Switch Jumper Setting Logical Address Switch 208 Input Protect Jumper Protected Flash Memory Protect Jumper PROG Setting the VXIbus Interrupt Level the VT1419A uses a default VXIbus interrupt level of 1 The default setting is in effect at power on and after a RST command The interrupt level can be changed by executing the DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe command in the application program Follow the next figure and ignore any switch numbering printed on the Logical Address switch When installing more than one VT1419A in a single VXIbus Mainframe set each instrument to a different Logical Address Chapter 1 Getting Started Config
115. 094A This is since these SCPs have buffer amplifiers on board and is a characteristic of amplifiers The best way to deal with this is to prevent the noise from getting into the amplifier Most common mode noise is about 60 Hz so the differential amplifier rejection 1s very good The amplifier Common Mode Noise characteristics are 120 dB flat to 300 Hz then 20 dB octave rolloff The VT1419A amplifiers are selected for low gain error offset temperature drift and low power These characteristics are generally incompatible with good high frequency CMR performance More expensive high performance amplifiers can solve this problem but since they aren t required for many systems elected to handle this with the High Frequency Common Mode Filter option to the VT1586A Remote Rack Panel VT1586A 001 RF Filter discussed below Shielded twisted pair lead wire generally does a good job of keeping high frequency common mode noise out of the amplifier provided the shield 1s connected to the VT1419A chassis ground through a very low impedance Not via the guard terminal The VT1419A guard terminal connection shown in the VT1419A User s manual does not consider the high frequency Ecm problem and is there to limit the shield current and to allow the DUT to float up to some dc common mode voltage subject to the maximum 16 volt input specification limit This conflicts with the often recommended good practice of grounding the shield at the signal
116. 1 0 01 0 1 0 01 0 15 0 01 Cooling Requirements Average watts slot A Pressure mm H 0 Air Flow liters s 14 0 08 0 08 Power Available for SCPs 1 0A 24 V 35A5V See VXI Catalog or SCP manuals for SCP current Measurement Ranges dc volts VT1501A or VT1502A 62 5 mV to 16 V Full Scale Temperature Thermocouples 200 to 1700 C Thermistors Opt 15 required 80 to 160 C RTD s Opt 15 required 200 to 850 C Resistance VT1505A with VT1501A 512 Q to 131 kQ FS Strain 25 000 pe or limit of linear range of strain gage Measurement Resolution 16 bits including sign Trigger Timer and 100 ppm 0 0196 from 10 C to 70 C Sample Timer Accuracy External Trigger Input TTL compatible input Negative true edge triggered except first trigger will occur if external trigger input is held low when module is INITiated Minimum pulse width 100 ns Since each trigger starts a complete scan of two or more channel readings maximum trigger rate depends on module configuration gt ES o D gt 2 x lt gt 9v N co Maximum Input Voltage With Direct Input Passive Filter or Amplifier SCPs N mode pl d Operating lt 16 Vpeak Damage level gt 42 Vpeak ee mode plus ES With VT1513A Divide by 16 Attenuator SCP Operating lt 60 V dc lt 42 Vpeak Maximum Common Mode With Direct Input Passive Filter or Amplifier SCPs Voltage Operating lt 16 Vpeak Damage level gt 42 V
117. 1 12 e 22 11 oe 23 10 pi 24 9 ca 25 8 sa 26 7 sis 27 6 aie 28 5 wu 29 4 ane 30 3 a 31 2 n 32 1 n H 1 6 L 2 5 faceplate connectors G 3 4 are male 96 pin DIN li 6 1 1 32 2 31 3 30 4 29 5 28 6 27 7 26 8 25 9 24 10 23 11 22 12 21 13 20 14 19 15 18 16 17 17 16 18 15 19 14 20 13 21 12 22 11 23 10 24 9 25 8 VT1419A 26 7 27 6 28 5 29 4 30 3 31 2 32 1 Figure 2 3 VT1419A Faceplate Connector Pin Signals Chapter 2 29 Field Wiring Optional Terminal Modules Optional Terminal Modules The SCPs and Terminal Module Connections Note The VT1419A Option 11 Terminal Module has screw type terminal blocks The VT1419A Option 12 Terminal Module has spring clamp type terminal blocks Both of these Terminal Modules provide e Terminal block connections to field wiring e Strain relief for the wiring bundle e Reference junction temperature sensing for thermocouple measurements The VT1419A Option A3F Terminal Module is available to interface the VT1419A to a VT1586A rack mount terminal panel see page 46 The same Terminal is used for all field wiring regardless of which Signal Conditioning Plug On SCP is used Each SCP includes a set of labels to map that SCP s channels to the Terminal Module s terminal blocks See step 4 in Installing Signal Conditioning Plug Ons in Chapter 1 page 20 for VT1419A Terminal Modules The SCPs VT1531A through VT1537A do not include wiring labels
118. 1 ofthe 3 _ wire exit panels Figure 2 12 Wiring and Connecting the VT1419A Terminal Module Chapter 2 39 Field Wiring Wiring and Attaching the Terminal Module 6 Replace Wiring Exit Panel 6 Replace Clear Cover A Hook in the top cover tabs onto the fixture B Press down and tighten screws Cut required holes in panels for wire exit Keep wiring exit panel hole as small as possible 070 07070 070 7 Install the Terminal 8 Push in the Extraction Levers to Lock the Module Terminal Module onto the VT1419A Install Mylar Thermal Barrier on Terminal Module 1 connectors AQ NAAA Y IA A o c LEY Ee 9989 Extraction Levers VT1419A Module Figure 2 13 Wiring and Connecting the VT1419A Terminal Module Cont 40 Chapter 2 Field Wiring Attaching Removing the VT1419A Terminal Module Attaching Removing the VT1419A Terminal Module Figure 2 14 shows how to attach the terminal module to the VT1419A and Figure 2 15 shows how to remove it Extend the extraction levers on the Terminal Module Install Mylar Thermal Barrier on Terminal Module connectors 4 e Use a small screwdriver to pry and release the two extraction levers Align the Terminal Modul
119. 107 link custom thermocouple EU with chs 0 7 use reference temperature compensation for N type wire SENSE REF RTD 92 120 designate a channel to measure the reference junction temperature include these channels in a scan list REF channel first INITiate then TRIGger module SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency lt ch_list gt sets the SENSe function to frequency for channels in cA list Also configures the channels specified as digital inputs Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch_list string 132 163 none Comments Ifthe channels specified are on an SCP that doesn t support this function an error will be generated See the SCP s User s Manual for its capabilities e Use the SENSe FREQuency APERture command to set the gate time for the frequency measurement e Related commands SENS FREQ APER e RST Condition SENS FUNC COND and INP POL NORM for all digital SCP channels Usage SENS FUNC FREQ 144 set channel 44 s sense function to frequency SENSe FUNCtion RESistance SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt excite_current gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt links the EU conversion type for resistance and range with the channels specified by ch list Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units excite current discrete string 30E 6 488E 6 MIN MAX Amps range numeric flo
120. 1124 writefifo 1124 110 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Accessing the VT1419A s Resources Defined Input and An algorithm references channels It can reference input or output channels But Output Channels in order for these channels to be available to the algorithm they must be defined To be defined an SCP must be installed and an appropriate SOURce or SENSe FUNCtion must explicitly or implicitly in the case of VT1531A 32A and VT1536A SCPs be tied to the channels If an algorithm references an input channel identifier that is not configured as an input channel or an output channel identifier that is not configured as an output channel the driver may generate an error when the algorithm is defined with ALG DEF Defini ng and Global variables are those declared outside of the main function and any Accessing Global algorithms see Figure 4 1 A global variable can be read or changed by any algorithm To declare global variables use the command Variables ALG DEF GLOBALS source code gt where source code is Algorithm Language source limited to constructs for declaring variables It must not contain executable statements Examples declare single variable without assignment ALG DEF GLOBALS static float glob scal var declare single variable with assignment ALG DEF GLOBALS static float glob scal var 22 53 declare one scalar variable and one array variabl
121. 122 Inu P EE 122 Special Identifiers for Channels 2 llis 123 QUIC TERRE 123 Intrinsic Functions and Statements 0 cee eee eee nee 124 Program Flow Control 2 00 c ccc eee eee rn hh 124 Data TY Pes vicio ace A nb bene Ga Rg a aa 125 Dat Str et tes ei er hacerse a a VOR Rn E Ea 126 Using Type Float in Integer Situations lees 127 Language Syntax SUMMARY ss sus iscas pls guga Cr est DR S netus ua Rd EE 129 Program Structure and Syntax 0 0 eect e 133 Declaring Variables ied besa aeara ita 133 Assigning Values ii bed oleate a da ti 133 The Operations Symbols 134 Conditional Execution ossai e nerie radai ee ce a edes 134 Comment WMS M 136 Overall Program StrUCtUTE ooooocooocco tenet eens 137 About Ts Chapter odio cea 139 Wiring Connections and File Locations for the Examples 0ooocoococooocoo o 143 Example Fale Location asa sete er sonia a dup ais 143 Installing Example Files sesceiesisieceteete esai aiena RII 143 Virtual Front Panel PrograM ooooococcoccoccrc ee teen ene 144 Calibrations i002 40848 ase de dee sada ERES dO e Sar Sd E a a 147 A A 148 Programming Model Example ooooococcooccocconc eet eet teenies 149 Eno Checo RT Mp 152 Configuration Display sue ss nota deai ai ADE O eee dd 153 Engineering Unit Conversion ooooccooccoccor cnet hr 154 Contents 7 Custom Function Generation 156 Custom EU Function Example 00
122. 19A Multifunction Setting up the Trigger System NOTES Selecting Trigger Timer Arm Source NOTE 1 When TRIGger SOURce is not TIMer ARM SOURce must be set to IMMediate the RST condition If not the INIT command will generate an error 221 Settings conflict When TRIGger SOURce is TIMer the trigger timer interval TRIG TIM lt interval gt must allow enough time to scan all channels execute all algorithms and update all outputs or a 3012 Trigger Too Fast error will be generated during the algorithm cycle See the TRIG TIM command on page 309 for details To set the trigger source to the internal Trigger Timer the default TRIG SOUR TIMER now select ARM SOUR To set the trigger source to the External Trigger input connection TRIG SOUR EXT an external trigger signal To set the trigger source to a VXIbus TTLTRG line TRIG SOUR TTLTRG1 the TTLTRGI trigger line Figure 3 7 shows that when the TRIG SOUR is TIMer the other trigger sources become Arm sources that control when the timer will start The command to select the arm source is ARM SOURce lt source gt e The lt source gt parameter choices are explained in the following table Parameter Value Source of Arm after INTTiate command BUS ARM IMMediate EXTernal TRG signal input on terminal module HOLD ARM IMMediate IMMediate The arm signal is always true scan starts when an INITiate command is received SCP SCP Trigger
123. 2 1100 LF EOI where LF EOI is a line feed character sent with End Identifier true EOI signal for GPIB For Block Program Data the Algorithm Parser requires that the source code gt data end with a null byte The null byte must be appended to the end of the block s data byte s gt If the null byte is not included within the block the error Algorithm Block must contain termination 0 will be generated Chapter 4 117 The Algorithm Language and Environment Defining Algorithms ALG DEF Changing an Algorithm While It Is Running Defining an Algorithm for Swapping NOTE How Does it Work The VT1419A has a feature that allows a given algorithm to be specified that can be swapped with another even while it is executing This is useful if for instance the function of an algorithm needs to be altered that is currently controlling a process that cannot be left uncontrolled In this case when the original algorithm is defined it can be enabled for swapping The ALG DEF command has an optional parameter that is used to enable algorithm swapping The command s general form is ALG DEF lt alg_name gt lt swap_size gt lt source_code gt Note the parameter lt swap_size gt With lt swap_size gt the amount of algorithm memory to allocate for algorithm lt alg_name gt is specified Make sure to allocate enough space for the largest algorithm expected to be defined for lt alg_name gt Here is an ex
124. 24 address of the VME memory card to be used as additional reading storage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units A24 address numeric valid A24 address none Comments This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module The default if MEM VME ADDR not executed is 240000 e The 424 address gt parameter may be specified in decimal hex 7H octal Q or binary ZB e Related Commands MEMory subsystem FORMat and FETCH e RST Condition VME memory address starts at 200000 When using an Agilent HP E1405 6 command module the first VT1419A occupies 200000 23FFFF e Usage MEM VME ADDR amp H400000 Set the address for the VME memory card to be used as reading storage MEMory VME ADDRess MEMory VME ADDRess returns the address specified for the VME memory card used for reading storage Comments Returned Value numeric e This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module e Related Commands MEMory subsystem FOR Mat and FETCH Usage MEM VME ADDR Returns the address of the VME memory card MEMory VME SIZE MEMory VME SIZE lt mem_size gt Specifies the number of bytes of VME memory to allocate for additional reading storage 242 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference MEMory Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units m
125. 313 IDN 313 LMC 313 OPC 314 OPC 314 PMC 315 RMC 315 RST 315 SRE 316 SRE 316 STB 316 TRG 316 TST 317 WAI 320 Command Reference SCPI 184 ABORt subsystem 185 ALGorithm EXPLicit 187 188 192 195 ALGorithm EXPLicit DEFine 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN 194 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe 196 ALGorithm EXPLicit TIMe 196 ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine 197 382 Index ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 198 ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 199 ALGorithm UPDate MMediate 199 ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel 200 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 202 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow 203 ARM subsystem 204 206 ARM IMMediate 205 ARM SOURce 205 ARM SOURce 206 CALibration subsystem 207 217 CALibration CONFigure RESistance 208 CALibration CONFigure VOL Tage 209 CALibration SETup 210 CALibration SETup 210 CALibration STORe 211 CALibration TARE 212 CALibration TARE RESet 214 CALibration TARE 214 CALibration VALue RESistance 214 CALibration VALue VOLTage 215 CALibration ZERO 216 DIAGnostic subsystem 218 226 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 219 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 219 DIAGnostic CALibration TARe MODE 220 DIAGnostic CALibration TARe MODE 220 DIAGnostic CHECksum 221 DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear 221 DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise 222 DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature 222 DIAGnostic IEEE 223 DIAGnostic IEEE 223 DIAGnostic INTerrupt L
126. 419A contains the Agilent VEE program n 1419 vee that builds user defined functions and loads them into the VT1419A The VEE module calls a C function source code supplied that actually calculates 128 Mx B segments over a specified range of values for the desired function Supply the function the program generates the segments in a table The fn_1419 vee program can be merged into the Agilent VEE application program Another Agilent VEE example program eufm1419 vee shows how to apply fn_1419 vee Up to 32 functions can be created for use in algorithms At runtime where the function is passed an x value the time to calculate the Mx B function is approximately 18 us The VT1419A actually uses this technique to convert volts to temperature strain etc The accuracy of the approximation is really based upon how well the range is selected over which the table is built For thermocouple temperature conversion the VT1419A fixes the range to the lowest A D range 64 mV so that small microvolt measurements yield the proper resolution of the actual temperature for a non linear transducer In addition the VT1419A permits Custom Engineering Unit conversions to be created for user transducers so that when the voltage measurement is actually made the EU conversion takes place see SENS FUNC CUST Algorithms deal with the resulting floating point numbers generated during the measurement phase and may require further comple
127. 6F Negative Overload 9 0E37 NaN 47D2 A37D CED4 6143 No Reading 9 91E37 9 Usage FORMAT REAL Set format to IEEE 32 bit Floating Point FORM REAL 64 Set format to IEEE 64 bit Floating Point FORMAT ASCII 7 Set format to 7 bit ASCII FORMat DATA FORMat DATA returns the currently set response data format for readings Comments Returned Value Returns REAL 32 REAL 64 PACK 64 ASC 7 The C SCPI type is string int16 e Related Commands FORMAT 230 VT1419A Command Reference FORMat e RST Condition ASCII 7 Usage FORMAT Returns REAL 32 REAL 64 PACK 64 ASC 7 Chapter 6 231 INITiate Subsystem Syntax The INTTiate command subsystem moves the VT1419A from the Trigger Idle State to the Waiting For Trigger State When initiated the instrument is ready to receive one IMMediate or more depending on TRIG COUNT trigger events On each trigger the module will perform one control cycle which includes reading analog and digital input channels Input Phase executing all defined algorithms Calculate Phase and updating output channels Output Phase See the TRIGger subsystem to specify the trigger source and count INITiate IMMediate INITiate IMMediate Comments Usage INITiate IMMediate changes the trigger system from the Idle state to the Wait For Trigger state When triggered one or more depending on TRIGger COUNt trigger cycles occur and the inst
128. 7 The Algorithm Language and Environment Program Structure and Syntax brace opens compound statement if user_flag gt 0 writecvt user_value 2 331 one line if statement writecvt ends with else else immediately follows complete if statement construct open compound statement for else clause T writecvt user value 2 331 each simple statement ends in even within compound writefifo user value these two statements could combine with writeboth close compound statement for else clause close compound statement for first if else writecvt 0 331 else clause goes with first if statement Note single line else 138 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples About This Chapter NOTE The focus of this chapter is to demonstrate a multitude of VEE programming examples to help get the VT1419A application running as quickly as possible Several VEE programs exist but to simplify the discussion Agilent VEE examples are provided These examples are a combination of fully working programs that demonstrate various capabilities of the VT1419A plus Agilent VEE object modules that can be merged into Agilent VEE applications to perform such operations as calibration error checking testing custom functions and custom EU conversion Any operation or function that may seem hard to implement with the VT1419A has been included in the spirit of Agilent VEE objects Simply me
129. 8 page 288 page 289 page 289 page 289 page 293 page 294 page 294 page 295 page 295 page 296 page 296 page 297 page 297 page 298 page 299 page 299 page 299 page 300 page 301 page 301 page 302 page 303 page 304 176 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SySTem VERSION sei escara ede Ro rt a a EE page 304 TRIGger COUNt frig count sop gt iacet y eune e i n page 307 TRIGE COUNE cotorra aa page 307 TRIGger IMMediate como eno 4422 be be ORG ee eee eee EER ae HES page 308 TRIGger SOURce BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TIMer TTLTrg lt n gt page 308 TRIGgerSOURCG 2 5 se ee Dane om E See E eS v9 POR ORO SEG eed page 309 TRIGger TIMer PERiod trig interval 22A page 309 TRIGger TIMEr PERIOd e ssa ps Re o R9 Rv EUG RUE GERE EEG Es page 310 ICAL cos nbs tea a page 311 ACUSA a ges RD BUSES NUR UE Slee de I She ts eye gt E page 312 DMCG name emd dald 244 doe XOLG y 9x EA E ORE aw YI 4s War page 312 EMG enable uw osa Rue Cpu Yo X Ee Y RO X ES E Xe9 ERASE SE or page 312 EMC od ae oce ROSA PEE SRE oa YO do So Eo Red da e do a e page 312 TESE D page 312 ESE soo aa othe doe uu xe GE SR OA BSS eek vee a a s page 313 Unc de He ee Bee A Oh th ee Be ye oe ee aa page 313 GMC lt name gt ceas po bbe Pee RE EES AE CS AS e EG e De HEE p es page 313 TON Pared pas GREAT ERAS Lae E WR EA E ee ed bue p Rx Rove page 313 EMC ssa ms as dor be ee
130. 8 I wee UTE OFT ee d E 00 1 080 090 0008 00 09 0004 000 POE ered Pe POE OEE qt A AN EN EN Os utu US ovo s Uo D 000 9 Seg 355 Appendix A 3 Seq S O Jota zT 140 VZOSLLA AaATETRTTSATAVYVARATERRRHTERTERTARERREAAERZUATENAEEAUBAAA ZAR RA A m 3430 123114 11 1dQ VIOSILA 00 0cI 00 00I 0008 00 09 00 0r 00 0C 000 wyg MOT 356 Appendix A o deq Cetera ERR SA e ii IO 2914 81 330 VSOSLLA 00 07 00001 0008 00 09 000 000 000 097 OVC ds a pa pe i os M ar OZ E 00 08 1 seem a 091 or r wq MOT 357 Appendix A 358 Appendix A Appendix B Error Messages Possible Error Messages 108 109 160 211 212 213 221 222 224 240 253 281 282 310 410 1000 2001 2003 2007 2008 2009 2016 3000 3004 Parameter not allowed Missing parameter Block data error Trigger ignored Arm ignored Init ignored Settings conflict Data out of range Illegal parameter value Hardware error Execute TST Corrupt media Cannot create program Illegal program name System error Query INTERRUPTED Out of memory Invalid cha
131. A 33 Reference Algorithm language 122 128 Register the status byte group s enable 93 Registers clearing event 94 Registers clearing the enable 93 Registers configuring the enable 91 Registers reading condition 94 Registers reading event 94 Rejection Noise 374 Rejection common mode 330 Relational expression 130 Relational operator 131 Removing the VT1419A terminal module 41 42 Reset RST 315 RESet SENS DATA CVT RESet 261 SENS DATA FIFO RESet 265 Resetting CAL TARE 99 Residual sensor offsets 98 Resistance CAL VAL RESistance 214 RESistance CAL CONF RES 208 SENS FUNC RESistance 271 Resolution measurement 329 Resources accessing the VT1419A s 109 113 Restrictions 71 Retrieving Algorithm Data 81 84 ROUT SEQ DEF 254 ROUT SEQ POINts 255 ROUTe subsystem 254 255 RTD and thermistor measurements 61 Running the algorithm 120 Running changing an algorithm while it s 118 S Safe Handling static discharge CAUTION 16 SAMP TIMer 256 SAMP TIMer 256 SAMPle subsystem 256 257 sample timer accuracy 329 SCALar ALGorithm EXPLicit 192 SCALar ALGorithm EXPLicit 193 SCP 368 grouping channels to signal conditioning 25 sense vs output SCPs 27 SCP Power Available 329 SCP setting the VT1505A current source 57 SCPI commands DIAGnostic OTDetect 101 SCPI Commands 173 Format 178 SCPs and Terminal Module 30 Selecting the FIFO mode 76 Selecting the trigger sourc
132. BORT sent e BLOCking BLOCking mode is the default and is used to read the FIFO while algorithms are executing Application programs must read FIFO values often enough to keep it from overflowing see Continuously Reading the FIFO on page 83 The FIFO stops accepting values when it becomes full 65 024 values Values sent by algorithms after the FIFO is full are discarded The first value to exceed 65 024 sets the STAT QUES COND bit 10 FIFO Overflowed and an error message is put in the Error Queue read with SYS ERR command OVERwrite When the FIFO fills the oldest values in the FIFO are overwritten by the newest values Only the latest 65 024 values are available In OVER write mode the module must be halted ABORT sent before reading the FIFO see Reading the Latest FIFO Values on page 84 This mode is very useful when it is necessary to view an algorithm s response to a disturbance To set the FIFO mode blocking is the RST Power on condition SENSe DATA FIFO MODE OVERWRITE select overwrite mode SENSe DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK select blocking mode 76 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting up the Trigger System Setting up the Trigger System Arm and Trigger Figure 3 7 shows the trigger and arm model for the VT1419A Note that when the Sources Trigger Source selected is TIMer the default the remaining sources become Arm Sources Using ARM SOUR allows an event to be specified tha
133. BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP none TIM TTLTrg lt n gt Comments The following table explains the possible choices Parameter Value Source of Trigger BUS TRIGger IMMediate TRG GET for GPIB EXTernal TRG signal on terminal module HOLD TRIGger IMMediate IMMediate The trigger event is always satisfied SCP SCP Trigger Bus future SCP Breadboard TIMer The internal trigger timer TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines n 0 through 7 NOTE The ARM system only exists while TRIG SOUR is TIMer When TRIG SOUR is not TIMer SCPI compatibility requires that ARM SOUR be IMM or an Error 221 Settings conflict will be generated e While TRIG SOUR is IMM simply INITiate the trigger system to start a measurement scan 308 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference TRIGger While TRIG SOUR IMM provides the fastest trigger repetition rate the trigger occurrence time is not deterministic In addition there is no means to synchronize the start of algorithm execution with an external input since when TRIG SOUR is IMM ARM SOUR must also be set to IMM The TRIG SOUR TIMER provides both a deterministic occurrence of algorithm executions and the ability to synchronize this with an external signal ARM SOUR EXT When Accepted Before INIT only Related Commands ABORt INITiate TRG RST Condition TRIG SOUR TIMER Usage TRIG SOUR EXT Hardware trigger input at Connector
134. Bus future SCP Breadboard TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines n 0 through 7 When TRIGger SOURce is not TIMer ARM SOURce must be set to IMMediate the RST condition If not the INIT command will generate an error 221 Settings conflict To set the external trigger signal as the arm source ARM SOUR EXT trigger input on connector module 78 Chapter 3 Programming the Trigger Timer Setting the Trigger Counter Outputting Trigger Signals Programming the VT1419A Muttifunction Setting up the Trigger System When the VT1419A is triggered it begins its algorithm execution cycle The time it takes to complete a cycle is the minimum interval setting for the Trigger Timer If programmed to a shorter time the module will generate a Trigger too fast error How can this minimum time be determined After all algorithms are defined send the ALG TIME command with its lt alg_name gt parameter set to MAIN This causes the VT1419A s driver to analyze the time required for all four phases of the execution cycle Input Update Execute Algorithm and Output The value returned from ALG TIME MAIN is the minimum allowable Trigger Timer interval With this information execute the TRIGger TIMer lt interval gt command and set lt interval gt to the desired time that is equal to or greater than the minimum The Trigger Counter controls how many trigger events will be allowed to start an inp
135. CAL STOR TARE e RST Condition Channel offsets are not affected by RST Command CALTARE ch list gt to correct channel offsets Sequence CAL TARE to return the success flag from the CAL TARE operation CAL STORE TARE Optional depending on necessity of long term storage Chapter 6 213 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration CALibration TARE RESet CALibration TARE RESet resets the tare calibration constants to zero for all 64 channels Executing CAL TARE RES affects the tare cal constants in RAM only To reset the tare cal constants in flash memory execute CAL TARE RES and then execute CAL STORE TARE Command CAL TARE RESET to reset channel offsets Sequence CAL STORE TARE Optional if necessary to reset tare cal constants in flash memory CALibration TARE CALibration TARE Returns a value to indicate the success of the last CAL TARE operation CAL TARE returns the value only after the CAL TARE operation is complete e Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYST ERR See Error Messages in Appendix B Also run TST 2 No results available Perform CAL TARE before CAL TARE The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 e Executing CAL TARE sets the Calibrating bit bit 0 in Operation Status Group Executing CAL TARE resets the bit e Related Commands CAL STOR TARE Command CAL TARE ch list to correc
136. CALibration TARE operation takes much longer with OTD enabled However for users who intend to take readings with OTD enabled setting DIAG CAL TARE OTD MODE to 1 will force the CAL TARE command to perform calibration with OTD enabled on channels so specified by the user with the DIAG OTD command e Related Commands CAL CAL SET DIAG CAL SET MODE e RST Condition DIAG CAL TARE MODE 0 configure OTD on during CAL TARE DIAG CAL TARE MODE 1 set mode for OTD to stay on CAL TARE start channel tare cal DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE Comments DIAGnostic CALibration TARE OTDetect MODE returns the currently set mode for controlling Open Transducer Detect current while performing CAL TARE operation e Returns a O when OTD current will be turned off during CAL TARE Returns 1 when OTD current will be left on during CAL TARE operation The C SCPI type is int16 e Related Commands DIAG CAL TARE MOD DIAG OTD CAL TARE e RST Condition DIAG CAL TARE MODE 0 220 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CHECksum DIAGnostic CHECksum performs a checksum operation on flash memory A returned value of 1 indicates that flash memory contents are correct A returned value of O indicates that the flash memory is corrupted or has been erased Comments Returned Value Returns 1 or 0 The C SCPI type is int16 Usage DIAG CHEC Checksum flash memory return 1 for OK 0 for corr
137. Complete function OPC command and the Operation Complete Query function OPC command Define Macro Command Assigns one or a sequence of commands to a named macro The command sequence may be composed of SCPI and or Common commands The lt name gt parameter may be the same as a SCPI command but may not be the same as a Common command When a SCPI named macro is executed the macro rather than the SCPI command is executed To regain the function of the SCPI command execute EMC 0 command The lt cmd data gt parameter is sent as arbitrary block program data see page 180 EMC Enable Macro Command When lt enable gt is non zero macros are enabled When lt enable gt is zero macros are disabled EMC Enable Macro query Returns either 1 macros are enabled or O macros are disabled ESE lt mask gt Standard Event Status Enable Register Command Enables one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 the Standard Event Status Summary Bit of the Status Byte Register Enable an event by specifying its decimal weight for lt mask gt To enable more than one event bit specify the sum of the decimal weights The C SCPI type for lt mask gt is int16 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Weighted Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Event power On User Command Execution Device Dependent Query Request Operation Request Error Error Error Error Control
138. Direct Input SCP the source impedance of the measurement is essentially the value of the thermistor the output impedance of the current source is in the gigaohm region Even though this is a higher level measurement than the previous example the settling time can be even longer due to the slower discharge of the stray capacitances The simple answer here is to always use an SCP that presents a low impedance buffered output to the VT1419A s Range Amp and A D The VT1503A 08A 09A 10A 12A and 14A through 17A SCPs all provide this capability The method used to quickly determine if any system channels need more settling time is to simply apply some settling time to every channel Use this procedure 1 First run the system to make a record of its current measurement performance 2 Then use the SAMPle TIMer command to add a significant settling delay to every measurement in the scan list Take care that the sample time multiplied by the number of channels in the scan list doesn t exceed the time between triggers 3 Now run the system and look primarily for low level channel measurements like thermocouples whose de value changes somewhat If channels are found that respond to this increase in sample period it may be noticed that these channels are returning slightly quieter measurements as well The extra sample period reduces or removes the affected channels coupling to the value of the channel measured just before it 4 Ifsome
139. E sent Returns state of named algorithm Returns worst case alg execution time Use MAIN for overall time Defines a custom conversion function Sets the delay from scan trigger to start of outputs Returns the delay from scan trigger to start of outputs Requests immediate update of algorithm code variable or array Sets dig channel to synch algorithm updates Sets a window for num updates to occur RST default is 20 Returns setting for allowable number variable and algorithm updates Arm if ARM SOUR is BUS or HOLD software ARM Specify the source of Trigger Timer ARM Return current ARM source Prepare to measure on board references with an external multimeter Configure to measure reference resistor Configure to measure reference voltage range at zero or full scale Performs Channel Calibration procedure Returns state of CAL SETup operation returns error codes or 0 for OK Store cal constants to Flash RAM for either A D calibration or those generated by the CAL TARE command Chapter 6 321 Command CALibration cont TARE lt ch_list gt RESet TARE VALue RESistance ref ohms gt VOLTage lt ref volts gt ZERO DIAGnostic CALibration SETup EMODE 0 1 MODE TARe OTD EMODE 0 1 MODE CHECksum COMMand SCPWRITE lt reg_addr gt lt reg_data gt CUSTom LINear lt table ad range table block a ch list PIECewise table ad range gt lt table_blo
140. ERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES VXITECHNOLOGY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice VXI TECHNOLOGY MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE VXI Technology shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of VXI Technology VXI Technology assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by VXI Technology Restricted Rights Legend U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 Oct 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 Jun 1995
141. FO 262 263 265 ALG SCAN RATIO vs ALG UPD 193 ALG SIZE return for undefined algorithm 195 ALG STATE effective after ALG UPDATE 85 ALG STATE effective only after ALG UPD 195 ALG TIME return for undefined algorithm 197 Algorithm Language case sensitivity 123 Algorithm Language reserved keywords 122 Algorithm source string terminated with null 117 Algorithm source string terminates with null 190 Algorithm swapping limitations 192 Algorithm Swapping restrictions 119 Algorithm variable declaration and assignment 111 Amplifier SCPs can reduce measurement noise 103 BASIC s vs C s is equal to symbol 134 Bitfield access C vs Algorithm Language 127 Cannot declare channel ID as variable 123 Combining SCPI commands 182 CVT contents after RST 261 Decimal constants can be floating or integer 129 Default RST Engineering Conversion 59 Define user function before algorithm calls 114 Do not CAL TARE thermocouple wiring 212 Do use CAL TARE for copper in TC wiring 98 Do use CAL TARE for copper TC wiring 212 Don t use CAL TARE for thermocouple wiring 98 Flash memory limited lifetime 99 211 Isothermal reference measurements 28 MEM subsystem vs command module model 241 MEM subsystem vs TRIG and INIT sequence 241 MEM system vs TRIG and INIT sequence 228 Memory required by an algorithm 118 Number of updates vs ALG UPD WINDOW 187 192 202 Open transducer detect restrictions 100 OUTP CUR
142. Ference CHANnels command The SENSe REFerence lt type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt command links channels to the reference temperature EU conversion e The lt ch_list gt parameter specifies the sense channel that is connected to the reference temperature sensor e The lt type gt parameter can specify THERmistor RTD or CUSTom THER and RTD are resistance temperature measurements and use the on board 122 yA current source for excitation CUSTom is pre defined as a Type E thermocouple which has a thermally controlled ice point reference junction e The lt sub_type gt parameter must specify For RTDs 85 or 92 for 100 ohm RTDs with 0 00385 or 0 00392 ohms ohm C temperature coefficients respectively For Thermistors only 5000 See previous note on page 61 For CUSTom only 1 e The optional lt range gt parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified defaulted or set to AUTO the module uses auto range Chapter 3 63 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels Reference Measurement Before Thermocouple Measurements At this point the concept of the VT1419A Scan List will be introduced As each algorithm is defined the VT1419A places any reference to an analog input channel into the Scan List When algorithms are run the scan list tells the VT1419A which analog channels to scan during the Input Phase
143. GLOBALS static float My global Error RST ALG DEF GLOBALS static float My global No error ALG DEF GLOBALS static float A different global Algorithm already defined Because GLOBALS already defined Error RST ALG DEF ALG3 static float z if First_loop z 0 z z 1 No error ALG DEF ALG3 static float Cntr Inc 0132 Cntr Cntr Cntr Inc Algorithm already defined Because ALG3 already defined 2 If alg name gt has been enabled to swap originally defined with the swap size parameter included then the lt alg_name gt can be re defined do not include swap size now either while the module is in the Trigger Idle State or while in Waiting For Trigger State INITed Here lt alg name gt is an algorithm name only not GLOBALS OK RST ALG DEF ALG3 200 1f 0132 lt 15 0 013220132 0 1 else 0132 15 07 INIT starts algorithm ALG DEF ALG3 1f 0132 lt 12 0 0132 0132 0 2 else 0132 12 0 ALG UPDATE Required to cause new code to run No error Error RST ALG DEF ALG3 200 1f 0132 lt 15 0 0132 0132 0 1 else 0132 15 07 INIT starts algorithm ALG DEF ALG3 200 1f 0132 lt 12 0 0132 0132 0 2 else 0132 12 07 Algorithm swapping already enabled Can t change size Because lt swap_size gt included at re definition Chapter 6 191 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm NOTES 1 Channels referenced by algorithms when they are d
144. Gorithm EXPLicit SCALar alg name gt lt var_name gt o page 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio alg name gt lt value gt 0 page 193 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio alg name 22e page 194 ALGorithm EXPLicit SIZe alg name gt 1 e aTa ne e E e E p page 194 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe alg name gt 1 0 ONJOFF llle page 195 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe alg name gt 22e page 196 ALGorithm EXPLicit TIME alg name gt lees page 196 ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine lt func_name gt lt range gt lt offset gt lt func_data gt page 197 ALGorithm OUTPut DELay lt delay gt AUTO aaa ee page 198 ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 2 ee page 199 ALGorithm UPDate IMMediate 2 2 ee page 199 ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel lt channel gt nnana eA page 200 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow num updates ess page 202 ALGorithm UPDate WINDow sss ss page 203 ARM IMMediate ic 2522529 40802 R 4 I EG dom E E Y Y A Y VOR Y S ERA page 205 ARM SOURce BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TTLTrg lt Sn gt llle page 205 ARM SOURCE uua A AAA Gwe Pee a page 206 CALibration CONFigure RESistance ee page 208 CALibration CONFigure VOLTage lt range gt CALibration SETup ses uoc fee ee a a He eed ee AD D E GA page 210 Chapter 6 173 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration SETup sa y y Rs page 210 CALibration STORe ADC TARE e page 211
145. IMMediate command is sent the VT1419A builds the input Scan List from the input channels referenced when the algorithm is defined with the ALG DEF command above The module also enters the Waiting For Trigger State see Figure 3 3 In this state all that is required to run the algorithm is a trigger event for each pass through the input calculate output cycle To initiate the module send the command INIT module in Waiting for Trigger State When an INIT command is executed the driver checks several interrelated settings programmed in the previous steps If there are conflicts in these settings an error message is placed in the Error Queue read with the SYST ERR command Some examples e If TRIG SOUR is not TIMer then ARM SOUR must be IMMediate e The time it would take to execute all algorithms is longer than the TRIG TIMER interval currently set Once the module is INITiated it can accept triggers from any source specified in TRIG SOUR TRIG SOUR TIMER RST default ARM SOUR IMM RST default INIT INIT starts Timer triggers or TRIG SOUR TIMER ARM SOUR HOLD INIT INIT readies module ARM ARM starts Timer triggers and the algorithms start to execute 4 OUTPUT 2 3 UPDATE EXECUTE ALGS eee output table sent to SCP channels Set by ALG OUTPUT DELay if any Trigger Event Figure 3 8 Sequence of Loop Operations 80 Chapter 3 The Operating Sequence Programming the VT1419A Multifunction
146. INe 223 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe 224 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe 224 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe 225 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD 225 DIAGnostic VERSion 226 FETCh 227 FETCh subsystem 227 228 FORMat subsystem 229 231 FORMat DATA 229 FORMat DATA 230 INITiate subsystem 232 INITiate IMMediate 232 INP THReshold LEVel 239 INPut subsystem 233 240 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency 235 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe 236 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe 236 INPut GAIN 237 INPut GAIN 237 INPut L DEBounce TIME 233 INPut LOW 238 INPut LOW 238 INPut LPASs FILTer FREQuency 234 INPut POLarity 239 INPut POLarity 239 MEMory subsystem 241 244 MEMory VME ADDRess 242 MEMory VME ADDRess 242 MEMory VME SIZE 242 MEMory VME SIZE 243 MEMory VME STATe 243 MEMory VME STATe 244 OUTPut subsystem 245 253 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude 245 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude 246 OUTPut CURRent STATe 247 OUTPut CURRent STATe 247 OUTPut POLarity 248 OUTPut POLarity 248 OUTPut SHUNt 248 OUTPut SHUNt 249 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce 249 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce 250 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 250 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 251 OUTPut TYPE 251 OUTPut TYPE 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 252 ROUTE subsystem 254 255 ROUTe SEQuence DEFine 254 ROUTe SEQuence POINts 255 SAMPle subsystem 256 257 SAMPle TIMer 256 SAMPle TIMer 256 SENSe subsystem 258 284 SENSe CHANne
147. In this case the best performance will most likely be achieved by leaving the GND GRD jumper in place Figure 2 9 B D In general the GND GRD jumper can be left in place unless it is necessary to remove to break low frequency below 1 kHz ground loops Use good quality foil or braided shield signal cable Route signal leads as far as possible from the sources of greatest noise In general don t connect Hi or Lo to Guard or Ground at the VT1419A It is best if there is a dc path somewhere in the system from Hi or Lo to Guard Ground The impedance from Hi to Guard Ground should be the same as from Lo to Guard Ground balanced Since each system is different don t be afraid to experiment using the suggestions presented here until an acceptable noise level is found 36 Chapter 2 Field Wiring Preferred Measurement Connections power A Shield Device Hnn Under Test O oe pressure A Example for GND Powered power Transducers Ki Device Sieg Hnn Under Test O G guard 10 kOhm i part of Term Mod t 0 l Shield Hnn Device Under Test Enn l C G guard gna Example for 9 Thermocouples GND di Shield I Hnn Device Under Test Lnn D G guard t ith ry ei Ton AA 10 kOhm part of Term Mod Shield Hnn Lnn Example for G guard Resistive Transducers jeans part of Term Mod Current Hi a Stimulu
148. MC Directive 89 336 EEC inclusive 93 68 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly Tested in a typical configuration in an HP C Size VXI mainframe July 30 2004 eve Mauga QA Manager Table of Contents W arany PPP 2 WAPI GS coa T 3 Satetyisymbolsi qu eea a aa a slo dios 3 Note for European Customers ooo 3 Support RESQUICES a uas reich teo SACRO EUR A SA SEO dep NO RON E A 13 Chapter 1 Getting Started ooo ooooooocrorooronocrrsonorncsosonr9sorososo 15 About This Chapter Jide eee a a dae ed 15 Contig ring the VT TA19 i rede Lee Lek eatis e Repub e rect dus do dogs odd 15 Setting the Logical Address Switch 15 Installing SGPS ocu Rue Lema eR cU T dE 16 Disabling the Input Protect Feature Optional ooooccoccoccoccoccooo 21 Disabling Flash Memory Access Optional 21 Instrument DrIVets oi A a dd uror vereri dra 23 About Example PLOT ui a a deta 23 Verifying a Successful Configuration lessen 23 Chapter 2 Field Wiring sesse 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece ce cece he hh hh hn 25 About This Chapter sso pei q Ceia etuer diag Rub gh avec iaa bea od 25 Planning the Wiring Layout lseseeeeeeeeeee I he 25 SCP Positions and Channel Numbers ooococcoccccccoo eee 25 SCP Types and Signal Paths corona a o rue eed e ea ede a an 25 Pairing Sense and Source SCPs for Resistance Measurements lesse 27 Planning for Thermocouple Measurements 28 Faceplate Connector Pin Signal List
149. NG command ALG CHAN SETT specifies the number of times a channel measurement should be repeated The total settling time per channel then is SAMP TIMER lt interval gt X lt chan_repeats gt from SENS CHAN SETT e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands SENSE CHAN SETTLING SAMP TIMER e RST Condition Sample Timer for all Channel Lists set to 1 0E 5 seconds Usage SAMPLE TIMER 50E 6 Pace measurements at 50 us intervals SAMPle TIMer SAMPle TIMer returns the sample timer interval Comments Returned Value Numeric The C SCPI type is float32 256 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SAMPle e Related Commands SAMP TIMER e RST Condition Sample Timer set to 1 0E 5 seconds Usage SAMPLE TIMER Check the interval between channel measurements Chapter 6 257 SENSe Subsystem Syntax SENSe CHANnel SSETTling settle time gt 0 lt ch list gt SETTlimg lt channel gt DATA CVTable lt element_list gt RESet FIFO ALL COUNt HALF HALF MODE BLOCK OVERwrite MODE PART lt n_values gt RESet FREQuency APERture lt gate time gt lt ch_list gt FREQuency APERture lt channel gt FUNCtion CONDition lt ch_list gt CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt TC lt type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt FREQuency lt ch_list gt RESistance excite current gt lt range gt 0 lt ch list gt
150. OND STAT OPER EVENT STAT OPER ENABLE e RST Condition No change STAT OPER ENABLE Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the Operation Enable register STATus OPERation EVENt Comments Usage STATus OPERation EVENt returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Event register e When using the Operation Event register to cause SRQ interrupts STAT OPER EVENT must be executed after an SRQ to clear the event register and re enable future interrupts e Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT OPER COND STAT OPER ENABLE STAT OPER ENABLE e Cleared By CLS power on and by reading the register e RST Condition No change STAT OPER EVENT Enter statement will return the value of bits set in the Operation Event register STAT OPER Same as above STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation NTRansition lt transition_mask gt sets bits in the Negative Transition Filter NTF register When a bit in the NTF register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition register must change from a one to a zero in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event register When a bit in the NTF register is Zero a negative transition of the Condition register bit will not change the Event register bit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Unit
151. ORM for all digital SCP channels Usage INP POL INV 140 143 invert first 4 channels on SCP at SCP position 5 Channels 40 through 43 INPut POLarity INPut POLarity lt channel gt returns the logical input polarity on a digital SCP channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e If the channel specified is on an SCP that doesn t support this function an error will be generated See the SCP s User s Manual to determine its capabilities e Returned Value returns NORM or INV The type is string INPut THReshold LEVel INPut THReshold LEVel lt channel gt returns the currently set input threshold level Chapter 6 239 VT1419A Command Reference INPut Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e For the VT1536A Isolated Digital I O SCP INP THR LEV returns a numeric value which is one of 5 12 24 48 or 0 zero where zero means that the channel is configured as an output and non zero values indicate the input threshold in volts Note If an invalid switch combination is set on a VT1536A INP THR LEV will NOT return a value and will generate the error 3105 Invalid SC
152. P switch setting This error will also be generated when RST is executed Channels associated with this error will behave as input channels with unknown threshold levels e Usage To query the threshold level on the second channel at SCP position 2 send INP THR LEV 8117 query 2nd chan on SCP pos 2 enter statement here returns 0 5 12 24 48 240 Chapter 6 MEMory The MEMory subsystem allows using VME memory as an additional reading storage buffer Subsystem Syntax MEMory VME ADDRess lt 424_address gt ADDRess SIZE lt mem_size gt SIZE SSTATe 1 0 ON OFF ISTATe NOTE This subsystem is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module Use Sequence RST MEM VME ADDR H300000 MEM VME SIZE H100000 1 MB or 262 144 readings MEM VME STAT ON set up VT1419A for scanning TRIG SOUR IMM let unit trigger on INIT INIT OPC program execution remains here until VME memory is full or the VT1419A has stopped taking readings FORM REAL 64 affects only the return of data FETCH return data from VME memory NOTE When using the MEM subsystem the module must be triggered before executing the INIT command as shown above unless an external trigger EXT trigger is being used When using EXT trigger the trigger can occur at any time Chapter 6 241 VT1419A Command Reference MEMory MEMory VME ADDRess MEMory VME ADDRess lt 424 address gt sets the A
153. PER PTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the PTF register STATus PRESet sets the Operation Status Enable and Questionable Data Enable registers to 0 After executing this command none of the events in the Operation Event or Questionable Event registers will be reported as a summary bit in either the Status Byte Group or Standard Event Status Group STATus PRESet does not clear either of the Event registers e Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT OPER ENABLE STAT OPER ENABLE STAT QUES ENABLE STAT QUES ENABLE e RST Condition No change STAT PRESET Clear both of the Enable registers Chapter 6 297 VT1419A Command Reference STATus The Questionable Data Group The Questionable Data Group indicates when errors are causing lost or questionable data The bit assignments are Bit dec value hex value Bit Name Description 8 256 0100 Calibration Lost At RST or Power on Control Processor has found a checksum error in the Calibration Constants Read error s with SYST ERR and re calibrate area s that lost constants 9 512 02006 Trigger Too Fast Scan not complete when another trigger event received 10 1024 0400 6 FIFO Overflowed Attempt to store more than 65 024 readings in FIFO 11 2048 08006 Over voltage If the input protection jumper has not been cut the Detected on Input input relays have been opened and RST is required to reset the module Overvoltage will also generate a
154. R AMPL command 58 OUTP CURR AMPL for resistance measurements 245 OUTP VOLT AMPL command 58 Reference to noise reduction literature 373 Resistance temperature measurements 61 Saving time when doing channel calibration 72 Selecting manual range vs SCP gains 59 Setting the interrupt level 15 Settings conflict ARM SOUR vs TRIG SOUR 204 308 Thermocouple reference temperature usage 277 279 TRIGger SOURce vs ARM SOURce 78 Warmup before executing TST 362 When algorithm variables are initialized 128 NTRansition STAT OPER NTRansition 295 STAT QUES NTRansition 300 NTRansition STAT OPER NTRansition 296 STAT QUES NTRansition 301 O Octal constant 129 Offset A D 210 311 channel 210 311 Offsets compensating for system 97 99 Offsets residual sensor 98 Offsets system wiring 97 Operating model 52 Operating sequence 114 115 388 Index Operation 71 98 Operation and restrictions 71 Operation status group examples 92 Operation custom EU 96 Operation HP E1419A background 94 Operation standard EU 96 Operator assignment 123 Operator unary arithmetic 134 Operator unary logical 123 Operators 123 Operators arithmetic 123 Operators comparison 123 Operators logical 123 Operators the arithmetic 134 Operators the comparison 134 Operators the logical 134 Operators unary 123 Option A3F 46 Order algorithm execution 116 OTD restrictions NOTE 100 OTDetect DIAGnostic O
155. RS Us ces sen o e A pt LIE EE ed Guarana ae 315 SRE Mas siga seg est A SES AAA A AAA aes 316 A O E ADERIR pe NENE EE 316 STB sa iara ari a SDS bene eden 316 RC ig irado O NO 316 FEST Rosado rici One Root cach a ad meee Re 317 EV ut des saio cpt asian AO 320 Command Quick Reference o oooooooooooor ee 321 Appendix A Specifications 0 ccc ccc ccc cece ce rece ehh hh eens 329 Appendix B Error Messages ccc cece cece cece cece hh hn 359 Appendix C Glossary 0 ccc cc ccc cece reece cet hh hh nn 367 Appendix D Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods cece cece cree ee cece 371 Separating Digital and Analog SCP Signals 0 0 cece eee eee eee 371 Recommended Wiring and Noise Reduction Techniques 000000 esses 372 Waring Checklist discado dei da sae edad a ia 372 VT1419A Guard Connections issons ean ee nia en 373 Common Mode Voltage Limits 0 0 0 0 0c eect en 373 When to Make Shield Connections sls 373 Noise Due to Inadequate Card Grounding 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 373 VT1A19A Nols Rejection mia a aes ong le ans BOB aad ad 374 Normal Mode Noise Enm 0 adast preke nin OnE E EEE DER EEEE a 374 Common Mode Noise Ecm 1 2 2 0 0 ce cece tenet teens 374 Keeping Common Mode Noise out of the Amplifier 0 00 000 e ee eee 374 Reducing Common Mode Rejection Using Tri Filar Transformers 375 Appendix E Gener
156. SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature 5 5 eats ERROR SENSe DATA CVTable SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage 5 3 lem or 5 q q a SENSe DATA CVTable RESet cient 1 2 8 Value 3 Table E E Formatter Control Processor Le EU Conversion A D i see 5 le o 3 a 2 FORMat DATA SENSe DATA FIFOL ALL FIFO i 8 ch 23 COUNt Reading i F EU toble 5 9 HALF Buffer i Fl PART 64k 3 2 i E 1 HALF 2 8 Channel k E 3 2 Function range selection u RESet 8 Ll ond ES SENSe DATA FIFO MODE EJ pianos 3 cn 55 List SCPI CSCPI Driver SCP 3 7 Scan Multiplexer List next chonnelff Control Ch 63 S CP Trigger t ARM SOURce 5 7 E wii 3 TRIGger TIMer 5 EE mg o S 5 A 83 Trigger E INITitate IMMidiate 3 0 Timer 2 n o x amp TRIGger SOURce icu o m TiMer SCPlugon FTRigger CALibration SETup BUS SETup 8 TRIGger it EXTernal 5 25 HOLD 0 2 Trigger OS Cal 7 52 Enable Tg Source 7 IMMediate 33 napis Selector OUTPut TRIGger SOURce CALibration CONFigure RESistance Yoltoge oo TTLTrg lt n gt 8 lines E VOLTage e VALue RESistance SCP Trigger gs 1 VOLTage o Trigger Counter TIL utet OuTPutTTLTIg lt n gt iene Cal Resistor a oo TRIGger COUNt HRG CO Col Zero VXIbus TILTRGN 8 lines Figure 3 5 Programming Overview Chapter 3 55 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Chan
157. SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize lt ch_list gt sets the SENSe function to TOTalize for channels in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch_list string 132 163 none Comments The totalize function counts rising edges of digital transitions at Frequency Totalize SCP channels The counter is 24 bits wide and can count up to 16 777 215 e The SENS TOT RESET MODE command controls which events will reset the counter Chapter 6 275 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe If the channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated Related Commands SENS TOT RESET MODE INPUT POLARITY RST Condition SENS FUNC COND and INP POL NORM for all digital SCP channels Usage SENS FUNC TOT 148 channel 48 is a totalizer SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt links the specified channels to return dc voltage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 see comments V de ch_list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The lt range gt parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V de 0 25 V de 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range Ifa value is specified la
158. SOURce FUNC SHAPe CONDition 286 SOURce FUNC SHAPe PULSe 287 SOURce FUNC SHAPe SQUare 287 SOURce PULM STATe 287 SOURce PULM STATe 288 SOURce PULSe PERiod 288 SOURce PULSe PERiod 289 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 289 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 289 SOURce TRIG SOURce 309 Sources arm 77 trigger 77 Special considerations 99 Special identifiers for channels 123 Special VT1419A reserved keywords 122 Specifications 329 Specifying the data format 75 SQUare SOURce FUNC SHAPe SQUare 287 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI 184 Standard EU operation 96 Standard event group examples 92 Standard reserved keywords 122 Starting algorithms 80 STAT OPER CONDition 293 STAT OPER ENABle 294 Index 391 STAT OPER ENABle 294 STAT OPER EVENt 295 STAT OPER NTRansition 295 STAT OPER NTRansition 296 STAT OPER PTRansition 296 STAT OPER PTRansition 297 STAT PRESet 297 STAT QUES CONDition 298 STAT QUES ENABle 299 STAT QUES ENABle 299 STAT QUES EVENt 299 STAT QUES NTRansition 300 STAT QUES NTRansition 301 STAT QUES PTRansition 301 STAT QUES PTRansition 302 STATe ALGorithm EXPLicit 195 DIAG OTD STATe 224 DIAG OTD STATe 225 INP FILT LPAS STATe 236 INP FILT LPAS STATe 236 MEM VME STATe 243 MEM VME STATe 244 OUTPut CURRent STATe 247 OUTPut CURRent STATe 247 SOURce PULM STATe 287 STATe ALGorithm EXPLicit 196 SOURce PULM STATe 288 Statement algorithm l
159. Se SENSe FREQuency APERture lt ch_list gt returns the frequency counting gate time Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments Ifthe channels specified are on an SCP that doesn t support this function an error will be generated See the SCP s User s Manual for its capabilities Parameters Comments Usage e Related Commands SENSe FREQuency APERture e Returned Value returns numeric gate time in seconds The type is float32 SENSe FUNCtion CONDition lt ch_list gt sets the SENSe function to input the digital state for channels in cA list gt Also configures digital SCP channels as inputs this is the RST condition for all digital I O channels Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch_list string 132 163 none e The VT1533A SCP senses eight digital bits on each channel specified by this command The VT1534A SCP senses one digital bit on each channel specified by this command e Ifthe channels specified are not on a digital SCP an error will be generated e Use the INPut POLarity command to set input logical sense e Related Commands INPut POLarity e RST Condition SENS FUNC COND and INP POL NORM for all digital SCP channels To set first four channels of a VT1534A in SCP position 6 and second 8 bits of VT1533A at SCP position 7 to digital inp
160. Statement statement list NOTE Variable declaration not allowed in compound statement Statement expression statement compound statement selection statement Statement List statement statement list statement Algorithm Definition declarations statement list statement list 132 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Program Structure and Syntax Program Structure and Syntax In this section the portion of the C programming language that is directly applicable to the VT1419A Algorithm Language will be learned To do this the C Algorithm Language elements will be compared with equivalent BASIC language elements Declaring Variables In BASIC the DIM statement is typically used to name variables and allocate space in memory for them In the Algorithm Language the variable type and a list of variables is specified BASIC C DIM a var array 3 static float a var array 3 Here three variables are declared Two simple variables a and var and a single dimensioned array array Comments e Note that the C language statement must be terminated with the semicolon e Although in the Algorithm Language all variables are of type float they must be explicitly declared as such e All variables in an algorithm are static This means that each time the algorithm is executed the variables remember their values from the previous execution The static modifier must appea
161. System Reading the Status Byte To have the FIFO Overflowed and Setup Changed conditions reported execute STAT QUES ENAB 9216 9216 decimal sum of values for bits 10 and 13 Operation Status Group Examples To have only the FIFO Half Full condition be reported by the OPR bit bit 7 of the Status Byte execute STAT OPER ENAB 1024 1024 decimal value for bit 10 To have the FIFO Half Full and Scan Complete conditions reported execute STAT OPER ENAB 1280 1280 decimal sum of values for bits 10 and 8 Standard Event Group Examples To have only wanted the Query Error Execution Error and Command Error conditions reported by the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte execute ESE 52 52 decimal sum of values for bits 2 4 and 5 To check if any enabled events have occurred in the status system first read the Status Byte using the STB command If the Status Byte is all zeros no summary information is being sent from any of the status groups If the Status Byte is other than zero one or more enabled events have occurred Interpret the Status Byte bit values and take further action as follows Bit 3 QUE Read the Questionable Data Group s Event Register using bit value 8 the STAT QUES EVENT command This will return bit values for events which have occurred in this group After reading the Event Register is cleared Note that bits in this group indicate error conditions If b
162. T The following string output is valid for strings of 256 characters or less ALG DEF globals static float output max 1 coefficients 10 If the global definition exceeds 256 characters it will be necessary to download an indefinite block header the definitions and terminate it with a LF EOI sequence ALG DEF globals 0static float output max 1 LF EOI The LF EOI sequence is part of the I O and Instrument Manager in Agilent VEE The VT1419A I O device must be edited for direct I O with EOI purposely selected to be sent with the EOL terminator Chapter 3 73 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Defining C Language Algorithms Algorithm Definition Pre Setting Algorithm Variables Algorithms are similar in nature to global definitions Both scalars and arrays can be defined for local use by the algorithm If less than 256 characters simply place the algorithm code within string quotes ALG DEF alg1 static float a 1 if 1100 gt a writecvt 1100 10 If the algorithm exceeds 256 characters 1t will be necessary to download an indefinite block header the algorithm code and terminated by a LF EOI sequence ALG DEF alg HOstatic float a 1 LF EOI Algorithms remain around and cannot be altered once defined unless a fixed size is specified for the algorithm see Chapter 4 Algorithms are removed from memory only by issuing a RST or power ON condition Agilent VEE
163. TDetect 101 OUTP CURRent AMPLitude 245 OUTP CURRent AMPLitude 246 OUTP SHUNt 248 OUTP SHUNt 249 OUTP TTLT lt n gt STATe 250 OUTP TTLT lt n gt STATe 251 Output channels 110 OUTPut subsystem 245 253 OUTPut CURRent STATe 247 OUTPut CURRent STATe 247 OUTPut POLarity 248 OUTPut POLarity 248 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce 249 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce 250 OUTPut TYPE 251 OUTPut TYPE 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 252 Outputs setting up digital 67 Outputting trigger signals 79 OVER reading the latest FIFO values FIFO mode 84 Overall program structure 137 Overall sequence 114 Overloads unexpected channel 99 Overview of the algorithm language 106 107 P Parameter data and returned value types 183 Parameters configuring programmable analog SCP 56 PART SENS DATA FIFO PART 265 Performing channel calibration Important 71 72 PERiod SOURce PULSe PERiod 288 PERiod SOURce PULSe PERiod 289 Planning grouping channels to signal conditioning 25 planning wiring layout 25 28 sense vs output SCPs 27 thermocouple wiring 28 Plug ons installing signal conditioning 16 Points ROUT SEQ POINts 255 POISson SENSe STRain POISson 281 SENSe STRain POISson 281 POLarity INPut POLarity 239 OUTPut POLarity 248 Polarity setting input 66 Polarity setting output 68 POLarity INPut POLarity 239 OUTPut POLarity 248 Power Available for SCPs 329 Power o
164. TE in Figure 6 1 following the channel s change of digital state This command is useful to synchronize multiple VT1419As when it is desirable for all variable updates to be processed at the same time 200 Chapter 6 Parameters VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units dig chan Algorithm Input channel for VT1533A Iccc Bb none Language channel for VT1534A Iccc specifier string where ccc normal channel number and b bit number include B Comments The duration of the level change to the designated bit or channel MUST be at NOTE Command Sequence least the length of time between scan triggers Variable and algorithm changes can be accepted during the INPUT or UPDATE phases Figure 6 1 when INTT is active All writes to variables and algorithms occur to their buffered elements upon receipt However these changes do not take effect until the ALG UPD CHAN command is processed at the beginning of the UPDATE phase Note that the ALG UPD WINDow command specifies the maximum number of updates to do If no update command is pending when entering the UPDATE phase then this time is dedicated to receiving more changes from the system As soon as the ALG UPD CHAN command is received the VT1419A begins to closely monitor the state of the update channel and can not execute other commands until the update channel changes state to com
165. TPut SHUNt OUTPut SHUNt lt channel gt returns the status of the shunt resistance on the specified Strain SCP channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e If lt channel gt specifies a non strain SCP a 3007 Invalid signal conditioning plug on error is generated e Returned Value Returns 1 or 0 The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands OUTP SHUNT Usage OUTPUT SHUNt 151 Check status of shunt resistance on channel 51 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce lt trig_source gt selects the internal source of the trigger event that will operate the VXIbus TTLTRG lines Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units trig source discrete ALGorithm TRIGger FTRigger SCPlugon none string Comments The following table explains the possible choices Chapter 6 249 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut Parameter Value Source of Trigger ALGorithm Generated by the Algorithm Language function interrupt FTRigger Generated on the First Trigger of a multiple counted scan set by TRIG COUNT lt trig_count gt SCPlugon Generated by a Signal Conditioning Plug On SCP Do not use this when Sample and Hold SCPs are installed
166. The Algorithm Language and Environment Program Structure and Syntax Note that in BASIC the lt boolean_expression gt is delimited by the IF and the THEN keywords In C the parentheses delimit the expression In C the 9 is the implied THEN In BASIC the END IF keyword terminates a multi line IF In C the if is terminated at the end of the following statement when no else clause is present or at the end of the statement following the else clause Figure 4 4 shows examples of these forms Note that in C else is part of the closest previous if statement So the example if x 1f y z 1 else z 2 executes like not like if x if x if y if y Z 1 z 1 else z 2 else Z 2 Chapter 4 135 The Algorithm Language and Environment Program Structure and Syntax Comment Lines Probably the most important element of programming is the comment In older BASIC interpreters the comment line began with REM and ended at the end of line character s probably carriage return then linefeed Later BASICs allowed comments to also begin with various shorthand characters such as epo or gt n all cases a comment ended when the end of line is encountered In C and the Algorithm Language comments begin with the two characters and continue until the two characters are encountered Examples BASIC Syntax IF boolea
167. The way the FIFO will be read depends on how the mode was set in the programming step Setting the FIFO Mode on page 76 Continuously Reading the FIFO FIFO mode BLOCK To read the FIFO while algorithms are running the FIFO mode must be set to SENS DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK In this mode if the FIFO fills up it stops accepting values from algorithms The algorithms continue to execute but the latest data is lost To avoid losing any FIFO data the application needs to read the FIFO often enough to keep it from overflowing Here s a flow diagram to show where and when to use the FIFO commands C Begin Data Retrieval Enough Values in FIFO Command Execute Bulk Transfer DATAFIFO PART n values Execute Final Transfer Command o y C Exit Data Retrieval J Figure 3 10 Controlling Reading Count Chapter 3 83 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Retrieving Algorithm Data Here s an example command sequence for Figure 3 10 It assumes that the FIFO mode was set to BLOCK and that at least one algorithm is sending values to the FIFO following loop reads number of values in FIFO while algorithms executing loop while measuring bit is true see STAT OPER COND bit 4 SENS DATA FIFO COUNT query for count of values in FIFO input n_values here if n_values gt 16384 Sets the minimum block size to transfer SENS DATA FIFO PART n_values ask for n_values i
168. Transition Filter registers allow the polarity of change from the Condition registers that will set Event register bits to be controlled Event registers contain latched representations of signal transition events from their Condition register Querying an Event register reads and then clears its contents making it ready to record further event transitions from its Condition register Enable registers are used to select which signals from an Event register will be logically OR ed together to form a summary bit in the Status Byte Summary register Setting a bit to one in an Enable register enables the corresponding bit from its Event register For a complete discussion and more detailed status illustration see Using the Status System on page 88 Condition P N Transition Event Enable Bit 0 Bit 1 Summary Bit to Summary Byte Bit 14 Bit 15 Figure 6 4 General Status Register Organization Chapter 6 291 Initializing the The following table shows the effect of Power on RST CLS and Status System STATus PRESet on the status system register settings SCPI SCPI SCPI IEEE 488 2 IEEE 488 2 Transition Enable Event Registers Registers Filters Registers Registers ESE and SRE SESR and STB Power on preset preset clear clear clear RST none none none none none CLS none none clear none clear STAT PRESET preset preset none none none Subsystem Synt
169. U conversion for 100 Q RTDs with 0 00385 IC Thermocouple Measurements Thermocouple measurements are voltage measurements that the EU conversion changes into temperature values based on the sub type gt parameter and latest reference temperature value 62 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels e For Thermocouples the lt sub_type gt parameter can specify CUSTom E EEXT J K N R S T CUSTom is pre defined as Type K no reference junction compensation EEXT is the type E for extended temperatures of 800 C or above To set channels 24 through 31 to measure temperature using type E thermocouples SENS FUNC TEMP TC E 124 131 see following section to configure a TC reference measurement Thermocouple Reference Temperature Compensation The isothermal reference temperature is required for thermocouple temperature EU conversions The Reference Temperature Register must be loaded with the current reference temperature before thermocouple channels are scanned The Reference Temperature Register can be loaded two ways 4 By measuring the temperature of an isothermal reference junction during an Input scan 5 By supplying a constant temperature value that of a controlled temperature reference junction before a scan is started Setting up a Reference Temperature Measurement This operation requires two commands the SENSe REFerence command and the SENSe RE
170. URce PULM STATe 288 SOURce PULSe PERiod 288 SOURce PULSe PERiod 289 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 289 SOURce PULSe WIDTh 289 STATus subsystem 291 293 302 STATus OPERation CONDition 293 STATus OPERation ENABle 294 STATus OPERation ENABle 294 STATus OPERation EVENt 295 STATus OPERation NTRansition 295 STATus OPERation NTRansition 296 STATus OPERation PTRansition 296 STATus OPERation PTRansition 297 STATus PRESet 297 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 298 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 299 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 299 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 299 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 300 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 301 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 301 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 302 SYSTem subsystem 303 SYSTem CTYPe 303 SYSTem ERRor 304 SYSTem VERSion 304 TRIGger subsystem 305 310 TRIGger COUNt 307 TRIGger COUNt 307 TRIGger IMMediate 308 TRIGger SOURce 308 TRIGger SOURce 309 TRIGger TIMer 309 TRIGger TIMer 310 Command sequences defined 23 Comment lines 136 Common Command Format 178 Common mode noise 374 Common mode rejection 330 Common mode voltage Maximum 330 Common mode voltage limits 373 Comparison operators 123 Compensating for system offsets 97 99 Compensation thermocouple reference temperature 63 Components adding terminal module 43 Compound statement 132 CONDition SENSe FUNC CONDition 267 SOURce FUNC SHAPe CONDition 286 STAT OPER COND
171. US EXT HOLD IMM SCP TIMer TTLTrg lt n gt Specify the source of instrument triggers SOURce Returns the current trigger source TIMer Sets the interval between scan triggers when TRIG SOUR is TIMer PERiod rig interval Sets the interval between scan triggers when TRIG SOUR is TIMer PERiod Returns setting of trigger timer Chapter 6 325 VT1419A Command Reference Command Quick Reference IEEE 488 2 Common Command Quick Reference Category Command Title Description Calibration CAL Calibrate Performs internal calibration on all 64 channels out to the terminal module connector Returns error codes or 0 for OK Internal Operation IDN Identification Returns the response AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES E1419B lt serial gt lt driver revit gt RST Reset Resets all scan lists to zero length and stops scan triggering Status registers and output queue are unchanged TST Self Test Performs self test Returns 0 to indicate test passed Status Reporting CLS Clear Status Clears all status event registers and so their status summary bits except the MAV bit ESE lt mask gt Event Status Enable Set Standard Event Status Enable register bits mask ESE Event Status Enable query Return current setting of Standard Event Status Enable register ESR Event Status Register query Return Standard Event Status Register contents SRE lt mask gt Service Request Enable Set Service Request Enable regist
172. Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 none num_trigs numeric int16 1 to 32 767 none Comments Specifying a value of 1 the default causes the named algorithm to be executed each time a trigger is received Specifying a value of n will cause the algorithm to be executed once every n triggers All enabled algorithms execute on the first trigger after INIT e The algorithm specified by lt alg name gt may or may not be currently defined The specified setting will be used when the algorithm is defined e Related Commands ALG UPDATE ALG SCAN RATIO e When Accepted Both before and after INIT Also accepted before and after the algorithm referenced is defined e RST Condition ALG SCAN RATIO 1 for all algorithms Usage ALG SCAN RATIO ALG4 16 ALGA executes once every 16 triggers ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio lt alg_name gt returns the number of triggers that must occur for each execution of lt alg_name gt Comments Since ALG SCAN RATIO is valid for an undefined algorithm ALG SCAN RATIO will return the current ratio setting for lt alg_name gt even if it is not currently defined e Returned Value numeric 1 to 32 768 The type is int16 ALGorithm EXPLicit SlZe ALGorithm EXPLicit SIZe alg name gt returns the number of words of memory allocated for algorithm lt alg_name gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Value
173. VIOSTLA 00 008 o tid Te A 00009 00 00t 0000 frr us Nut AA nr TAM ma E oe Ee hemmm b Appendix A 338 o Seg a AAO 29 61 140 VOOS LLA Ferrer ru uuna m AAO 39114 81 300 V8OSTLA 00008 80009 00 00b 00 00 RO A AAA Pa coc ooo e Pos 339 Appendix A 01x 0 Seg AJO 414 9X 1 100 VEOSLLA H O outa 8X CI 3340 VEOSLLA o tm RU a E AAO Ja 21 440 VZOSLEA de eee eee ee eer ee ere ee eer LO 4214 11 300 VIOSLEA 001 ar i AMARAS ne Es Rr a a p Pray fy ud F 4 rt POTTS Toa aai PEL corria EN ante e tro anas E 050 00 0 parra MF AY o 8eq 340 Appendix A 0i XD Fog 440 19141 pox gr ido V OSTIA o Ye ee de CHR H T Um x M am ama uh Mans de FAO INI 8X C1 190 V OS LEA BOE dr m Td al dO PUT Z1 1dO VZOSTLA ee eee UA AAA rr 440 fog G 1140 VIOSILA A mede O a H e E wr a 00 s kt OS s F 009 eee 009 I oo o Seg 341 Appendix A 01x 0 Ba 440 220 61 190 V6OSLLA AMARAL ERRAR TALS DRA PAN rey rt Terres rr eer re AAO 291114 81 dO V8OSLLA el 090 a IX O EO 090 OF 0 pt A a
174. VOLTage lt ref volts gt sends the value of the calibration reference source voltage as measured by an external calibration DVM to the module for A D calibration Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ref volts numeric float32 must be within 4 of range nominal volts Comments Use the CAL CONF VOLT command to configure the on board voltage source for measurement at the Calibration Bus connector e A measurement of the source voltage is made with an external multimeter connected to the H Cal and L Cal terminals on the Terminal Module or the V H and V L terminals on the Cal Bus connector e The value sent must be for the currently configured range and output zero or full scale as set by the previous CAL CONF VOLT lt range gt ZERO FSCale command Chapter 6 215 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration e The lt ref volts gt parameter must be within 4 of the actual reference voltage value as read after CAL CONF VOLT or an error 3042 0x400 DSP DAC adjustment went to limit will be generated e The lt ref volts gt parameter may be specified in millivolts mv e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands CAL CONF VOLT CAL STORE ADC Command CAL CONF VOLTAGE 4 FSCALE Sequence OPC Wait for operation to complete enter statement now measure voltage with external DMM CAL VAL VOLT lt measured value gt Send measured value
175. VT1419A Multifunction Measurement and Control Module User s Manual APPLICABILITY This manual edition is intended for use with the following instrument drivers e Downloaded driver revision A 01 02 or later for Command Modules e C SCPI driver revision D 01 02 or later Call your local VXI Technology Sales Office for information on other drivers mM VXI 7 Technology Copyright O VXI Technology Inc 2005 P N 82 0075 000 Printed February 23 2011 Printed in U S A Certification VXI Technology Inc certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory VXI Technology further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This VXI Technology product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into becomes a part of other VXI Technology products During the warranty period VXI Technology will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be
176. VT1419As CAL SET start SCP Calibration on last VTI419A CAL SET query for results from Ist VT1419A query for results from more VT1419As CAL SET query for results from last VT1419A CALibration SETup CALibration SETup Returns a value to indicate the success of the last CAL SETup or CAL operation CAL SETup returns the value only after the CAL SETup operation is complete Comments Returned Value Value Meaning Further Action 0 Cal OK None 1 Cal Error Query the Error Queue SYST ERR See Error Messages in Appendix B 2 No results available No CAL or CAL SETUP done The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 e Related Commands CAL SETup CAL Usage see CAL SETup 210 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration CALibration STORe NOTE Parameters Comments Usage Command Sequence CALibration STORe lt type gt stores the most recently measured calibration constants into flash memory Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory When lt type gt ADC the module stores its A D calibration constants as well as constants generated from CAL CAL SETup into flash memory When type TARE the module stores the most recently measured CAL TARE channel offsets into flash memory The VT1419 s flash memory has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand write cycles unlimited read cycles While executing CAL STOR once every day would not
177. a 223 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe o oooooooooocooror I 223 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe oooooococococoocorrr III 224 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe o oooooocooooocooco en 224 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe liess ene 225 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD 0 cece hh 225 DIAGnostic VERSION 1 enero 226 FETCH ssa pa end Ged cate beet ned baud era had buted brc SO ees 227 USAS a e iene at bene ag fed ca b toe fd a cecum RR ed 229 FORMat DATA Tina td id E 229 FORMatisDA TA ida 230 Nitrato 232 INITiate IMMediate 0 0 ne 232 yu CP 233 INPyt DEBounce TIME roce nicer ee ERR Rte ad qu dar s 233 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency seesseeeeeee RII 234 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency su e nia ea ina aia a a III 235 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe eee 236 INPutsFIL TerEEPASS BS EATe uiae orem ma Ceo och Roe horn 236 TINPUEGAIN oia 237 DNPUt CUNTN ant cash tesa estate cdo Rara dada xe e 237 INPUtEONW opem dauerte A ep d 238 NPU VOW Essex a a Ete tetuer a a EE 238 INPut POL tity 41e cr a Dee kta e ede ica 239 ENP t POEHby 2 sos ooo tl PS aad ans 239 INPut THReshold EEVel 5 esp da pex Lebe RO da es Ane det edet d 239 Nunc a osa diia 241 MEMory VME ADDRess lesse E E E EEE EE 242 MEMory VME ADDRESS adiciona ai a x 242 MEMory VME SIZE exo a bs 242 MEMory VME SIZE vase e RR apa co regan que 243 MEMory VME STAT6G ico emeret mete een eene e Dre Rm nad reed 243 MEMoty VME STATE i uot
178. a ERES ea PES TRE 263 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE 000s cece eect E ERa I ES EEEE 264 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE 00 000 ee 264 SENSe DATA FIFO PART 0 0 0 ccc iem o ehh 265 SENSe DATA FIFO RESet 0 0c ccc cece eee ne tere hehe 265 SENSe FREQuency APERfure o oooooocorococncrcaror ence hn 266 SENSe FREQuency APERture 0 cesses cee tee hh m hn 267 SENSe JFUNCtion CONDition 0 een 267 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom 0 0 n 268 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence 00 0c cece een eens 269 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple 00 0 ce eect eee 270 SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency 0 0 c cece eect ene eet Enri 271 SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lille 271 SENSe JFUNCtion STRain FBENding 0o oooococcocr eese 272 SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lsssesesleeee e 274 SENSe FUNGChon TOTalize 5 2 mere ere di ae 275 SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC ooooocococcoccoc IIR 276 SENSe RBPetence ss suando ba edad RA lh Oe aoa wees Beg EE OE A a OP oe RS 277 SENSe REFerence CHANnels crrcrcrersesicecis dii a Kinna E niee EE i 278 SENSe REFerence TEMPerature es eenn o e 279 SENSe STRain EXCitation cette teens 279 SENSe S TRain EX Citation aes eee toe y terree dest be aa GE 280 SENSe STRain GFACtor i es e 0 cece ence te eee e eee neneeees 280 SENSe STRam GRACt0r eode Er di eee Seow 280 SENSe STRain POISson 0 02 eee nee teen hh 281
179. a page 225 DIAGnostic VERSION papas owe RO Y 6E RR d WE EG x Rp oh OR E P page 226 BETCh e e a ue Oudend sv NN page 227 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt size gt s page 229 FORMAIIDATA ss grs ra Se ea 309 9 9 0 OX uy C woo Be o ov RE s page 230 INITiate IMMediate ss rs sas Rear ed a DS e PUR ON page 232 INPut DEBounce TIME lt time gt O lt ch list 22s page 233 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency cutoff freg gt D lt ch list ee page 234 INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt channel gt 0 aaa a page 235 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe 1 0 ON OFF lt ch_list gt eene page 236 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe lt channel gt 2e page 236 INPut GAIN chan gain gt d lt ch list 2 ee page 237 INPut GAIN lt channel gt onnaa ee page 237 INPut LOW lt wvolt type ch list ns page 238 INPut LOW lt channel gt cocos RU Reg X om des dox bo sop X REA Y gi page 238 INPut POLarity NORMal INverted DECh_liSt gt ooo page 239 INPut POLarity lt channel gt eh rs page 239 INPut THReshold LEVel lt channel gt oo page 239 MEMory VME ADDRess lt 424 address gt o page 242 MEMoty VME ADDRESS 44 v vas a v RA E E page 242 MEMory VME SIZE Smem SIZE oi da EUR E E RR A TR page 242 MEMory VME SIZE ies cias 39399 a GEE EA ESE E EE page 243 MEMory VME STATe1 0 ON OFF ehh page 243 174 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Referen
180. abled after its occurrence Please note in Algorithm that an interrupt is only allowed to occur once when passing through 30 C After which the card DOES NOT interrupt again until the temperature falls below 29 C and again passes through 30 C This is done to illustrate the concept of hysteresis applied to interrupts If the VT1419A were allowed to interrupt Agilent VEE constantly while above 30 C the external computer would be bombarded with interrupts which would lower the overall performance This technique achieves the needed signal to Agilent VEE but adds the hysteresis to avoid constant interrupts CVT location 12 is used to reflect the state of the digital output channel used to respond to the over temperature condition That condition is reflected back to Agilent VEE as an LED Other interesting features include reading and writing of variables Algorithm 2 takes the global variable card_running and complements it each time it executes It then writes that value to CVT location 11 Algorithms 2 has been configured by the ALG SCAN RATIO command to execute every 500 triggers as set in the Algorithms object Since the trigger timer is set to 2 milliseconds Setup Trigger Subsystem Algorithm 2 executes once every second and thereby causes the card_running LED to blink at second intervals This is a good sanity check for the Agilent VEE program to know that the VT1419A is running If it had stopped for some reason the LED w
181. access individual bit values append Bn to the normal channel syntax where n is the bit number 0 through 7 If the Digital I O SCP has single bit channels like the VT1534A its channel identifiers can only take on the values 0 and 1 Examples 0148 1 assign value to output chan 0 on VT15344A Inp_val 1160 from 8 bit channel on VT1533A Inp_val will be 0 to 255 Bit 4 1156 B4 assign VTIS533A chan 56 bit 4 to variable Bit 4 Output Channels Output channels can appear on either or both sides of an assignment operator They can appear anywhere other variables can appear Examples 0132 12 5 send value to output channel buffer element 0 compliment value found in output channel buffer element 56 bit 4 each time algorithm is executed O156 B4 O156 B4 writecvt O132 32 send value of output channel 132 to CVT element 32 Input Channels Input channel identifiers can only appear on the right side of assignment operators It doesn t make sense to output values to an input channel Other than that they can appear anywhere other variables can appear Examples dig bit value 1157 B0 retrieve value from Input Channel Buffer element 57 bit 0 retrieve value from Input Channel Buffer element 24 retrieve value from Input Channel Buffer element 24 multiply by 4 and send result to Output Channel Buffer element 32 send value of input channel 24 to FIFO buffer inp value 1124 0132 4
182. adequate 373 Group an example using the operation 91 Guard connections 373 H HALF SENS DATA FIFO COUNt HALF 263 SENS DATA FIFO HALF 263 HINTS for quiet measurements 36 Read chapter 3 before chapter 4 105 How to use CAL 71 Identifiers 122 IEEE INF 230 IMMediate ALGorithm UPDate IMMediate 199 ARM IMMediate 205 INIT IMM 232 TRIG IMMediate 308 Impedance input 330 Implied Commands 179 IMPORTANT Don t use CAL TARE for thermocouple wiring 98 IMPORTANT Do use CAL TARE for copper TC wiring 98 INF IEEE 230 386 Index INIT after 52 before 52 INIT IMM 232 Init declarator 131 Init declarator list 131 Initialization declaration 127 Initializing variables 112 INITiate subsystem 232 INITiating Running algorithms 80 INP FILT FREQ 235 INP FILT LPAS STAT 236 INP FILT LPAS STAT 236 INP GAIN 237 Input channels 110 Input impedance 330 Input protect feature disabling 21 INPut subsystem 233 240 Input voltage maximum 330 INPut DEB TIME 233 INPut FILT FREQ 234 INPut GAIN 237 INPut LOW 238 INPut LOW 238 INPut POLarity 239 INPut POLarity 239 INPut THReshold LEVel 239 Inputs setting up digital 66 Installing signal conditioning plug ons 16 Instrument drivers 23 Integer evaluation of type float 127 Integer values from type float 127 Interrupt function 113 Interrupt level setting NOTE 15 interrupt 113 124 Interrupts updating the sta
183. age return IEEE INF see table on page 230 for actual values for each data format e Related Commands DATA FIFO COUNT e RST Condition FIFO buffer empty Usage DATA FIFO PART 256 return 256 values from FIFO SENSe DATA FIFO RESet SENSe DATA FIFO RESet clears the FIFO of values The FIFO counter is reset to 0 Chapter 6 265 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe Comments When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands SENSE DATA FIFO e RST Condition SENSE DATA FIFO RESET Usage SENSE DATA FIFO RESET Clear the FIFO SENSe FREQuency APERture SENSe FREQuency APERture gate time gt lt ch list sets the gate time for frequency measurement The gate time is the time period that the SCP will allow for counting signal transitions in order to calculate frequency Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units gate time numeric float32 0 001 to 1 0 001 resolution seconds ch list string 132 163 none Comments If the channels specified are on an SCP that doesn t support this function an error will be generated See the SCP s User s Manual for its capabilities e Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency e RST Condition 0 001 seconds Usage SENS FREQ APER 01 148 set channel 48 aperture to 10 ms 266 Chapter 6 SENSe FREQuency APERture SENSe FUNCtion CONDition Parameters VT1419A Command Reference SEN
184. age will be generated CAUTION When ALG STATE OFF disables an algorithm outputs are left at the last value set by the algorithm Depending on the process this uncontrolled situation could be dangerous Make certain that the process is in a safe state before halting the execution of a controlling algorithm The Agilent HP E1535 Watchdog Timer SCP was specifically developed to automatically signal that an algorithm has stopped controlling a process Use of the Watchdog Timer is recommended for critical processes Chapter 6 195 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 none enable boolean uint16 0 1 ON OFF none Comments The algorithm specified by lt alg name gt may or may not be currently defined The setting specified will be used when the algorithm is defined e RST Condition ALG STATE ON e When Accepted Both before and after INIT Also accepted before and after the algorithm referenced is defined e Related Commands ALG UPDATE ALG STATE ALG DEFINE Usage ALG STATE ALG2 0FF disable ALG2 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe lt alg name gt returns the state enabled or disabled of algorithm lt alg name gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 none Comments
185. ame gt lt array_block gt places values of lt array_name gt for algorithm lt alg_name gt into the Update Queue This update is then pending until ALG UPD is sent or an update event as set by ALG UPD CHANNEL occurs ALG ARRAY places a variable update request in the Update Queue Do not place more update requests in the Update Queue than are allowed by the current setting of ALG UPD WINDOW or a Too many updates send ALG UPDATE command error message will be generated Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 GLOBALS none array_name string valid C variable name none array_block block data block of IEEE 754 64 bit floating point none numbers Comments To send values to a Global array set the lt alg_name gt parameter to GLOBALS Usage To define a global array see the ALGorithm DEFine command An error is generated if lt alg name gt or lt array name gt is not defined e When an array is defined in an algorithm or in GLOBALS the VT1419A allocates twice the memory required to store the array When the ALG ARRAY command is sent the new values for the array are loaded into the second space for this array When the ALG UPDATE or ALG UPDATE CHANNEL commands are sent the VT1419A switches a pointer to the space containing the new array values This is how even large arrays can be updated as if they were a s
186. amming language specific to the VT1419A This programming language is a subset of the ANSI C language The program that runs in the VXIbus controller either embedded within the VXIbus mainframe or external and interfaced to the mainframe The application program typically sends SCPI commands to configure the VT1419A define its algorithms then start the algorithms running Typically once the VT1419A is running algorithms the application need only oversee the control application by monitoring the algorithms status During algorithm writing debugging and tuning the application program can retrieve comprehensive data from running algorithms In this manual a buffer is an area in RAM memory that is allocated to temporarily hold Data input values that an algorithm will later access This 1s the Input Channel Buffer Data output values from an algorithm until these values are sent to hardware output channels This is the Output Channel Buffer Data output values from an algorithm until these values are read by the application program This is the First In First Out or FIFO buffer A second copy of an array variable containing updated values until it is activated by an update This is double buffering A second version of a running algorithm until it is activated by an update This is only for algorithms that are enabled for swapping This is also double buffering The Digital Signal Processo
187. ample of defining an algorithm for swapping define ALG3 so it can be swapped with an algorithm as large as 1000 words ALG DEF ALG3 1000 41698 lt 1698char_alg_source gt The number of characters bytes in an algorithm s lt source_code gt parameter is not well related to the amount of memory space the algorithm requires Remember this parameter contains the algorithm s source code not the executable code it will be translated into by the ALG DEF command An algorithm s source might contain extensive comments none of which will be in the executable algorithm code after it is translated The example algorithm definition above will be used for this discussion When a value is specified for lt swap_size gt at algorithm definition the VT1419A allocates two identical algorithm spaces for ALG3 each the size specified by lt swap_size gt in this example 1000 words This is called a double buffer In this example they will be referred to as space A and space B The algorithm is loaded into ALG3 s space A at first definition Later while algorithms are running ALG3 can be replaced again by executing ALG DEF ALG3 42435 lt 2435char_alg_source gt Notice that lt swap_size gt is not must not be included this time This ALG DEF works like an Update Request The VT1419A translates and downloads the new algorithm into ALG3 s space B while the old ALG3 is still running from space A When the new algorithm has been
188. and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained Note for European Customers Ifthis symbol appears on your product it indicates that it was manufactured after August 13 2005 This mark is placed in accordance with EN 50419 Marking of electrical and electronic equipment in accordance with Article 11 2 of directive 2002 96 EC WEEE End of life product can be returned to VTI by obtaining an RMA number Fees for recycling will apply if not prohibited by national law SCP cards for use mm with the VT1415A have this mark placed on their packaging due to the densely populated nature of these cards Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name VXI Technology Inc Manufacturer s Address 2031 Main Street Irvine CA 92614 6509 declares that the product Product Name Multifunction Measurement and Control Module Model Number VT1419A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 Incl Amend 1 1992 EN61010 1 1993 CSA C22 2 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 801 2 1991 EN50082 1 1992 4kV CD 8kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 EN50082 1 1992 3V m IEC 801 4 1988 EN50082 1 1992 1kV Power Line 0 5kV Signal Lines Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the E
189. ange Ifa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 causes an error Specifying O selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified 1s auto range e f using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 lt range gt must be set no lower than 1 V dc or an input out of range condition will exist Chapter 6 277 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE Usage e The lt type gt parameter specifies the sensor type that will be used to determine the temperature of the isothermal reference panel lt type gt CUSTom is pre defined as Type E with 0 C reference junction temp and is not re defineable e For lt type gt THERmistor the lt sub_type gt parameter may be specified in ohms or kohm e The CAL command calibrates resistance channels based on Current Source SCP and Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again e Related Commands SENSE FUNC TEMP e RST Condition Reference temperature is 0 C sense the reference temperature on channel
190. anguage writecvt 112 writefifo 113 Statement 132 Statement list 132 Statements and functions intrinsic abs expression 124 interrupt 113 124 max expressionl expression2 124 min expressionl expression2 124 writeboth expression cvt element 124 writecvt expression cvt element 124 writefifo expression 113 124 Statements 124 Static discharge safe handling CAUTION 16 Static state CONDition function 67 69 STATus subsystem 291 293 302 Storage defining data 75 76 STORe CAL STORe 211 STRain SENS FUNC STRain 272 Structure overall program 137 Structures data 126 Sub subsystem 218 231 241 244 Subsystem ABORT 185 ARM 204 206 CALibration 207 217 DIAGnostic 218 226 FETCh 227 228 FORMat 229 231 INITiate 232 INPut 233 240 MEMory 241 244 OUTPut 245 253 ROUTE 254 255 SAMPle 256 257 SENSe 258 284 SOURce 285 287 290 STATus 291 293 302 SYSTem 303 TRIGger 305 310 Summary 97 Summary language syntax 129 132 Supplying the reference temperature 64 support 13 support resources 13 Swapping defining an algorithm for 118 Switch setting the logical address 15 Symbols the operations 134 Syntax Variable Command 179 SYST CTYPe 303 SYST ERRor 304 SYST VERSion 304 SYSTem subsystem 303 System wiring offsets 97 System setting up the trigger 77 79 System using the status 88 93 T Tables creating conversion 97 Ta
191. anufacture and intended use of the product VXI Technology assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground the equipment For Safety Class 1 equipment equipment having a protective earth terminal an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse s only with fuse s of the same voltage and current rating and type DO NOT use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service trained personnel only Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off To avoid dangerous electrical shock DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so DO NOT operate damaged equipment Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been impaired either through physical damage excessive moisture or any other reason REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operation can be verified by service trained personnel If necessary return the product to a VXI Technology Sales
192. are VERY close the cardinal points good values will result Strictly speaking perfect results will be received only when calculated at the cardinal points which may be reasonable for an application if the input values are limited to exactly those 128 points The waveform may also be shifted anywhere along the X axis and Build table will provide the necessary offset calculations to generate the proper table Be aware too that shifting the table out to greater magnitudes of X may also impact the precision of the results depending upon the linearity of the waveform Suffice it to say the best results will be produced and it will be easiest to comprehend what is being done if the waveform stays near the X 0 point since most of the measurement results will have 1e 6 16 values for volts One final note Truncation errors may be seen in the fourth digit of the results This is because only 15 bits of the input value is sent to the function This occurs because the same technique used for Custom EU conversion is used here and the method assumes input values are from the 16 bit A D 15 bits sign bit This is evident in Table 1 where the first and last entries return 40 9999 rather than 1 For most applications this accuracy should be more than adequate 380 Appendix E First loop determining first execution 111 FM fixed width pulses at variable frequency 70 FM variable frequency square wave output 70 Important
193. at32 see first comment V dc ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The range parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V de 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value Chapter 6 271 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE Usage for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range Ifa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 causes an error Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified is auto range If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if the expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 lt range gt must be set no lower than 1 V de or an input out of range condition will exist Resistance measurements require the use of Current Source Signal Conditioning Plug Ons The lt excite_current gt parameter excitation current does not control the current applied to the channel to be measured The lt excite_current gt parameter only passes the setting of the SCP supplying current to channel to be measured The current must have already been set using the OUTPUT CURRENT AMPL
194. ata types 125 Data retrieving algorithm 81 84 DATA FIFO ALL 261 Decimal constant 129 Declaration initialization 127 Declaration 132 Declarations 132 Declarator 131 Declaring variables 133 Defaults power on and RST 53 DEFine ALGorithm EXPLicit 188 ALGorithm FUNCtion DEFine 197 ROUT SEQ DEF 254 Defined input and output channels 111 Defining algorithms 116 119 Defining an algorithm for swapping 118 Defining and accessing global variables 111 Defining C language algorithms 73 74 Defining data storage 75 76 DELay ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 198 DELay ALGorithm OUTPut DELay 199 Detecting open transducers 100 Determining an algorithm s size 119 Determining first execution First_loop 111 Determining model SCPI programming 313 DIAG CHECK 221 DIAG CUST REF TEMP 222 DIAG INT LINe 223 DIAG INT LINe 224 DIAG OTD STATe 224 DIAG OTD STATe 225 DIAG VERSion 226 DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 219 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 219 DIAGnostic CALibration TARe MODE 220 DIAGnostic CALibration TARe MODE 220 DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear 221 DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise 222 DIAGnostic IEEE 223 DIAGnostic IEEE 223 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD 225 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 219 DIAGnostic CALibration SETup MODE 219 DIAGnostic CALibration TARe MODE 220 DIAGnostic CALibration TARe MODE 220 DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear 221 DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewi
195. ate is enabled then the PULM state is disabled If the PULM state is enabled then the FM state is disabled If both the FM and the PULM states are disabled then the PULSe channel is in the single pulse mode Chapter 6 287 VT1419A Command Reference SOURce e Ifthe channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e RST Condition SOUR PULM STATE OFF SOURce PULM STATe SOURce PULM STATe lt channel gt returns the pulse width modulated mode state for the PULSe channel in lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Returned Value returns ON or OFF The type is string SOURce PULSe PERiod SOURce PULSe PERiod lt period gt lt ch_list gt sets the fixed pulse period value on a pulse width modulated pulse channel This sets the frequency 1 period of the pulse width modulated pulse train Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units period numeric float32 25E 6 to 7 8125E 3 seconds resolution 0 238 us ch_list string 132 163 none Comments If the channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e RST Condition SOUR FM STATE OFF and SOUR PULM STATE OFF e Related Commands SOUR PULM STATE
196. atements The list of reserved keywords is the same as ANSI C Variables cannot be created using these names Note that the keywords that are shown underlined and bold are the only ANSI C keywords that are implemented in the VT1419A auto double int struc break else long switch case enum register typeof char extern return union const _float short unsigned continue for signed void default goto sizeof volatile do if static while While all of the ANSI C keywords are reserved only those keywords that are shown in bold are actually implemented in the VT1419A The VT1419A implements some additional reserved keywords Variables cannot be created using these names abs interrupt writeboth Bn n 0 through 9 max writecvt Bnn nn 10 through 15 min writefifo Identifiers variable names are significant to 31 characters They can include alpha numeric and the underscore character Names must begin with an alpha character or the underscore character Alpha abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Numeric 0123456789 Other _ 122 Chapter 4 NOTE Special Identifiers for Channels NOTE Operators Assignment Operator Arithmetic Operators Unary Operators Comparison Operators Logical Operators Unary Logical Operator The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference Identifiers are case sensitive The names My array and my array reference different iden
197. ating User Defined Functions 0 cece cece cree e eee eeee 377 Intr d ctioB sema ni ie Ode edb Ru ore etree a ob edi er pee don Aw eee E 377 Haversinie Example a ia E a Ward Sea Beane 378 Limitations a A ad Gba soe 380 Md EP 381 Contents Support Resources Support resources for this product are available on the Internet and at VXI Technology customer support centers VXI Technology World Headquarters VXI Technology Inc 2031 Main Street Irvine CA 92614 6509 Phone 949 955 1894 Fax 949 955 3041 VXI Technology Cleveland Instrument Division VXI Technology Inc 7525 Granger Road Unit 7 Valley View OH 44125 Phone 216 447 8950 Fax 216 447 8951 VXI Technology Lake Stevens Instrument Division VXI Technology Inc 1924 203 Bickford Snohomish WA 98290 Phone 425 212 2285 Fax 425 212 2289 Technical Support Phone 949 955 1894 Fax 949 955 3041 E mail support vxitech com Visit http www vxitech com for worldwide support sites and service plan information Support 13 Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started About This Chapter This chapter will explain hardware configuration before installation in a VXIbus mainframe By attending to each of these configuration items the VT1419A won t have to be removed from its mainframe later Chapter contents include e Configuring the VTI419A 2 0 eee eee page 15 e Instrument Drivers 0
198. ation constant for those channels Future measurements made with these channels will be compensated by the amount of the tare value Use CAL TARE to compensate for voltage offsets in system wiring and residual sensor offsets Where tare values need to be retained for long periods they can be stored in the module s flash memory Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory by executing the CAL STORe TARE command For more information see Compensating for System Offsets on page 97 Note for e Do not use CAL TARE on field wiring that is made up of thermocouple wire The Thermocouples voltage a thermocouple wire pair generates can not be removed by introducing a short anywhere between its junction and its connection to an isothermal panel either the VT1419A s Terminal Module or a remote isothermal reference block Thermal voltage is generated along the entire length of a thermocouple pair where there is any temperature gradient along that length To CAL TARE thermocouple wire this way would introduce an unwanted offset in the voltage temperature relationship for that channel If a thermocouple wire pair is inadvertently CAL TARE d use CAL TARE RESET to reset all tare constants to zero e Do use CAL TARE to compensate wiring offsets copper wire not thermocouple wire between the VT1419A and a remote thermocouple reference block Disconnect the thermocouples and introduce copper shorting wires between each channel s HI and LO then exe
199. ax STATus OPERation CONDition ENABle lt enable_mask gt ENABle EVENt NTRansition transition mask NTRansition PTRansition transition mask gt PTRansition PRESet QUEStionable CONDition ENABle enable mask ENABle EVENt NTRansition transition mask gt NTRansition PTRansition lt transition mask gt PTRansition The Status system contains four status groups Operation Status Group Questionable Data Group e Standard Event Group e Status Byte Group This SCPI STATus subsystem communicates with the first two groups while IEEE 488 2 Common Commands documented later in this chapter communicate with Standard Event and Status Byte Groups 292 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference STATus Weighted Bit Register queries are returned using decimal weighted bit values Enable registers Values can be set using decimal hex octal or binary The following table can be used to help set Enable registers using decimal and decode register queries Status System Decimal Weighted Bit Values bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 value always 0 16 384 8 192 4 096 2 048 1 024 512 256 128 64 32 The Operation Status Group The Operation Status Group indicates the current operating state of the VT1419A The bit assignments are Bit dec value hex value Bit Name Desc
200. ble my var in ALGI 5 4321 to variable another also in ALGI 1 001 to global variable update variables from update queue Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 none var name string valid C variable name none Comments An error is generated if alg name or var name is not defined e Returned Value numeric value The type is float32 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN RATio lt alg_name gt lt num_trigs gt specifies the number of scan triggers that must occur for each execution of algorithm alg name This allows the specified algorithm to be executed less often than other algorithms This can be useful for algorithm tuning NOTES 1 The command ALG SCAN RATio alg name gt lt num trigs gt does not take effect until an ALG UPDATE or ALG UPD CHAN command is received This allows multiple ALG SCAN RATIO commands to be sent with a synchronized affect when the ALG UPDATE command is used 2 ALG SCAN RATio places a variable update request in the Update Queue Do not place more update requests in the Update Queue than are allowed by the current setting of ALG UPD WINDOW or a Too many updates send ALG UPDATE command error message will be generated Chapter 6 193 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values
201. ble values and or buffer pointer values for arrays and swapping algorithms that is built in response to updates see Update When an update command is sent scalar values and pointer values are sent to their working locations A function callable from the Algorithm Language in the general form function name expression These user defined functions provide advanced mathematical capability to the Algorithm Language Appendix C 369 Notes 370 Appendix C Appendix D Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Separating Digital and Analog SCP Signals Signals with very fast rise time can cause interference with nearby signal paths This is called cross talk Digital signals present this fast rise time situation Digital I O signal lines that are very close to analog input signal lines can inject noise into them To minimize cross talk try to maximize the distance between analog input and digital 1 O signal lines Figure D 1 shows that by installing analog input SCPs in positions O through 3 and analog output and digital 1 O SCPs in positions 4 through 7 these types of signals can be separated by the width of the VT1419A module The signals are further isolated because they remain separated on the connector module as well Note that in Figure D 1 even though only 7 of the eight SCP positions are filled the SCPs present are not installed contiguously but are arranged to provide this digital analog separation I
202. bles custom EU 96 TARE CAL TARE RESet 214 CAL TARE 214 Tare cal offset maximum 330 TARE CAL TARE 212 TCouple SENS FUNC CUST TC 270 technical support 13 Techniques Wiring and noise reduction 372 TEMPerature DIAG CUST REF TEMP 222 SENS FUNC TEMPerature 274 SENS REF TEMPerature 279 Temperature accuracy 331 Temperature measuring the reference 63 Temperature supplying the reference 64 Terminal block considerations for TC measurements 35 392 Index Terminal Blocks 368 Terminal Module 368 Attaching and removing the VT1419A 41 42 Attaching the VT1419A 41 42 Removing the VT1419A 41 42 Wiring and attaching the 39 40 Terminal Module Layout 32 Terminal module wiring maps 44 45 Terminal modules 30 32 The algorithm execution environment 108 The arithmetic operators 134 The comparison operators 134 The logical operators 134 The main function 108 The operating sequence 81 The operations symbols 134 The static modifier 125 The status byte group s enable register 93 Thermistor and RTD measurements 61 Thermocouple measurements 62 Thermocouple reference temperature compensation 63 Thermocouples and CAL TARE 98 TIME INPut DEB TIME 233 Time relationship of readings in FIFO 113 TIMe ALGorithm EXPLicit TIMe 196 Timer SAMP TIMer 256 SAMP TIMer 256 TIMer TRIG COUNt 307 TRIG TIMer 309 Timer programming the trigger 79 TIMer TRIG TIMer 310 TOTalize SENSe FUNCtion TOTali
203. bundle tempin to use this module Y Figure 5 8 Custom EU Conversion Detail View 154 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Engineering Unit Conversion Figure 5 8 illustrates where this module would be integrated into a VEE application program This is a part of the Link Engineering Units setup that was learned in Chapter 3 Simply select the channel the maximum voltage expect to be seen on that channel Max Volts represents voltage and enter any formula using the available Agilent VEE math functions It s that simple The only restriction is that the variable V must be used representing the voltage read from the channel When the selected channel is read by the VT1419A s A D that voltage will be inserted into the formula just as represented in the example Appendix E discusses custom function table generation which is based upon the same principle as EU table conversion EU conversion executes within a few microseconds so there is no problem with running the VT1419A sample rate at 100 kHz 10 ws per sample The CustomEUDeclarationsArray can hold up to 64 channel definitions Any valid channel number 100 163 for an Analog Input Channel will cause the associated table to be built and downloaded into the VT1419A s EU table memory space Leaving the field Channel at 0 will cause that channel to be ignored by this module Any RST or power ON condition will require re execution of thi
204. calibrate A D offset and gain and all channel offsets This may take many minutes to complete The actual time required to complete CAL depends on the mix of SCPs installed CAL performs hundreds of measurements of the internal calibration sources for each channel and must allow 17 time constants of settling wait each time a filtered channel s calibration source changes value The CAL procedure is internally very sophisticated and results in an extremely well calibrated module When CAL finishes 1t returns a 0 value to indicate success The generated calibration constants are now in volatile memory as they always are when ready to use If the configuration calibrated is to be fairly long term execute the CAL STORE ADC command to store these constants in non volatile memory This way the module can restore calibration constants for this configuration should a power failure occur After power returns and after the module warms up these constants will be relatively accurate Chapter 3 71 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Performing Channel Calibration Important When to Execute CAL Notes 6 After a 1 hr warm up from the time the mainframe is turned on if it has been off for more than a few minutes When the channel gain and or filter cut off frequency is changed on programmable SCPs using INPut GAIN or INPut FILTer When output current amplitude is changed on the VT1505A or VT1518A SCPs When SCPs are
205. cation program to provide an object that can query every error stored in the VT1419A s error queue It s a good debugging A a See S Ea UU page 152 Configuration Display scp_1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is designed to be merged into an application program to provide a means of displaying the driver and firmware revisions and identify which SCP s are loaded into the 8 SCP slots o ooo oooooooo page 153 140 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Engineering Unit Conversion eu_1419 vee This program is designed to be merged into an application program It provides all the necessary objects to permit custom EU conversion on any of the VT1419A s 64 analog input channels The program eufn1419 vee demonstrates how to use this module Custom Function Generation fn_1419 vee This program is designed to be merged into an application program It provides all the necessary objects to build up to 32 custom functions callable from VT1419A algorithms The program eufn1419 vee demonstrates how to use this module Custom EU and Custom Function eufn1419 vee This program operates stand alone It is designed to show how easy it is to generate complicated EU conversion and Custom C functions by simply entering channel numbers function names and algebraic expressions Need to convert volts to pressure or perform a square root operation Use this program to see how easy it
206. ce MEMory VME STATE pegada ia ar E AGE SOROR DA ERRA E TA page 244 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt DECh_liSt gt lle page 245 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude DEchamel gt 2e page 246 OUTPut CURRent STATe 1 0 ON OFF Q ch list o page 247 OUTPut CURRent STATe lt channel gt ooo page 247 OUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted DECh_list gt 2 ee page 248 OUTPut POLarity lt channel gt 0 p agadi Ea g e g a A oaa page 248 OUTPut SHUNt 1 0 D lt ch_list gt 22h page 248 OUTPut SHUNt O lt channel 4 uu pape EEE ONE FOROR A ES page 249 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce ALGorithm FTRigger SCPlugon TRIGger page 249 OUTPut LPLITg SOURCe a oe bee ee Gee 9 969 Dee E A awe ee page 250 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 1 0 ON OFF ee page 250 QUTPut TTL Ire lt neEsiAve s 22 dA ee eb oo ee ae aed aoe eee page 251 OUTPut TYPE PASSive ACTive lt ch_lis gt s page 251 OUTPut TYPE lt channel gt i rs page 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt ooo page 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt channel gt 1 a page 252 ROUTe SEQuence DEFine AIN AOUT DIN DOUT 00 4 page 254 ROUTe SEQuence POINts AIN AOUT DIN DOUT en page 255 SAMPle TlMer lt interval gt seaca aaao e ienaa ee page 256 SAMPle TIME dcs ES na exo Poo e 9 da e a Ra DS page 256 SENSe CHANnel SETTling
207. ch_list gt This command does not control the output voltage of any source Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units excite_v numeric flt32 0 01 99 volts ch_list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The ch list parameter must specify the channel used to sense the bridge voltage not the channel position on a Bridge Completion SCP e Related Commands SENSE STRAIN SENSE FUNC STRAIN e RST Condition 3 9 V Chapter 6 219 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe Usage STRAIN EXC 4 100 107 set excitation voltage for channels O through 7 SENSe STRain EXCitation SENSe STRain EXCitation lt channel gt returns the excitation voltage value currently set for the sense channel specified by lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments Returned Value Numeric value of excitation voltage The C SCPI type is flt32 e The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only e Related Commands STRAIN EXCitation Usage STRAIN EXC 107 query excitation voltage for channel 7 enter statement here returns the excitation voltage set by STR EXC SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe STRain GFACtor lt gage_factor gt lt ch_list gt specifies the gage factor to be used to conver
208. channel gt POLarity NORMal INVerted lt ch_list gt POLarity lt channel gt THReshold LEVel lt channel gt INPut DEBounce TIME INPut DEBounce TIME lt time gt lt ch_list gt sets the debounce time on the specified digital input channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units time numeric float32 see comment Hz string MIN MAX ch list channel list string 132 163 none Comments e For a description of the debounce function see Debounce Function in the VT1536A SCP manual The VT1536A has two debounce timers One for the lower four channels and one for the upper four channels To set the debounce timers use the command INPut DEBounce TIME lt time gt lt ch_list gt Chapter 6 233 VT1419A Command Reference INPut e The lt time gt parameter can be one of 16 possible numeric values or MIN and MAX 0 150 us 300 us 600 us 1 2 ms 2 4 ms 4 8 ms 9 6 ms 19 2 ms 38 4 ms 76 6 ms 153 6 ms 307 2 ms 614 4 ms 1 2288 s 2 4576 s Sending 0 or MIN turns debounce off Sending MAX selects 2 458 seconds Ifa value is sent that is slightly greater than one of these values the next higher value or MAX is selected Values outside of the range 0 2 4576 will generate the error 222 Data out of range Since the VT1536A has two debounce timers one for each bank of 4 channels ch list must contain all four of
209. cification is cenn cenn colon separator the second channel must be greater than the first Example channels O through 15 100 115 By using commas to separate them individual and range specifications can be combined into a single channel list 0 5 6 through 32 and 45 100 105 106 132 145 Note that a channel list is always contained within and The Command Reference always shows the a and punctuation lt ch_list gt This parameter or data type is used to transfer a block of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a preamble which indicates either 1 the number of data bytes which follow definite length or 2 that the following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message and for GPIB operation with the EOI signal true indefinite length The syntax for this parameter is 180 Chapter 6 Linking Commands VT1419A Command Reference Definite Length lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt is 1 9 and represents the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Example of sending or receiving 1024 data bytes 4 1024 lt byte gt lt byte1 gt lt byte2 gt lt byte3 gt lt byte4 gt lt byte1021 gt lt byte1022 gt lt byte1023 gt lt byte1024 gt OR Indefinite Length 0 lt
210. ck gt A lt ch_list gt REFerence TEMPerature INTerrupt LINe intr line INTerrupt LINe OTDetect STATe ON OFF lt ch_list gt OTDetect STATe lt channel gt QUERy SCPREAD lt reg addr gt VERSion FETCh FORMat EDATA lt format gt lt size gt ASCii 7 PACKed 64 REALI 32 REAL 64 DATA INITiate INPut FILTer LPASs FREQuency cutoff freq gt lt ch_list gt FREQuency lt channel gt STATe ON OFF STATe lt channel gt GAIN lt chan_gain gt lt ch_list gt GAIN lt channel gt LOW lt wvolt_type gt lt ch_list gt SCPI Command Quick Reference Description Calibrate out system field wiring offsets Resets cal constants from CAL TARE back to zero for all channels Returns state of CAL TARE operation returns error codes or 0 for OK Send to instrument the value of just measured reference resistor Send to instrument the value of just measured voltage reference Correct A D for short term offset drift returns error codes or 0 for OK Set analog DAC output SCP calibration mode Return current setting of DAC calibration mode Set mode to control OTD current during tare calibration Return current setting of OTD control during tare calibration Perform checksum on Flash RAM and return a 1 for OK a 0 for corrupted or deleted memory contents Writes values to SCP registers Loads linear custom EU tab
211. code for this program and the DOS executable are included with the VT1419A examples The source code is provided so that the program can be compiled in other platforms where Agilent VEE is supported UNIX etc A command similar to cc Aa eu_141x c o unix eu Im would be issued which would compile the program under a typical UNIX environment Note that the name unix eu and pc eu have significant meaning to this module 0 in 0 63 Field name First Value Channel f 01 Maxvolts f 6 Formula fr 23445 Next Last Other SENSe FUNC Commands AA Further Setup Of E1419A Operations into your application program to define jineering Unit Conversion for any of the put channels Channel is a number from 100 cAdabundletempin le of that range no custom conversion 2 to that channel MaxVolts specifies the 1 expect on that channel Formula is the inversion equation you want to use for that ble Y represents the voltage read by the A D Text fusers me dabundle tempin xecution of this module in the same place rour other analog digital channels It ud her SENSe FUNCtion setup commands cAdabundlepc eu cAdabundlextempin er the contents of the Select PC UNIX operly locate temporary files and the xx eu that actually performs the table The program eufnl419 vee is a complete AA users me da
212. command to the driver s translator function and doesn t create an executable statement The value assigned during algorithm definition is not re assigned when the algorithm is run with the INIT command Example statement static float my_variable 22 95 tells translator to allocate space for this variable and initialize it to 22 95 2 Each time the algorithm executes By placing an assignment statement within the algorithm This will be executed each time the algorithm is executed Example statement my_variable 22 95 reset variable to 22 95 every pass i 3 When the algorithm first executes after an INIT command By using the global variable First_loop the algorithm can distinguish the first execution since an INIT command was sent Example statement if First_loop my_variable 22 95 reset variable only when INIT starts alg The Current Value Table CVT and FIFO data buffer provide communication from an algorithm to the application program running in the VXIbus controller Writing a CVT element The CVT provides 502 addressable elements where algorithm values can be stored To send a value to a CVT element execute the intrinsic Algorithm Language statement writecvt lt expression gt lt cvt_element gt where lt cvt_element gt can take the value 10 through 511 The following is an example algorithm statement writecvt O136 330 send output channel 36 s value to CVT element 330 Each time
213. concepts in Chapter 3 See Chapter 6 the SCPI reference for more detailed information on each command Chapter 5 151 VEE Programming Examples Error Checking Error Checking err_1419 vee This program operates stand alone However 1t is designed to be merged into an application program to provide an object that will query every error stored in the VT1419A s error queue It s a good debugging tool because it is self contained A good technique would be to turn this entire object into a function that can be called after each major programming object in the application This example gives you a quick method of including an error checking thread to merge with your application program It provides you with the necessary steps to get the attention of the E1419A driver and to read ALL errors within the error queue 0 No error Figure 5 6 Error Checking Detail View 152 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Configuration Display Configuration Display scp_1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is designed to be merged into an application program to provide a means of displaying the driver and firmware revisions and identify which SCP s are loaded into the eight SCP slots Just like the previous error checking example it can be made a callable function in Agilent VEE and can be inserted it into the application his is a simple program that reads the driver and f
214. custom EU with chs 24 31 INITiate then TRIGger module DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature Usage DIAGnostic CUSTom REFerence TEMPerature extracts the current Reference Temperature Register Contents converts it to 32 bit floating point format and sends it to the FIFO This command is used to verify that the reference temperature is as expected after measuring it using a custom reference temperature EU conversion table A program must have EU table values stored in table block download the new reference EU table DIAG CUST PIECEWISE lt table range gt lt table block ch list designate channel as reference SENS FUNC CUST REF lt range gt lt ch_list gt 222 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic set up scan list sequence ch 0 in this case Now run the algorithm that uses the custom reference conversion table dump reference temp register to FIFO DIAG CUST REF TEMP read the diagnostic reference temperature value SENS DATA FIFO DIAGnostic IEEE DIAGnostic IEEE lt mode gt enables 1 or disables 0 IEEE 754 NAN Not A Number and INF value outputs This command was created for the Agilent VEE platform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean uint 16 0 1 volts Comments When mode is set to 1 the module can return INF and NAN values according to the IEEE 754 standard When lt mode gt
215. cute CAL TARE for these channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch_list channel list string 100 163 none Comments CAL TARE also performs the equivalent of a CAL operation This operation uses the Tare constants to set a DAC which will remove each channel offset as seen by the module s A D converter As an example assume that the system wiring to channel 0 generates a 0 1 volt offset with 0 volts a short applied at the Unit Under Test UUT Before CAL TARE the module would return a reading of 0 1 volts for channel 0 After CAL TARE 100 the module will return a reading of 0 volts with a short applied at the UUT and the system wiring offset will be removed from all measurements of the signal to channel 0 e Set Amplifier Filter SCP gain before CAL TARE For best accuracy choose the gain that will be used during measurements If the range or gain setup is changed later be sure to perform another CAL operation Output SCP channels referenced in lt ch list gt will not be affected by CAL TARE Some output have input channels associated with them in order to approximately 212 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration verify their output values These input channels will be not be affected by CAL TARE even if they are referenced in lt ch_list gt e If Open TransducerDetect OTD is enabled when CAL TARE is executed the module w
216. cy specs to account for temperature gradients across the VT1586A The VT1586A should be mounted in the bottom part of the rack below and away from other heat sources for best performance The temperature graphs are found on the following pages e Thermocouple Type E 200 to 800 C 332 333 e Thermocouple Type E 0 to 800 C 00 334 335 e Thermocouple Type EEXtended 336 337 e Thermocouple Type J sasadia eka aade ee ee eee 338 339 e Thermocouple Type K 2 0 eee eee eee 340 e Thermocouple TypeR tna sa eee eee ee eee 341 342 e Thermocouple Type S 0 00 eee eee eee 343 295 e Thermocouple Type T 0 0 eee eee ee eee 345 346 e Reference Thermistor 5k 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 347 348 e Reference RTD 1000 1 2 Lee eee eee 349 RID 100 Oi steed dia 350 351 e Thermistor 2250 Q 1 ntina EEEE 352 353 e Thermistor 5 KO 1 nee 354 355 e Thermistor IO RU 34 32 6550 io a ERE EDI 356 357 Appendix A 331 o Bag JO 19184 pox MO VEOSILA eee 140 AA 8X EJ 110 VEOSLLA E JO 39414 TI 140 V OSLLA J O tata 11140 VIOSILA 00 008 00 009 00 00p 00 00 000 00007 O e Es 009 DAL 008 1 aranan Bid ir a ET E 006 o Bsq Appendix A 332 00008 00 009 Q0 00r Q0 00 9 ded e NUEVO M GENERE e mem rabo
217. d Coefficients ALG UPD cause changes to take place Updates are performed during phase 2 of the algorithm execution cycle see Figure 3 8 on page 80 The UPDate WINDow num updates command can be used to specify how many updates must be performed during phase 2 UPDATE phase and assigns a constant window of time to accomplish all of the updates that will be made The default value for num updates 1s 20 Fewer updates shorter window means slightly faster loop execution times Each update takes approximately 1 4 us To set the Update Window to allow ten updates in phase 2 ALG UPD WIND 10 allows slightly faster execution than default of twenty updates A way to synchronize variable updates with an external event is to send the ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel lt dig chan bit gt command e The dig chan bit gt parameter specifies the digital channel bit that controls execution of the update operation When the ALG UPD CHAN command is received the module checks the current state of the digital bit When the bit next changes state pending updates are made in the next UPDATE Phase ALG UPD CHAN 1133 B0 perform updates when bit zero of VT1533A at channel 133 changes state Enabling and An algorithm is enabled by default when it is defined However the ALG STATe Disabling alg name gt ON OFF command is provided to allow for enabling or disabling E algorithms When an individual algorithm is enabled it will execute when the Al
218. d Commands SOUR PULM STATE SOUR PULS POLarity e The variable frequency control for this channel is provided by the algorithm language When the algorithm executes an assignment statement to this channel the value assigned will be the frequency setting For example 0149 2000 set channel 49 to 2 kHz Usage SOUR PULS WIDTH 2 50E 3 149 set fixed pulse width of 2 5 ms on channel 49 SOURce PULSe WIDTh SOURce PULSe WIDTh lt ch_list gt returns the fixed pulse width value on a frequency modulated pulse channel Chapter 6 289 VT1419A Command Reference SOURce Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Ifthe channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e Returned Value returns the numeric pulse width The type is float32 290 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS STATus NOTE w The STATus subsystem communicates with the SCPI defined Operation and Questionable Data status register sets Each is comprised of a Condition register a set of Positive and Negative Transition Filter registers an Event register and an Enable register Condition registers allow the current real time states of their status signal inputs to be viewed signal states are not latched The Positive and Negative
219. dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range Ifa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates an error Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified 1s auto range If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if the expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 range must be set no lower than 1 V dc or an input out of range condition will exist The sub type EEXTended applies to E type thermocouples at 800 C and above The CAL command calibrates temperature channels based on Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again Related Commands DIAG CUST PIEC CAL SENS REF and SENS REF TEMP RST Condition all custom EU tables erased 210 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe Usage program must put table constants into array table_block DIAG CUST PIEC 1 table_block 100 107 send characterized thermocouple table for use by channels 0 7 SENS FUNC CUST TC N 25 100
220. ded to the function This allows the DSP to linearly interpolate the table for a given input value and return the function s value much faster than if a transcendental function s equation were arithmetically evaluated using a power series expansion User functions are defined by downloading function table values with the ALG FUNC DEF command and can take any name that is a valid C identifier like haversine sqr log10 etc To find out how to generate table values from a function equation see the Agilent VEE example program fn 1419 vee in Chapter 5 page 156 For details on the ALG FUNC DEF command see page 197 in the Command Reference User defined functions are global in scope A user function defined with ALG FUNC DEF is available to all defined algorithms Up to 32 functions can be defined in the VT1419A The functions can be called with the syntax lt func_name gt lt expression gt Example for user function pre defined as square root with name sqrt 0132 sqrt 1100 channel 32 outputs square root of input channel 0 s value A user function must be defined ALG FUNC DEF before any algorithm is defined ALG DEF that references it Operating Sequence Overall Sequence This section explains another important factor in an algorithm s execution environment Figure 4 2 shows the same overall sequence of operations seen in Chapter 3 but also includes a block diagram to show which parts o
221. ds SOUR PULM STATe SOUR PULS POLarity SOUR PULS PERiod SOUR FUNC SHAPe SQUare e The variable frequency control for this channel is provided by the algorithm language When the algorithm executes an assignment statement to this channel the value assigned will be the frequency setting For example 0148 2000 set channel 48 to 2 kHz SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe lt channel gt returns the frequency modulated mode state for a PULSe channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Ifthe channel specified is not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e Returned Value returns 1 ON or 0 OFF The type is uint16 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CONDition SOURce FUNCtion SHA Pe CONDition lt ch_list gt sets the SOURce function to output digital patterns to bits in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch_list string 132 163 none Comments The VT1533A SCP sources 8 digital bits on the channel specified by this command The VT1534A SCP can source one digital bit on each of the channels specified by this command 286 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SOURce SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe W lt ch_li
222. e ALG DEF GLOBALS static float glob scal var glob array var 12 Global variables are accessed within an algorithm like any other variable glob scal var P factor 1108 NOTES 1 All variables must be declared static float 2 Array variables cannot be assigned a value when declared 3 All variables declared within an algorithm are local to that algorithm If a variable is locally declared with the same identifier as an existing global variable the algorithm will access the local variable only Dete rmining The VT1419A always declares the global variable First loop First loop is set to 1 First Execution each time INIT is executed After main calls all enabled algorithms it sets First loop to 0 By testing First loop the algorithm can determine if it is being Fi rst loop called for the first time since an INITiate command was received Example Chapter 4 111 The Algorithm Language and Environment Accessing the VT1419A s Resources Initializing Variables Sending Data to the CVT and FIFO static float scalar var static float array var 4 assign constants to variables on first pass only if First loop scalar_var 22 3 array var 0 0 array_var 1 0 array_var 2 1 2 array_var 3 4 Variable initialization can be performed during three distinct VT1419A operations 1 When an algorithm is defined with the ALG DEFINE command A declaration initialization statement is a
223. e Must be to 1024 Invalid Algorithm Number Must be ALGI to ALG32 Algorithm Block must contain termination Must append a null byte to end of algorithm string within the Block Data Unknown SCP Not Tested May receive if a breadboard SCP is being used Invalid SCP for this product Analog Scan time too big Too much settling time Count of channels referenced by algorithms combined with use of SENS CHAN SETTLING has attempted to build an analog Scan List greater than 64 channels Can t define new algorithm while running Execute ABORT then define algorithm Need ALG UPD before redefining this algorithm again Already have an algorithm swap pending for this algorithm Algorithm swapping already enabled Can t change size Only send lt swap_size gt parameter on initial definition GLOBALS can t be enabled for swapping Don t send swap size parameter for ALG DEF GLOBALS Appendix B 365 Error Messages 366 Appendix B Appendix C Glossary The following terms have special meaning when related to the VT1419A Algorithm Algorithm Language Application Program Buffer Control Processor In general an algorithm is a tightly defined procedure that performs a task This manual uses the term to indicate a program executed within the VT1419A that implements a data acquisition and control algorithm The algorithm progr
224. e 77 Selecting trigger timer arm source 78 Selection statement 132 Self test and C SCPI for MS DOS R 317 how to read results 317 Self Test error messages 361 Sending Data to the CVT and FIFO 112 SENS DATA CVT RESet 261 SENS DATA FIFO COUNt HALF 263 SENS DATA FIFO COUNt 262 SENS DATA FIFO HALF 263 SENS DATA FIFO MODE 264 SENS DATA FIFO MODE 264 SENS DATA FIFO PART 265 SENS DATA FIFO RESet 265 SENS FUNC CUST REF 269 SENS FUNC CUST TC 270 SENS FUNC RESistance 271 SENS FUNC STRain 272 SENS FUNC TEMPerature 274 SENS FUNC VOLTage 276 SENS REF TEMPerature 279 SENS REFerence 277 SENSE subsystem 258 284 SENSe CHANnel SETTling 259 SENSe CHANnel SETTling 260 390 Index SENSe DATA CVTable 260 SENSe FREQuency APERture 266 SENSe FREQuency APERture 267 SENSe FUNC CONDition 267 SENSe FUNC CUSTom 268 SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency 271 SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize 275 SENSe REFerence CHANnels 278 SENSe STRain EX Citation 279 SENSe STRain EXCitation 280 SENSe STRain GFACtor 280 SENSe STRain GFACtor 280 SENSe STRain POISson 281 SENSe STRain POISson 281 SENSe STRain UNSTrained 282 SENSe STRain UNSTrained 282 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 283 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 284 Sensing Reference temperature with the VT1419A 33 Sensing 4 20 mA 43 Separator command 178 Sequence A complete thermocouple measurement command 64 Sequence ALG DEFINE in the programming 116 Sequence example c
225. e The C SCPI data type is a string array REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 values are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained 260 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter For REAL 32 each value is 4 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float32 array For REAL 64 and PACK 64 each value is 8 bytes in length the C SCPI data type is a float64 array NOTE After RST Power on each element in the CVT contains the IEEE 754 value Not a number NaN Elements specified in the DATA CVT command that have not been written to be an algorithm will return the value 9 91E37 e RST Condition All elements of CVT contains IEEE 754 Not a Number e Related Commands SENS DATA CVT RES FORMAT DATA Usage SENS DATA CVT 10 13 Return algorithm values stored in CVT elements 10 through 13 DATA CVT 10 13 Return only element 10 and element 13 DATA CVT 330 337 350 360 Return algorithm values from elements 330 337 350 and 360 SENSe DATA CVTable RESet SENSe DATA CV Table RESet sets all 502 Current Value Table entries to the IEEE 754 Not a number Comments The value of NaN is 9 910000E 037 ASCII e Executing DATA CVT RES while the module is INITiated will generate an error 3000 Illegal while initiated e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related
226. e z connectors to the VT1419A Exladton Lavar module connectors Apply gentle pressure to attach the Terminal Module to the VT1419A Module Extraction Levers b 0 Push in the extraction levers to lock the Terminal Module onto the VT1419A Module Figure 2 14 Attaching the VT1419A Terminal Module Chapter 2 41 Field Wiring Attaching Removing the VT1419A Terminal Module Release the two extraction levers and push both levers out simultaneously Use a small screwdriver to pry and release the 1 Up Ue two extraction levers p Ni lt lt Free and remove the Terminal Module from the A D Module Extraction Lever c GDI VT1419A p 4 Extraction Lever Figure 2 15 Removing the VT1419A Terminal Module 42 Chapter 2 Field Wiring Adding Components to the Option 12 Terminal Module Adding Components to the Option 12 Terminal Module The back of the terminal module PCB printed circuit board provides surface mount pads which can be used to add serial and parallel components to any channel s signal path Figure 2 16 shows additional component locator information see the schematic and pad layout information on the back of the terminal module PCB Figure 2 17 shows some usage example schematics Upper layout also applies here Upper layout also applies here Lower layout al
227. e A D for measurement Here the primary signal path is along the analog Hi and Lo lines The SCP Bus carries digital signals to control the programmable parameters on the VT1503A and VT1510A 26 Chapter 2 Analog Source SCPs Combined Analog Source and Sense SCPs Digital SCPs Pairing Sense and Source SCPs for Resistance Measurements Field Wiring Planning the Wiring Layout The primary signal path for analog source SCPs like the VT1505A Resistance Current Source the VT1531A Voltage DAC and the VT1532A Current DAC is along the Hi and Lo lines from the SCP to the face plate connectors The path from the SCP to the analog multiplexer can be used to read and verify the approximate output although this path is not calibrated The SCP Bus carries digital signals to these SCPs to control their output levels The VT1506A VT1507A and VT1511A Strain Completion SCPs as well as the VT1518A Resistance Measurement SCP combine analog sense and analog sources in a single SCP With these SCPs some channels will be used to sense measurement values while others will be used to carry analog excitation voltage or current Again the SCP Bus carries digital signals to control SCP source level and or measurement configuration With digital SCPs the signal path to and from the face plate connectors and the SCP is as always the Hi and Lo signal paths The VT1534A VT1536A and VT1538A digital SCPs provide one digital bit per Hi and Lo pair
228. e RESet MODE INIT TRIGger lt ch_lis gt ens SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE lt channel gt nannaa SOURce FM STATe 1 0 O OFF lt ch_list gt en SOURce FM STATe lt channel gt oana SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CONDition g ch list ee SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe Q ch list ee SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare Q ch list ee SOURce PULM STATe 1 0 ONJOFFE Q ch list a SOURce PULM STATe lt channel gt ooo SOURce PULSe PERiod lt period gt lt ch_list gt 2 ee SOURce PULSe PERiod lt channel gt 222r SOURce PULSe WIDth width Q ch list 22e SOURce PULSe WIDth lt channel gt o STATus OPERation EVENt as STATus OPERation NTRansition transition mask 2s STATus OPERation NTRansition a a e eo SLATus PRESet 22 22 GS oco mo RA Ros oy Rom US e bom See BS STATus QUEStionable CONDition lll rs STATus QUEStionable ENABle enable mask ee STATus QUEStionable ENABle ee STATus QUEStionable EVENt 0 0 0 0 ee STATus QUEStionable PTRansition transition mask gt en STATus QUEStionable PTRansition ls page 272 page 274 page 275 page 276 page 277 page 278 page279 page 279 page 280 page 280 page 280 page 281 page 281 page 282 page 282 page 283 page 284 page 285 page 286 page 286 page 287 page 287 page 287 page 28
229. e conversion table gets its name because it is actually an approximation of 96 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Compensating for System Offsets the transducer s response curve in the form of 512 linear segments whose end points fall on the curve Data points that fall between the end points are linearly interpolated The built in EU conversions for thermistors thermocouples and RTDs use this type of table Custom Thermocouple The VT1419A can measure temperature using custom characterized thermocouple wire EU Conversions oftypes E J K N R S and T The custom EU table generated for the individual batch of thermocouple wire is loaded to the appropriate channels using the DIAG CUST PIEC command see the Agilent VEE example eu_1419 vee Since thermocouple EU conversion requires a reference junction compensation of the raw thermocouple voltage the custom EU table is linked to the channel s using the command SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple lt tpe gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt The lt type gt parameter specifies the type of thermocouple wire so that the correct built in table will be used for reference junction compensation Reference junction compensation is based on the reference junction temperature at the time the custom channel is measured For more information see Thermocouple Reference Temperature Compensation on page 62 Custom Reference The VT1419A can measure reference junction tem
230. e of zero tests false if any other value it tests true For example if my_var is other than 0 increment count var if my var count var count var 1 The following functions and statements are provided in the VT1419A s Algorithm Language Functions abs expression return absolute value of expression max expressionl expression return largest of the two expressions min expression1 expression2 return smallest of the two expressions Statements interrupt sets VXI interrupt writeboth expression cvt_loc write expression result to FIFO and CVT element specified writecvt expression cvt_loc write expression result to CVT element specified writefifo expression write expression result to FIFO Program flow control is limited to the conditional execution construct using if and else and return Looping inside an algorithm function is not supported The only loop is provided by repeatedly triggering the VT1419A Each trigger event either external or internal Trigger Timer executes the main function which calls each defined and enabled algorithm function There is no goto statement The VT1419A Algorithm Language provides the if else construct in the following general form if expression statement else statement If expression evaluates to non zero statement 1s executed If expression evaluates to zero statement2 is executed The else clause with its associated statement2 is optional Statement and or statement2 ca
231. e same hierarchical level and part of the same command branch as the keyword preceding the semicolon The colon immediately following the semicolon tells the SCPI parser to reset the expected hierarchical level to Root Chapter 6 181 VT1419A Command Reference NOTE Linking a complete SCPI Command with other keywords from the same branch and level Separate the first complete SCPI command from next partial command with the semicolon only For example take the following portion of the SENSE subsystem command tree the FUNCtion branch SENSe FUNCtion RESistance lt range gt lt ch_list gt TEMPerature lt sensor gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt Rather than send a complete SCPI command to set each function send FUNC RES 10000 0100 107 TEMP RTD 92 0108 115 VOLT 116 123 This sets the first eight channels to measure resistance the next eight channels to measure temperature and the next eight channels to measure voltage The command keywords following the semicolon must be from the same command branch and level as the complete command preceding the semicolon or a 113 Undefined header error will be generated 182 Chapter 6 C SCPI Data Types The following table shows the allowable type and sizes of the C SCPI parameter data sent to the module and query data returned by the module The parameter and returned value type is necessary fo
232. ed for is dependent on the instrument range and SCP channel gain settings The following table lists these limits Maximum CAL TARE Offsets A D range Offset V Offset V Offset V Offset V V F Scale Gain x1 Gain x8 Gain x16 Gain x64 16 3 2213 0 40104 0 20009 0 04970 4 0 82101 0 10101 0 05007 0 01220 1 0 23061 0 02721 0 01317 0 00297 0 25 0 07581 0 00786 0 00349 0 00055 0 0625 0 03792 0 00312 0 00112 N A Changing Gains or Filters Unexpected Channel Offsets or Overloads To change a channel s SCP setup after a CAL TARE operation a CAL operation must be performed to generate new DAC constants and the range floor reset for the stored Tare value The tare capability of the range gain setup that is to be used must also be considered For instance if the actual offset present is 0 6 volts and was Tared for a 4 volt range Gain x1 setup moving to a 1 volt range Gain x1 setup will return Overload values for that channel since the 1 volt range is below the range floor as set by CAL TARE See table on page 230 for more on values returned for Overload readings This can occur when the VT1419A s flash memory contains CAL TARE offset constants that are no longer appropriate for its current application Execute CAL TARE RESET then CAL to reset the tare constants in RAM Measure the affected channels again If the problems go away reset the tare constants in flash memory by executing CAL STORE TARE Chapt
233. ed on to the X Y trace for display Chapter 5 159 VEE Programming Examples Curve Fitting and EU Generation Curve Fitting and EU Generation regr1419 vee This program operates stand alone It shows how the Agilent VEE regression tools can be used to generate a polynomial equation to fit volts and pressure The generated equation can then be used in the eu 1419 vee module for converting volts to pressure during data acquisition of the VT1419A 0000 0 003 0 168 0001 0 999 20 025 0002 2 023 40 125 0003 3 024 60 058 inna fa n1 AN 1951 Example use of Formula 0 106824 Result D 0 106825 Demonstation on how to take readings from an 1 20 3937 instrument like the El419A and building a formula that can later be used as an EU 2 0 641223 table conversion with custeu vee 3 0 202808 Build Formula The record array illustrated is typical of 4 17 5087m data you would get when stimulating a pressure transducer 100PSI 0 5V You take the generated formula from the Mth Order Poly Formula box and insert that into the formula box of the eu_1419 vee table Figure 5 11 Curve Fitting and EU Generation The Fit To 4th Order Poly object takes the data pairs entered into the Voltage vs Pressure text object and generates the coefficients that can be entered into a 4th order polynomial The coefficients are automatically ent
234. edicated to receiving more changes from the system e As soon as the ALG UPD IMM command is received no further changes are accepted until all updates are complete A query of an algorithm value following an UPDate command will not be executed until the UPDate completes this may be a useful synchronizing method 4 1 2 3 4 TPUT INPUT UPDATE EXECUTE ALGS OUTPUT ut table from SCP variables amp execute all enabled algorithms output table to SCP channels algorothms sent to SCP innels analog amp channels digital Set by ALG OUTPUT DELay if any Trigger Event Trigger Event Figure 6 1 Updating Variables and Algorithms e When Accepted Before or after INIT e Related Commands ALG UPDATE WINDOW ALG SCALAR ALG ARRAY ALG STATE and ALG SCAN RATIO ALG DEF with swapping enabled The following example shows three scalars being written with the associated update command following See ALG UPD WINDOW ALG SCAL ALG1 Setpoint 25 ALG SCAL ALG1 P_factor 1 3 ALG SCAL ALG2 P_factor 1 7 ALG UPD ALG SCAL ALG2 Setpoint ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel ALGorithm UPDate CHANnel lt dig_chan gt This command is used to update variables algorithms ALG SCAN RATIO and ALG STATE changes when the specified digital input level changes state When the ALG UPD CHAN command is executed the current state of the digital input specified is saved The update will be performed at the next update phase UPDA
235. eeded An Agilent VEE 4 0 compiled version is included with the SOL WATS la ito a A oleae page 163 Modification of Variables and Arrays updt1419 vee This program operates stand alone This example shows how operator interaction with running algorithms takes place and how to download changes for both scalar and array variables page 166 Algorithm Modification swap1419 vee This program operates stand alone It demonstrates how to modify algorithms while the VT1419A is running It includes further examples on custom function generation o serice arree te cece eee page 168 Driver Download drvr1419 vee This program allows the VT1419A driver and any other Agilent VXI drivers that might be needed to be downloaded into an Agilent HP E1405B 06A Command Module 20 0 cece eee eens page 170 Firmware Update Download flsh1419 vee This program allows the FLASH memory of the VT1419A to be saved and reprogrammed page 171 142 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Wiring Connections and File Locations for the Examples Wiring Connections and File Locations for the Examples Voltage Input Ch O Voltage Input Ch 1 Voltage Input Ch 2 TC Temp Input Ch 3 ec type T Ref Temp Input Ch 7 thermocouple Reference Thermistor on terminal module Ch 32 Voltage Output Digital Channels Example File Location Installing Example Files The following illustration shows the co
236. efined are only placed in the channel list before INIT The list cannot be changed after INIT If an algorithm is redefined by swapping after INIT and it references channels not already in the channel list 1t will not be able to access the newly referenced channels No error message will be generated To make sure all required channels are included in the channel list define lt alg_name gt and re define all algorithms that will replace lt alg_name gt by swapping them before sending INIT This insures that all channels referenced in these algorithms will be available after INIT If an algorithm is redefined by swapping after INIT and it declares an existing variable the declaration initialization statement e g static float my var 3 5 will not change the current value of that variable The driver only calculates overall execution time for algorithms defined before INIT This calculation is used to set the default output delay same as executing ALG OUTP DELAY AUTO If an algorithm is swapped after INIT that take longer to execute than the original the output delay will behave as if set by ALG OUTP DEL 0 rather than AUTO see ALG OUTP DEL command Use the same procedure from note to make sure the longest algorithm execution time is used to set ALG OUTP DEL AUTO before INIT ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar lt alg_name gt lt var_name gt lt value gt sets the value of the scalar variable lt va
237. em_size numeric to limit of available VME memory none Comments This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module e The mem size gt parameter may be specified in decimal hex 7H octal Q or binary B e The lt mem_size gt parameter should be a multiple of four 4 to accommodate 32 bit readings e Related Commands MEMory subsystem FORMAT and FETCH e RST Condition MEM VME SIZE 0 Usage MEM VME SIZE 32768 Allocate 32 kilobytes kB of VME memory to reading storage 8 192 readings MEMory VME SIZE MEMory VME SIZE returns the amount in bytes of VME memory allocated to reading storage Comments This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module e Returned Value Numeric e Related Commands MEMory subsystem and FETCH Usage MEM VME SIZE Returns the number of bytes allocated to reading storage MEMory VME STATe MEMory VME STATe enable enables or disables use of the VME memory card as additional reading storage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none Comments This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module Chapter 6 243 VT1419A Command Reference MEMory e When the VME memory card is enabled the INIT command does not terminate unt
238. en push the cover onto the module Tighten two screws Chapter 1 19 Getting Started Configuring the VT1419A 4 Installing SCPs Labeling VT1419A Peel off label from card and stick on the appropriate place on the cover iI Terminal Module a Connect to A D 1 Module Later i E i S Stick on labels Peel off label from furnished with the SCP card and stick on PIN 43 0133 xxx the terminal module to be connected to the A D Module 20 Chapter 1 Getting Started Configuring the VT1419A Disabling the Input Disabling the Input Protect feature voids the VT1419A s warranty The Input Protect Feature Protect feature allows the VT1419A to open all channel input relays if any input s voltage exceeds 19 volts 6 volts for non isolated digital I O SCPs This feature Optional helps to protect the card s Signal Conditioning Plug Ons input multiplexer ranging amplifier and A D from destructive voltage levels The level that trips the protection function has been set to provide a high probability of protection The voltage level that is certain to cause damage is somewhat higher If in an application the importance of completing a measurement run outweighs the added risk of damage to the VT1419A the input protect feature may be disabled VOIDS WARRANTY D
239. ence eee nee 108 Contents How User Algorithms Fit In 5 108 Accessing the VT1419A s Resources 109 Accessing VO Channels acc cassnesmas en dees eae Odea Rer e dre ee 110 Defining and Accessing Global Variables eese eee eee 111 Determining First Execution First loop 111 Initializing Variables Ih 112 Sending Data to the CVT and FIFO lsseseeeeeee een eee 112 Setting a V XIbus Interrupt coral T DP Ru e nec E Reb a Rari 113 Calling User Defined Functions 0 0 0 eh 114 Operating Sequence 0 eee n 114 Overall Sequences asas Sh Hehe hao ee ae re A EE 4 114 Algorithm Execution Order 1 2 0 2 0 a a ee een ee etn tenance 116 Defining Algorithms ALG DEF 0 2 0 0 000 cera 116 ALG DEFINE in the Programming Sequence 0 0 0 eese een 116 ALG DEFINE s Two Data Formats sso ccccscenrersowris sda ee 117 Changing an Algorithm While It Is Running lsseeeeeee RR 118 A Very Simple First Algorithm 5 120 Wnu ting the ATgorthm ete e pedet dece Sha de ers io di al 120 Running the Algorithm lssseseeeeeeeeee I 120 Non Control Algorithms s derer grae re a UR eed ip ORO RR ca eU 121 Data Acquisition Algorithm 0 2 0 0 0c cece III 121 Process Monitoring Algorithm 5 121 Algorithm Language Reference sesia suss diesis cs 122 Standard Reserved Keywords 0 0 ccc erre eens 122 Special VT1419A Reserved Keywords 0 0 cece eee eee erent eee
240. ened and a RST is required to reset the VTI419A Scan complete The VT1419A has finished a scan list SCP trigger A trigger was received from an SCP FIFO half full The FIFO contains at least 32768 values Measurement complete The trigger system exited the Wait For Arm This clears the Measuring bit in the OPER register e Algorithm executes an interrupt statement These VT1419A interrupts are not always enabled since under some circumstances this could be detrimental to the users system operation For example the Scan Complete SCP triggers FIFO half full and Measurement complete interrupts could come repetitively at rates that would cause the operating system to be swamped processing interrupts These conditions are dependent upon the user s overall system design therefore the driver allows the user to decide which 1f any interrupts will be enabled The way the user controls which interrupts will be enabled is via the OPC STATUS OPER QUES ENABLE and STAT PRESET commands Each of the interrupting conditions listed above has a corresponding bit in the QUES or OPER registers If that bit is enabled via the STATus OPER QUES ENABle command to be a part of the group summary bit it will also enable the VT1419A interrupt for that condition If that bit is not enabled the corresponding interrupt will be disabled Once a status driven condition sets an enabled bit in one of the Event registers that Event register
241. equency 0 sese e 57 Linking Channels to EU Conversion 0 0 c eee eda daa nent eee 58 Linking Output Channels to Functions 0 00 0 cee eee eee eens 66 Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels 0 0 00 eee eee 66 Setting Up Digital Inputs 0 nerean aa pareat iea a e anaa E o ain 66 Setting Up Digital Outputs pes eisai e ana a a aia a a Ai a aa e a i aaoi 67 Performing Channel Calibration Important lees 71 Defining C Language Algorithms sereo lees III 73 Global Variable Definition leseeeeeee ei eee tt eens 73 Alsonthm Defhnit on uenia Le eite docto eR a Sd DR A a 74 Pre Setting Algorithm Variables lle 74 Defining Data OA A D Sect Acta i uod 75 Specifying the Data Formats ces cresias coesa tienta aro 75 Selecting the FIFO Mode pod dede da ia ORO os Ceci ak 76 Setting up the Trigger System 0 2 eee a a E 77 Armand Trigger SourceS i ui a Re a La 77 Programming the Trigger TIMET esisti acercara eme eee ete eee 79 Setting the Trigger Counter 0 2 eect teen ene 79 Outputting Trigger Signals sa 0 0 iara 79 Initiating Running Algorithms s siiis ranie 0 0 0 III 80 Starting Algorithms 1 2 0 2 0 i ei E aa aeara a hh en 80 The Operating SEQUENCES c decedere doh eR lg ena SU aa a 81 Retrieving Algorithm Data csc cise ees cece II 81 Modifying Running Algorithm Variables sese 85 Updating the Algorithm Variables and Coefficients llle 85 E
242. equency PWM This function sets up one or more VT1534A channels to output a train of pulses A companion command sets the period for the complete pulse rising edge to rising edge This of course fixes the frequency of the pulse train The width of the pulses from these channels is controlled by Algorithm Language statements Use the command SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe lt ch_list gt Example command sequence To enable pulse width modulation for VT 1534A s third channel at SCP position 6 SOUR PULM STATE ON 150 To set pulse period to 0 5 ms which sets the signal frequency 2 kHz SOUR PULSE PERIOD 0 5e 3 150 To set function of VT1534A s third channel in SCP position 6 to PULSE SOUR FUNCTION PULSE 150 Example algorithm statement to control pulse width to 0 1 ms 20 duty cycle 0150 0 1e 3 Chapter 3 69 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels Fixed Width Pulses at Variable Frequency FM This function sets up one or more VT1534A channels to output a train of pulses A companion command sets the width T edge to Y edge of the pulses The frequency of the pulse train from these channels is controlled by Algorithm Language statements Use the command SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe g ch list Example command sequence To enable frequency modulation for VT1534A s fourth channel at SCP position 6 SOUR FM STATE ON 151 To set pulse width to 0 3333
243. er PERiod TRIGger TIMer PERiod returns the currently set Trigger Timer interval Comments Returned Value Numeric 1 through 6 5536 The C SCPI type is float32 e Related Commands TRIG TIMER e RST Condition 1 0E 4 Usage TRIG TIMER Query trig timer enter statement Returns the timer setting 310 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference Common Command Reference CAL NOTE The following reference discusses the VT1419A IEEE 488 2 Common commands Calibration command The calibration command causes the Channel Calibration function to be performed for every module channel The Channel Calibration function includes calibration of A D Offset and Gain and Offset for all 64 channels This calibration is accomplished using internal calibration references The CAL command causes the module to calibrate A D offset and gain and all channel offsets This may take many minutes to complete The actual time it will take the VT1419A to complete CAL depends on the mix of SCPs installed CAL performs literally hundreds of measurements of the internal calibration sources for each channel and must allow seventeen time constants of settling wait each time a filtered channel s calibrations source value is changed The CAL procedure is internally very sophisticated and results in an extremely well calibrated module To perform Channel Calibration on multiple VT1419As use CAL SETup e Returned Value
244. er 3 99 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Detecting Open Transducers Detecting Open Transducers NOTES Most of the VT1419A s analog input SCPs provide a method to detect open transducers When Open Transducer Detect OTD is enabled the SCP injects a small current into the HIGH and LOW input of each channel The polarity of the current pulls the HIGH inputs toward 17 volts and the LOW inputs towards 17 volts If a transducer is open measuring that channel will return an over voltage reading OTD is available on a per SCP basis All eight channels of an SCP are enabled or disabled together See Figure 3 13 for a simplified schematic diagram of the OTD circuit Siga Signal Conditioning Plug On Multiplexer High gt gt o To High Figure 3 13 Simplified Open Transducer Circuit 1 When OTD is enabled the inputs have up to 0 2 yA injected into them If this current will adversely affect the measurement but checking for open transducers is still required enable OTD run the algorithms check analog input variables for measurement values that indicate an open transducer then disable OTD and run the algorithms without it The VT1419A s accuracy specifications apply only when OTD is off 100 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction More On Auto Ranging 2 When a channel s SCP filtering is enabled allow fifteen seconds after turning on OTD for the filters capacitors to charge before c
245. er bit mask SRE Service Request Enable query Return current setting of the Service Request Enable register STB Read Status Byte query Return current Status Byte value Macros DMC lt name gt lt cmd_data gt Define Macro Command Assigns one or a sequence of commands to a macro EMC 1 0 Enable Macro Command Enable Disable defined macro commands EMC Enable Macros query Returns 1 for macros enabled 0 for disabled GMC lt name gt Get Macro query Returns command sequence for named macro LMC Learn Macro query Returns comma separated list of defined macro names PMC Purge Macro Commands Purges all macro commands RMC lt name gt Remove Individual Macro Removes named macro command Synchronization OPC Operation Complete Standard Event register s Operation Complete bit will be 1 when all pending device operations have been finished OPC Operation Complete query Places an ASCII in the output queue when all pending operations have finished TRG Trigger Trigger s module when TRIG SOUR is HOLD WAI Wait to Complete 326 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference Command Quick Reference Chapter 6 327 Appendix A Specifications Power Requirements with no SCPs installed 5 V 12 V 12 V 24 V 24 V 5 2 V IPM Peak Module Current lpm lpm lpm lom len lom len lom lpm lom lpm lom Ibm Dynamic Module Current 1 0 0 02 0 06 0 01 0 01 0 01 0
246. er cycle mode the slider modifies the ALG SCAN RATIO command of Algorithm 1 to vary how many trigger cycles to walt before executing the algorithm and writing different data to the output channel This has the effect of slowing down the waveform and lowering its frequency Algorithm 2 simply copies each value of channel 132 to the FIFO every trigger cycle With Algorithm 1 only executing at some multiple of the trigger rate there will be repeated FIFO readings of the same value indicating a slower frequency The Offset Frequency object has the SCPI commands used to control the scalar variable updates and the object Download Waveform controls writing to the array waveform in Algorithm 1 Chapter 5 167 VEE Programming Examples Algorithm Modification Algorithm Modification a8 in 0 31 Field name Value FuncName in radians Minimum p Maximum 6 3 FuncNumber Formula fsin a 180 Pn First Prey Next Last swap1419 vee This program operates stand alone It shows how to modify algorithms while the VT1419A is running It includes further examples on custom function generation 5 Volts 2 Ch100 10 y 4 o 70 Auto Scale Samples 10 his example shows how to hot swap n 14194 algorithm while the urrent algorithm is running This xample requires you to press the UN button to perm
247. ered into the 4th Order Poly Formula object and a dry lab example of a 2 5 volt input to the formula results in the 49 5685 PSI output This is what the EU conversion would perform in the VT1419A if that 4th order polynomial were entered into the EU Conversion table object Simply use the same formula generated by this example along with the specified coefficients 160 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Interrupt Handling Interrupt Handling intr1419 vee This program operates stand alone This is an example program that shows how to create multiple threads of operation in Agilent VEE to respond to a FIFO half full interrupt It teaches the concept of interrupt driven programming The example temp1419 vee also incorporates a slightly different version of interrupt processing that can enhance learning Interrupt Routine Error Status 0 No error Main Routine is example illustrates how to create two threads of peration 1 the main routine and 2 the interrupt routine he interrupt routine waits for the FIFO half full signal from the E1419A4 When received it reads the FIFO and ignals the main task by clearing the Global Flag The rogram temp1419 vee further expands upon the principle f this example Note that you must press the RUN key o initiate multiple threads The program will continue to run until you press the Stop key Figure 5 12 Interrupt Handling D
248. ers Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ttltrg cntrl boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none 250 Chapter 6 OUTPut TTLTrg n STATe Comments Only one VXIbus TTLTRG line can be enabled simultaneously e When Accepted Not while INITiated VT1419A Command Reference e Related Commands ABORT INIT TRIG e RST Condition OUTPut TTLTrg lt 0 through 7 gt OFF Usage OUTP TTLT2 ON OUTPUT TTLTRG7 STATE ON OUTPut Enable TTLTRG line to source a trigger Enable TTLTRG7 line to source a trigger OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe returns the current state for TTLTRG line lt n gt Comments Returned Value Returns 1 or 0 The C SCPI type is int16 e Related Commands OUTP TTLT lt n gt Usage OUTP TTLT2 See if TTLTRG line is enabled returns 1 or OUTPUT TTLTRG7 STATE See if TTLTRG7 line is enabled OUTPut TYPE OUTPut TYPE lt select gt lt ch_list gt sets the output drive characteristic for digital SCP channels Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units select discrete string PASSive ACTive seconds ch_list string 132 163 none Comments Ifthe channels specified are on an SCP that doesn t support this function an error will be generated See the SCP s User s Manual to determine its capabilities e PASSive configures the digital channel bit to be passive resistor pull up to a
249. es E GLOBALS you define with ALG DEF GLOBALS go here Global variables area E 9 global variable First loop equals 1 until all algorithms called First loop declared by static float First loop global value set to 1 at each INIT VT141 9A s driver eiei function main ED ER EERELERER EEE a The VT1419A driver Begin main function creates main at INIT time This example shows a main created built by VT1419A s driver after 2 algorithms have been defined main declaration of variables local to main static float State_1 Ratio_1 Count_1 created if alg1 defined eb static float State_2 Ratio_2 Count_2 created if alg2 defined al this section created if ALG1 is defined Count_1 Count_1 1 Count_1 used for ALG SCAN RATIO i if Count 1 lt 0 test for ratio met lt 0 means execute Count 1 Ratio 1 Count 1 ALG SCAN RATIO setting i if State 1 alg1 if ALG STATE ALG1 ON call alg1 End main function j this section created if ALG2 is defined Count 2 Count 2 1 Count 2 used for ALG SCAN RATIO Begin algorithm shells Count 2 0 test for ratio met lt 0 means built by VT1419A s driver ERU X Count 2 Ratio 2 Count 2 ALG SCAN RATIO setting if State 2 alg2 if ALG STATE ALG2 ON call alg2
250. es from O variables that are written by the algorithms 0100 0163 are read write global variables that are read after all algorithms have finished executing The 32 bit real values are converted to the appropriate units as defined by the SCPI configuration commands and written to the various output SCP s by channel number Chapter 3 49 Programming the VT1419A Multfunction M Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction Input Channels Output Channels EAR 10 re 444 LL E D EUN ies AO Update Variable Changes Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 7 Channel 16 Channel 32 Channel 33 Channel 34 Channel 35 Channel 36 Channel 37 Channel 38 PHASE 1 input PHASE 3 execute algorithms PHASE 4 output Trigger Period Output Delay Time Figure 3 2 VT1419A Cycle Phases Figure 3 2 illustrates the timing of all these operations and describes the VT1419A s input update execute algorithms output phases This cycle based design is desirable because it results in deterministic operation of the VT1419A That is the input channels are always scanned and the output channels are always written at pre defined intervals Note too that any number of input channels or output channels are accessible by any of up to 32 user written algorithms The algorithms are named ALGI ALG32 and execute in numerical order Notice the Update Window phase 2 illustrated in Figure 3 2 This window has a user specified length a
251. et amplitude of Current Source SCP channels Returns the setting of the Current Source SCP channel Enable or disable the Current Source SCP channels Returns the state of the Current Source SCP channel Sets output polarity on a digital SCP channel Returns digital polarity currently set for lt channel gt Adds shunt resistance to leg of Bridge Completion SCP channels Returns the state of the shunt resistor on Bridge Completion SCP channel TTLTrg SOURce FTRigger LIMit SCPlugon TRIGger Sets the internal trigger source that can drive the VXIbus TTLTrg lines SOURce Returns the source of TTLTrg drive TTLTrg lt n gt ESTATe ON OFF When module triggered source a VXIbus trigger on TTLTrg lt n gt STATe Returns whether the TTL trigger line specified by n is enabled sets the output drive type for a digital channel Returns the output drive type for lt channel gt Sets the voltage amplitude on Voltage Output and Strain SCPs Returns the voltage amplitude setting ROUTe SEQuence DEFine AIN AOUT DIN DOUT Returns comma separated list of channels in analog I O dig I O ch lists POINts AIN AOUT DIN DOUT Returns number of channels defined in above lists SAMPle Sets number of samples that will be made on channels in lt ch_list gt Returns number of samples that will be made on channels in lt ch list gt SENSe CHANnel SETTling lt settle_time gt lt ch_list gt Sets the channel settling time for channels
252. et to logic 0 will output a TTL compatible high e The lt ch list gt parameter specifies the channels to configure The VT1533A has two channels of 8 bits each All 8 bits in a channel take on the configuration specified for the channel The VT1534A has eight I O bits that are individually configured as channels To configure the higher 8 bit channel of a VT1533A for inverted polarity OUTP POLARITY INV 133 SCP in SCP position 4 To configure the upper 4 bits of a VT1534A for inverted polarity OUTP POL INV 136 139 SCP in SCP position 4 The VT1533A and VT1534A use output drivers that can be configured as either active or passive pull up To configure this use the command OUTPut TYPE lt mode gt lt ch_list gt This setting is valid even while the specified channel in not an output channel If and when the channel is configured for output an output FUNCtion command the setting will be in effect e The lt mode gt parameter can be either ACTive or PASSive When set to ACT the default the output provides active pull up When set to PASS the output is pulled up by a resistor e The ch list parameter specifies the channels to configure The VT1533A has two channels of 8 bits each All 8 bits in a channel take on the configuration specified for the channel The VT1534A has eight I O bits that are individually configured as channels To configure the higher 8 bit channel of a VT1533A for passive pull up OUTP TYPE PASS
253. etailed View This example is really quite simple It s the technique of knowing how to set up Agilent VEE to handle interrupts that is tricky The Interrupt Handler has a REPEAT loop connected directly to the Spoll object which monitors the GPIB waiting for the interrupt condition that was configured The Set Up E1419 object shows the necessary SCPI commands to configure for an interrupt shows a simple algorithm that places readings into the FIFO and configures the trigger subsystem All these topics are covered in Chapter 3 with details about the various SCPI commands in Chapter 6 Chapter 5 161 VEE Programming Examples Interrupt Handling The Interrupt Handler simply waits for the FIFO HALF FULL interrupt reads half the FIFO displays the result or one reading and re enables the condition once again When this example is understood it will be easy to understand how to handle other interrupts which are described in the Status Subsystem section in Chapter 3 The example temp 4 9 vee is another program that can be loaded that demonstrates interrupt handling 162 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Simple Data Logger Example Simple Data Logger Example Start Setup Configure Download Algorithm Output Data File temp an Input Data File 4 aichans SCP Text Selection m FICE 1E1419 LOG OFF LOGON 1 dlgr1419 vee This program operates stand alo
254. eter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units wvolt type discrete string FLOat WVOLtage none ch list channel list string 132 163 none Comments Related Commands INP LOW e RST Condition INP LOW FLOAT all VT1511A channels Usage INP LOWWVOL 132 139 148 155 connect LO of channels 32 through 39 and 48 through 55 to Wagner Ground INPut LOW INPut LOW lt channel gt returns the LO input configuration for the channel specified by lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only e Returned Value Returns FLO or WV The C SCPI type is string e Related Commands INP LOW 238 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference INPut Usage INP LOW 148 enter statement will return either FLO or WV for channel 48 INPut POLarity INPut POL arity lt mode gt lt ch_list gt sets logical input polarity on a digital SCP channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete string NORMal INVerted none ch_list string 132 163 none Comments Ifthe channels specified are on an SCP that doesn t support this function an error will be generated See the SCP s User s Manual to determine its capabilities e Related Commands for output sense SOURce PULSe POLarity e RST Condition INP POL N
255. executing the RUN on Agilent VEE a number of operations will take place which analyzes the VT1419A s configuration sets up SCP s to make measurements and prepares for data acquisition When the START becomes LIT or active pressing START will begin the processes of acquiring measurements on any and all input SCP s Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Virtual Front Panel Program Analog input SCP s display volts and digital input SCP s display digital state information in section F Analog output SCP s are both input and output at the same time Pressing STOP will temporarily pause the acquisition of data This is the diagnostics section The card can be RESET at any time to stop measurement operations calibration or testing The CALIBRATE and TEST keys are not active while START in section A is active Likewise neither CALIBRATE nor TEST can be active at the same time CALIBRATE should be performed after the VT1419A has warmed up for 1 hour Calibration is necessary whenever any SCP modules are added or moved TEST allows the integrity of any SCP channels to be checked If errors are present with either calibration or testing indicators in section D will be lit and CAL Test Results and ERROR can be pressed to determine what errors are present Both TEST and CALIBRATE may take from 3 to 10 minutes depending upon the configuration of SCP s Also CALIBRATE performs a CAL STORE ADC which stores the calibration constant
256. f it is necessary to mix analog input and digital I O SCPs on the same side the following suggestions will help provide quieter analog measurements e Use analog input SCPs that provide filtering on the mixed side e Route only high level analog signals to the mixed side SCP Pos 0 SCP Pos 1 SCP Pos 2 SCP Pos 3 Analog Input and Output Y gt TS TI SCP Pos 7 SCPPos6 SCPPos5 SCP Pos 4 VT1533A VT1534A Digital I O PWM Freq amp 1 1 Totalizer a Digital Input and i Output lt gt 1 I E 1 zd Figure D 1 Separating Analog and Digital Signals VT1531A Voltage DAC empty Appendix D 371 Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Recommended Wiring and Noise Reduction Techniques Wiring Checklist Unshielded signal wiring is very common in Data Acquisition applications While this worked well for low speed integrating A D measurements and or for measuring high level signals it does not work for high speed sampling A Ds particularly when measuring low level signals like thermocouples or strain gage bridge outputs Unshielded wiring will pick up environmental noise causing measurement errors Shielded twisted pair signal wiring although 1t is expensive is required for these measurements unless an even more expensive amplifier at the signal source or individual A D at the source is used Generally the shield
257. f the VT1419A are involved in each phase of the control sequence Here the important things to note about this diagram are e All algorithm referenced input channel values are stored in the Channel Input Buffer Input Phase BEFORE algorithms are executed during the Calculate Phase e The execution of all defined algorithms Calculate Phase is complete BEFORE output values from algorithms stored in the Channel Output Buffer are used to update the output channel hardware during the Output Phase 114 Chapter 4 Operating Sequence The Algorithm Language and Environment PHASE 1 PHASE 3 PHASE 2 INPUT CALCULATE UPDATE State 8 Digital Frequency O Totalize 16 SCPs Update Queue Global Variables For Variables and A Algorithms 8 Analog 8 Input 7 main function SCP Update Queue 9 eu um driver generated ds edes and o gt orithms e e Buffer 3 5 1100 1163 Voltage 5 D E Resistance Analog 2 l Temp Input fE lt Conversion Local Variables 1 Strain SCP 5 E g ALG1 in HA e Algorithm Inn 8 8 Code TT Analog Input 7 64 Channel SCP Scan List Voltage 8 Current Value Table Current elements 10 511 Output Channel Buffer 0100 0163 State 8 Pulses Digital FIFO PWM 1 0 FM SCPs 64K Values PHASE
258. ference junction panel in the Reference Temperature Register The value is applied to all subsequent thermocouple channel measurements so there is no need to use SENS REF CHANNELS when using SENS REF TEMP 64 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels To specify the temperature of a controlled temperature reference panel SENS REF TEMP 50 reference temp 30 C Now begin scan to measure thermocouples Linking Strain Strain measurements usually employ a Strain Completion and Excitation SCP Measurements VT1506A VT1507A VT1511A To link channels to strain EU conversions send the SENSe FUNCtion STRain lt bridge_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt e lt bridge_type gt is not a parameter but is part of the command syntax The following table relates the command syntax to bridge type See the VT1506A VT1507A and VT1511A SCPs user s manuals for bridge schematics and field wiring information Command Bridge Type FBENding Full Bending Bridge FBPoisson Full Bending Poisson Bridge FPOission Full Poisson Bridge HBENding Half Bending Bridge HPOisson Half Poisson Bridge QUARter Quarter Bridge Default e The ch list parameter specifies which sense SCP channel s to link to the strain EU conversion lt ch_list gt does not specify channels on the VT1506A 07A Strain Bridge Completion SCPs but does specify one of the lo
259. figuring the transition 91 Fixed width pulses at variable frequency FM 70 Fixing the problem 102 Flash Memory 368 Flash memory access disabling 21 Flash memory limited lifetime 211 Floating point as integer 127 FM STATe SOURce FM STATe 285 FM STATe SOURce FM STATe 286 Format Common Command 178 SCPI Command 178 Format specifying the data 75 FORMat DATA 229 FORMat DATA 230 Formats ALG DEFINE s three data 117 FREQuency INPut FILT FREQ 234 SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency 271 Frequency function 67 Frequency setting algorithm execution 86 Frequency setting filter cutoff 57 FREQuency INP FILT FREQ 235 Function frequency 67 Function setting input 67 Function static state CONDition 67 69 Function the main 108 Function totalizer 67 Functions and statements intrinsic abs expression 124 interrupt 113 124 max expressionl expression2 124 min expressionl expression2 124 writeboth expression cvt element 124 writecvt expression cvt element 112 124 writefifo expression 113 124 Functions calling user defined 114 Functions linking output channels to 66 Functions setting output 69 Functions 124 G Gain channel 311 GAIN INPut GAIN 237 GAIN INP GAIN 237 Gains setting SCP 56 GFACtor SENSe STRain GFACtor 280 SENSe STRain GFACtor 280 Global variable definition 73 Global variables 128 accessing 111 defining 111 Glossary 367 369 Grounding Noise due to in
260. filters are enabled ON To disable or re enable individual or all channels use the INP FILT ON OFF lt ch_list gt command For example to program filters for channels 56 and 57 off send INP FILT STAT Off 156 157 Setting the VT1505A The Current Source SCP supplies excitation current for resistance type and VT1518A Current measurements These include resistance and temperature measurements using Source SCPs resistance temperature sensors The commands to control the VT1505A Current Source and VT1518A Resistance Measurement SCPs are OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt and OUTPut CURRent STATe lt enable gt e The lt amplitude gt parameter sets the current output level It is specified in units of amps dc and can take on the values 30e 6 or MIN and 488e 6 or MAX Select 488 wA for measuring resistances of less than 8 000 Q Select 30 wA for resistances of 8 000 Q and above e The lt ch_list gt parameter specifies the Current Source SCP channels that will be set To set channels 40 and 41 to output 30 wA and channels 42 and 43 to output 488 uA OUTP CURR 30 e 6 140 141 OUTP CURR 488e 6 142 143 separate command per output level Chapter 3 57 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels Notes Setting the VT1511A Strain Bridge SCP Excitation Voltage NOTE Linking Channels to EU Conversion 1 The OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude co
261. fined Functions for background information The lt range gt and lt offset gt parameters define the allowable input values to the function domain If values input to the function are equal to or outside of lt range gt lt offset gt the function may return INF in IEEE 754 format For example lt range gt 8 8 to 8 lt offset gt 12 The allowable input values must be greater than 4 and less than 20 The lt func_data gt parameter is a 512 element array of type uint16 The algorithm syntax for calling is function name expression for example 0136 squareroot 2 Input_val Functions must be defined before defining algorithms that reference them When Accepted Before INIT only Usage ALG FUNC DEF F1 8 12 lt block data send range offset and table values for function Fl ALGorithm OUTPut DELay Parameters ALGorithm OUTPut DELay lt delay gt sets the delay from Scan Trigger to start of output phase Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units delay numeric float32 0 0 081 AUTO 2 5 us resolution seconds Comments The algorithm output statements e g O136 Out val DO NOT program outputs when they are executed Instead these statements write to an intermediate Output Channel Buffer which 1s read and used for output AFTER all algorithms have executed AND the algorithm output delay has expired see Figure 6 1 Also no
262. g table relates the command syntax to bridge type See the user s manual for the optional Strain SCP for bridge schematics and field wiring information Command Bridge Type FBENding Full Bending Bridge FBPoisson Full Bending Poisson Bridge FPOisson Full Poisson Bridge HBENding Half Bending Bridge HPOisson Half Poisson Bridge QUARter Quarter Bridge default Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric flt32 see comments V de ch_list channel list string 1320 163 none Comments Strain measurements require the use of Bridge Completion Signal Conditioning Plug Ons Bridge Completion SCPs provide the strain measurement bridges and their excitation voltage sources lt ch list gt specifies the voltage sensing channels that are to measure the bridge outputs Measuring channels on a Bridge Completion SCP only returns that SCP s excitation source voltage The range parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V de 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range Ifa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates an error Specifying O selects the lowest range 0 0625 V
263. g Algorithms page 85 Setting Algorithm Execution Frequency page 86 e Using the Status System 0 2 esee eese page 88 e VT1419A Background Operation 0 00005 page 94 e Updating the Status System and VXI Interrupts page 95 e Creating and Loading Custom EU Tables page 96 e Compensating for System Offsets ooo ooooooomo o page 97 e Detecting Open Transducers 0 ce eee ee ee page 100 e More on Auto Ranging 0 0 0 erranera page 101 e Settling Characteristics 1 0 0 0 cece eee ee page 101 Chapter 3 47 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction This section describes how the VT1419A gathers input data executes its C algorithms and sends its output data Figure 3 1 shows a simplified functional block diagram Trigger Timer Voltage Digital Signal Processor DSP Voltage Trigger System REEL Input Buffer Output Buffer 1100 1163 O100 O163 Digital State A24 Program Data Memory Output Temperature System Resistance Strain sados Indu 6ojeuy Jexejdninig Bojeuy Sd9S Indino Bojeuy Sample Hold Current Static States Frequency Global Data static float profile 100 main Pulse per Trigger Totalize t Main Program if State 1 alg1 Pu
264. g conditions Additionally programming the card has been made very easy to understand The C programming language was chosen to write user programs because this language is already considered the industry standard Choosing C allows algorithms to be written on PC s or UNIX workstations that have C compilers so they can be debugged before execution on the card The VT1419A also provides good debugging tools that permits worst case execution speed to be determined variables to be monitored while running and selective enabling disabling any of the VT1419A s 32 algorithms VXI Technology uses a limited and simplified version of C since most applications need only basic operations add subtract multiply divide scalar variables arrays and programming constructs The programming constructs are limited to if then else to allow conditional evaluation and response to input changes Since all algorithms have an opportunity to execute after each time base trigger the if then else constructs permit conditional skipping of cycle intervals so that some code segments or algorithms can execute at multiples of the cycle time instead of every cycle Looping constructs such as for or while are purposely left out of the language so that user programs are deterministic Note that looping is not really needed for most applications since the cycle interval execution via the trigger system of every algorithm has inherent repeat looping With no language loo
265. gain of 8 range must be set no lower than 1 V dc or an input out of range condition will exist If an A D reading is greater than the lt table range specified with DIAG CUSTOM PIEC an overrange condition will occur If no custom table has been loaded for the channels specified with SENS FUNC CUST an error will be generated when an INIT command is given When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands DIAG CUST RST Condition all custom EU tables erased Usage program must put table constants into array table block DIAG CUST LIN 1 table block 116 123 send table to VT1419A for chs 16 23 SENS FUNC CUST 1 116 123 link custom EU with chs 16 23 INITiate then TRIGger module 268 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence Parameters Comments Usage SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels with the custom Engineering Unit Conversion table loaded with the DIAG CUST PIECE command Measurements from a channel linked with SENS FUNC CUST REF will result in a temperature that is sent to the Reference Temperature Register This command is used to measure the temperature of an isothermal reference panel using custom characterized RTDs or thermistors Contact a VXI Technology System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for specific applications Parameter Parameter Ran
266. ge 123 ODGETatOfS air oda page 123 Intrinsic Functions and Statements page 124 Program Flow Control s ossessi troia cee eee ee eee page 124 Data Types cansa sys memet teow eco do das page 125 Data Structures 1v ad atra CE ems page 126 Type Float as Integer 0 0 0 0 cece ee eens page 127 Bitheld ACCESS susi iii ida page 127 e Language Syntax Summary 00000000 s page 129 e Program Structure and Syntax o ocoocoococccocooco o page 133 Chapter 4 105 The Algorithm Language and Environment Overview of the Algorithm Language Overview of the Algorithm Language The VT1419A s Algorithm Language is a limited version of the C programming language Itis designed to provide the necessary control constructs and algebraic operations to support measurement and control algorithms There are no loop constructs multi dimensional arrays or transcendental functions Further an algorithm must be completely contained within a single function subprogram ALGn The algorithm can not call another user written function subprogram It is important to note that while the VT1419A s Algorithm Language has a limited set of intrinsic arithmetic operators 1t also provides the capability to call special user defined functions f x The Agilent VEE example programs fn 1419 vee and eufn1419 vee in Chapter 5 will convert functions into piece wise linear interpolated tables and give them user
267. ge of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 see comments V dc ch list channel list string 100 163 none e See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion page 57 for more information e The range parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V dc 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range e fa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates an error Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified is auto range e If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if the expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 lt range gt must be set no lower than 1 V de or an input out of range condition will exist e The CAL command calibrates temperature channels based on Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again e Related Commands DIAG CUST PIEC SENS FUNC TEMP SENS FUNC CUST TC CAL e RST Condition all custom EU tables erased A program must p
268. ger Signal Enable Trigger Counter TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ARM Subsystem Syntax ARM IMMediate SOURce BUS EXTernal HOLD IMMediate SCP TTLTrg lt n gt SOURce ARN IMMediate ARM IMMediate arms the trigger system when the module is set to the ARM SOUR BUS or ARM SOUR HOLD mode Comments Related Commands ARM SOURCE TRIG SOUR e RST Condition ARM SOUR IMM Usage ARM IMM After INIT system is ready for trigger event ARM Same as above IMM is optional ARM SOURce ARM SOURce lt arm_source gt configures the ARM system to respond to the specified source Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units arm_source discrete string BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP none TTLTrg lt n gt Comments The following table explains the possible choices Parameter Value Source of Arm BUS ARM IMMediate EXTernal TRG signal on terminal module HOLD ARM IMMediate IMMediate The arm signal is always true continuous arming SCP SCP Trigger Bus future SCP Breadboard TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines n 0 through 7 e See note about ARM subsystem on page 204 e When TRIG SOURCE is TIMER an ARM event is required only to trigger the first scan After that the timer continues to run and the module goes to the Waiting For Trigger State ready for the next Timer trigger An ABORT c
269. ges The nature of the tri filar transformer or more accurately common mode inductor is that it provides a fairly high impedance to common mode signals and a quite low impedance to differential mode signals The ratio of common mode impedance to differential mode impedance for the transformer used is 3500 1 Thus there is NO differential mode bandwidth penalty incurred by using the tri filar transformers 376 Appendix D Appendix E Generating User Defined Functions Introduction The VT1419A Multifunction Measurement and Control Module has a limited set of mathematical operations such as add subtract multiply and divide Many control applications require functions such a square root for calculating flow rate or a trigonometric function to correctly transition motion of an actuator from a start to ending position In order to represent a sine wave or other transcendental functions one could use a power series expansion to approximate the function using a finite number of algebraic expressions Since the above mentioned operations can take from 1 5 us to 4 us for each floating point calculation a complex waveform such as sine x could take more than 100 us to get the desired result A faster solution is desirable and available The VT1419A provides a solution to approximating such complex waveforms by using a piece wise linearization of virtually any complex waveform The technique is simple The CD ROM supplied with the VT1
270. ggers The default 10 ms interval of the scan trigger is also used in Agilent VEE s strip chart object So if the Cycle Time is left set to 10 ms and the Step size is left to 10 ms the strip chart data will represent the actual data acquisition time If the Cycle Time is modified the Step on the strip chart should also be modified Unfortunately the Step is not one that can be modified by adding an input terminal to the object It can however be modified in real time with a keyboard entry Keep in mind that the new step value will be assumed for all previous data too Therefore it s best to select a rate program the Step value and then RUN the Agilent VEE example for the most accurate results Chapter 5 165 VEE Programming Examples Modification of Variables and Arrays Modification of Variables and Arrays updt1419 vee This program operates stand alone This example shows how operator interaction with running algorithms takes place and how to download changes for both scalar and array variables ELO Trace IA volts 21 l m a Ch100 6 amp 2 100 Auto Scale samples 107 0000 Routine to control analog output values 0001 static float waveform 100 offset i inc 1 0002 0132 waveform i offset 0003 i i inc 0004 if i gt 99 i 0
271. gned to the variable a No surprises so far Now analyze this statement a 3 4 12 Again the translator simplifies the expression by performing the integer divide for 3 4 This results in the integer value 0 being multiplied by 12 which results in the float constant 0 0 being assigned to the variable a at run time This is obviously not what was desired but is exactly what the algorithm instructed These subtle problems can be avoided by specifically including a decimal point in decimal constants where an integer operation is not desired For example either of the constants in the division above were made into a float constant by including a decimal point the translator would have promoted the other constant toa float value and performed a float divide operation resulting in the expected 0 75 12 or the value 9 0 So the statement a 3 4 12 cc gt will result in the value float 9 0 being assigned to the variable a The Static Modifier All VT11419A variables local or global must be declared as static An example static float gain var integer var deriv var three vars declared In C local variables that are not declared as static lose their values once the function completes The value of a local static variable remains unchanged between calls to an algorithm Treating all variables this way allows an algorithm to remember its previous state The static variable is local in scope but o
272. gorith MS module is triggered When disabled the algorithm will not execute NOTE The command ALG STATE lt alg name gt ON OFF does not take effect until an ALG UPDATE command is received This allows multiple ALG STATE commands to be sent with a synchronized effect Chapter 3 85 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Example Command Sequence Setting Algorithm Execution Frequency To enable ALG1 and ALG2 and disable ALG3 and ALG4 ALG STATE ALG1 ON enable algorithm ALGI ALG STATE ALG2 ON enable algorithm ALG2 ALG STATE ALG3 OFF disable algorithm ALG3 ALG STATE ALG4 OFF disable algorithm ALG4 ALG UPDATE changes take effect at next update phase The ALGorithm SCAN RATio lt alg_ name gt lt num_trigs gt command sets the number of trigger events that must occur before the next execution of algorithm lt alg_name gt For ALG3 to execute only every twenty triggers send ALG SCAN RATIO ALG3 20 followed by an ALG UPDATE command ALG3 would then execute on the first trigger after INIT then the 21st then the 41st etc This can be useful to adjust the response time of one algorithm relative to others The RST default for all algorithms is to execute on every trigger event Example Command Sequence This example command sequence puts together all of the steps discussed so far in this chapter RST Reset the module Setting up Signal Conditioning only for programmable SCPs in pos
273. gramming language as the VT1419A s Algorithm Language is based on C Following the tutorial sections of this chapter is an Algorithm Language Reference The contents of this chapter are e Overview of the Algorithm Language page 106 e The Algorithm Execution Environment page 108 Accessing the VT1419A s Resources 0 000 page 109 Accessing I O Channels 00000 e eens page 110 Defining and Accessing Global Variables page 111 Determining First Execution 0 0 00 eese page 111 Initializing Variables 0 0 0 cece ee eee page 112 Sending Data to the CVT and FIFO page 112 Setting a VXIbus Interrupt 2 0 0 000 page 113 Calling User Defined Functions 0 page 114 e Operating Sequence 0 cee eens page 114 e Defining Algorithms ALG DEF 0 5 page 116 e A Very Simple First Algorithm 00200 page 120 e Non Control Algorithms 0 0 00 e cee eee eee page 121 Data Acquisition Algorithm 0 0 00 000 page 121 Process Monitoring Algorithm 0204 page 121 e Algorithm Language Reference 0 5 page 122 Standard Reserved Keywords 0000 000s page 122 Special VT1419A Reserved Keywords page 122 Identifiers ardid RU page 122 Special Identifiers for Channels oooo o oo ooo pa
274. gt When scanned the resultant value is stored in the Reference Temperature Register and by default the FIFO and CVT This is a resistance temperature measurement and uses the on board 122 uA current source The reference junction temperature value generated by scanning the reference channel is stored in the Reference Temperature Register This reference temperature 1s used to compensate all subsequent thermocouple measurements until the register 1s overwritten by another reference measurement or by specifying a constant reference temperature with the SENSE REF TEMP command Ifused the reference junction channel must be scanned before any thermocouple channels Use the SENSE REF CHANNELS command to place the reference measuring channel into the scan list ahead of the thermocouple measuring channels Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete string THERmistor RTD CUSTom none sub type numeric float32 for THER use 5000 ohm numeric float32 for RTD use 85 92 none for CUSTom use 1 none range numeric float32 see comments V de ch_list channel list string 100 163 none Comments See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion on page 57 for more information e The lt range gt parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V de 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc r
275. h reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOD follow the last reading C SCPI type is string array Chapter 6 229 VT1419A Command Reference FORMat NOTE TST leaves the instrument in its power on reset state This means that the ASC 7 data format is set even if it was set to something else before executing TST If it is necessary to read the FIFO for test information set the format after TST and before reading the FIFO e Related Commands SENSe DATA FIFO SENSe DATA CVTable MEMory subsystem and FETCh Also see how DIAG IEEE can modify REAL 32 returned values e RST Condition ASCII 7 e After RST Power on each channel location in the CVT contains the IEEE 754 value Not a number NaN Channel readings which are a positive overvoltage return IEEE INF and a negative overvoltage return IEEE INF The NaN INF and INF values for each format are shown in the following table Format IEEE Term Value Meaning ASCii INF 9 9E37 Positive Overload INF 9 9E37 Negative Overload NaN 9 91E37 No Reading REAL 32 INF 7F800000 6 Positive Overload INF FF800000 Negative Overload NaN TFFFFFFF 6 No Reading REAL 64 INF 7FF000 00 6 Positive Overload INF FFF000 00 6 Negative Overload NaN TERRE No Reading PACK ed 64 INF 47D2 9EAD 3677 AF6F Positive Overload 9 0E37 0 INF C7D2 9EAD 3677 AF
276. he Agilent VEE example program swap1419 vee shows how to swap algorithms while the module is running See Chapter 5 page 168 Chapter 4 119 The Algorithm Language and Environment A Very Simple First Algorithm A Very Simple First Algorithm This section shows how to create and download an algorithm that simply sends the value of an input channel to a CVT element It includes an example application program that configures the VT1419A downloads defines the algorithm starts and then communicates with the running algorithm Writi ng the The most convenient method of creating an algorithm is to use a text editor or word Al gorith Im Processor to input the source code Example algorithm that calculates 4 Mx B values upon signal that sync 1 Your application sets sync with the SCPI command ALG SCALAR M and B terms are also set by application program static float M B x sync if First loop sync 0 if sync 1 writecvt M x B writecvt M x B 11 writecvt M x B 2 12 writecvt 2 M x B 13 sync 2 Runni ng the The supplied Agilent VEE example program temp1419 vee shows how to load Algorithm and run algorithms See Chapter 5 page 149 120 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Non Control Algorithms Non Control Algorithms Data Acq uisition The VT1419A s Algorithm Language includes intrinsic functions to write values to Alg orithm the CVT
277. he VT1419A Multifunction Settling Characteristics resolution drops to around 31 uV per LSB so the stray capacitances discharging after the 15 5 volt measurement are now only one sixteenth as significant and thus reduce any required settling delay Of course for most thermocouple measurements a gain of 64 can be used with the Range Amplifier set to the 4 volt range At this setting the A D resolution for one LSB drops to about 122 uV and further reduces or removes any need for additional settling delay This improvement is accomplished without any reduction of the overall measurement resolution NOTE Filter amplifier SCPs can provide improvements in low level signal measurements that go beyond just settling delay reduction Amplifying the input signal at the SCP allows using less gain at the Range Amplifier higher range for the same measurement resolution Since the Range Amplifier has to track signal level changes from the multiplexer at up to 100 kHz its bandwidth must be much higher than the bandwidth of individual filter amplifier SCP channels Using higher SCP gain along with lower Range Amplifier gain can significantly increase normal mode noise rejection Adding Settling Delay This method adds settling time only to individual problem measurements as for Specific Channels opposed to the SAMPle TIMer command that introduces extra time for all analog input channels If problems are seen on only a few channels use the SENS CHAN SETTLING
278. hecking for open transducers To enable or disable Open Transducer Detection use the DIAGnostic OTDetect lt enable gt lt ch_list gt command e The lt enable gt parameter can specify ON or OFF e An SCP is addressed when the lt ch_list gt parameter specifies a channel number contained on the SCP The first channel on each SCP is 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 and 56 To enable Open Transducer Detection on all channels on SCPs 1 and 3 DIAG OTD ON 100 116 0 is on SCP 1 and 16 is on SCP3 To disable Open Transducer Detection on all channels on SCPs 1 and 3 DIAG OTD OFF 100 116 More On Auto Ranging There are rare circumstances where an input signal can be difficult for the VT1419A to auto range correctly The module completes the range selection based on the input signal about 6 us before the actual measurement is made on that channel If during that period the signal becomes greater than the selected range can handle the module will return an overflow reading INFinity The only solution to this problem is to use manual range on channels that display this behavior Settling Characteristics Background Some sequences of input signals as determined by their order of appearance in a scan list can be a challenge to measure accurately This section is intended to help determine if a system presents any of these problems and how best to eliminate them or reduce their affect While the VT1419A can auto range meas
279. here is a digital output channel at 156 Figure 5 1 illustrates the necessary wiring connections for this and the other VT1419A Agilent VEE examples Of particular interest here is that the thermocouple is placed at a channel less than the reference junction channel Since the VT1419A s C compiler sorts all channels in numerical order for scanning by the A D at runtime that assignment must be overridden with the SENS REF CHAN command as illustrated in Link Engineering Units so that the reference channel is scanned BEFORE the thermocouple channel that needs the reference junction compensation Chapter 5 149 VEE Programming Examples Programming Model Example The VT1419A Algorithms are written inside Agilent VEE text boxes as a one dimension array of text lines The Define Globals and Algorithms blocks show how these text boxes are downloaded into the VT1419A This makes VT1419A C program development very easy Note that there are two Agilent VEE threads of operation as indicated by the two START icons This means that proper operation will only take place if the Agilent VEE RUN button is pressed The Interrupt Handler simply waits for the interrupt routine in the VT1419A to execute and assert the VT1419A s VXI interrupt line The Interrupt Handler is simply monitoring the out of bound condition of the card If the card indicates the temperature of the thermocouple rises above 30 C an interrupt is generated The interrupt is re en
280. i it lia lios 244 OUT P 245 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitUdE oooooocococr eee 245 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude o oooococococco een 246 OUTPut CURRent STATe ooooooocooooo n 247 OUTPut CURRent S TATe 3 2 ien ap ERR IIR AD p RESET ES nies 247 OUTPuUuCPOLDAriys tnu A e ees oa Rd ii 248 OUTPut POLarnty alc o des aid aca bip dd O edge e 248 OUTPUt SHUNE iaa va Rus aia a 248 OUTPut SHUN o a ia dt 249 OUTP t ITILITE SOURCE rose a aia s 249 OUTPut TTL Trg SOURGe ss ars ciencia mre Rete de a ea de ci 250 OUTPutlTLire lt n gt S EA Te coda Re erm le kta 250 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 0 ccc III me 251 618051505 dc oi 251 Contents OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude seiak ornano iie teenies 252 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude 0 eee ccc eee eee eens 252 ROU Te i fred TRE BOR ONU RUNE RE EE 254 ROUTe SEQuence DEFME dai iria 254 ROUTe SEQuence POINts o o ooooocooocoo rr 255 SAMPLE it Ae gn aa 256 SAM Phe TIMER ai A a nda 256 SAMPle TlMer 00 ai 256 SENS a e is iaa 258 SENSe CHANneESETThlmng 1i user A pcs y 9 AR Re 259 SENSe CHANnel SETTling 2 0 2 0 e n ER EEE EE EO teen eens 260 SENSe DATA CU Table asa aaa daere a e eS duree ee roe one 260 SENSe DATA CVTable RESet 0 00 0000 ccc nnn 261 SENSe DATA FIFO ALL Po fg epa dai See and te and nO 261 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt 00 0 t etn ne nee 262 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF 0 00 e 263 SENSe DATA FIFO HALE ones
281. ic digital levels 324 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference Command Quick Reference SCPI Command Quick Reference Command Description PULSe lt ch_list gt Configures channels to output digital pulse s SQUare lt ch_list gt Configures channels to output 50 50 duty cycle digital pulse train PULM STATe 1 0 ON OFF lt ch_list gt Configure digital channels to output pulse width modulated signal SSTATe lt channel gt Returns state of channels for PW modulated output PERiod lt period gt lt ch_list gt Sets pulse period for PW modulated signals PERiod lt channel gt Returns pulse period for PW modulated signals WIDTh lt width gt lt ch_list gt Sets pulse width for FM modulated signals WIDTh lt channel gt Returns pulse width setting for FM modulated signals STATus OPERation Operation Status Group Bit assignments 0 Calibrating 4 Measuring 8 Scan Complete 10 FIFO Half Full 11 algorithm interrupt CONDition Returns state of Operation Status signals ENABle lt enable_mask gt Bits set to 1 enable status events to be summarized into Status Byte ENABle Returns the decimal weighted sum of bits set in the Enable register EVENt Returns weighted sum of bits that represent Operation status events NTRansition transition mask Sets mask bits to enable pos Condition Reg transitions to Event reg NTRansition Returns positive transition mask value PTRansition transition
282. icient means of acquiring data from the VT1419A is to have its algorithms store real number results in the FIFO or CVT The algorithms use the writefifo writecvt and writeboth intrinsic functions to perform this operation as seen in Figure 3 9 Chapter 3 81 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Retrieving Algorithm Data Note CVT 0 9 unavailable writecvt lt expr gt 10 writecvt lt expr gt 13 writeboth lt expr gt 14 bb writefifo lt expr gt CVT 511 Current Value Table CVT 502 Elements eoo 65 024 elements eoo First in First Out Data Buffer FIFO Figure 3 9 Writing Algorithm Data to FIFO and CVT Note that the first ten elements of the CVT are unavailable These are used by the driver for internal data retrieval However all algorithms have access to the remaining 502 elements Data is retrieved from the CVT with DATA CVT 10 12 14 67 The format of data coming from the CVT is determined by the FORMat command The FIFO can store up to 65 024 real numbers Each writefifo or writeboth cause that expression to be placed into the FIFO With a FIFO this large many seconds worth of data can be stored dependent upon the volume of writes and the trigger cycle time The FIFO s most valuable service is to keep the computer from having to spend too much time acquiring data from the VT1419A This is ideal for Agilent VEE which has many other operator interactions
283. ield name Value FuncName Finradians Minimum 314199 Maximum 14199 FuncNumber fi Formula Ber First Prev Next Last RESET Must Precede This Module Algorithms Follow After This Module rge this module with your application program in order to add custom function calls to the E1419A s C language FuncName is the name you want to call the function The inimum and Maximum values are EU numbers which specify the range over which you want to define the Formula The Formula is any equation you care to use which can include irtually any VEE intrinsic function Think of the variable as the value you would pass to your new function from the E1419A s C language The FuncNumber should be from 1 32 and any other number outside of this range will cause the uilder to ignore that entry in the record array i e no function built of the TRIG MODE when using trig functions The assume TRIG MODE is set to DEGREES the program eufnl419 vee for a complete example custom EU and custom functions Figure 5 9 Custom Function Generation 156 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Custom Function Generation Figure 5 9 illustrates where this module would be integrated into a VEE application program This module must come after RESET and before any algorithm is defined that would use a function Simply pick the name of the function the domain of input value
284. ieve data SENSE DATA CVT 10 15 Chapter 3 87 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Using the Status System Using the Status System The VT1419A s Status System allows a single register the Status Byte to be polled quickly to see 1f any internal condition needs attention Figure 3 11 shows that the three Status Groups Operation Status Questionable Data and the Standard Event Groups and the Output Queue all send summary information to the Status Byte By this method the Status Byte can report many more events than its eight bits would otherwise allow Figure 3 12 shows the Status System in detail Questionable Data Group Output Queue Status Byte o po Read with M STB Group Summary Bits Operation Status Group Standard Event Group Figure 3 11 Simplified Status System Diagram 88 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Using the Status System QUESTIONABLE DATA GROUP STATus QUEStionable CONDition read only STATus QUEStionable NTR and STATus QUEStionable PTR set filters STATus QUEStionable EVENt reads clears register m STATus QUEStionable ENABle sets mask EE EE E E Lost Calibration E Logical OR Trigger Too Fast FIFO Overflowed Overvoltage VME Memory Overflow E HE JE BE Setup Changed HE DIA SARE SNNNNNSNNSNNNNNAA STATUS BYTE GROUP Enable 1 enable E Summary real time
285. il data acquisition stops or VME memory is full e Related Commands Memory subsystem and FETCH e RST Condition MEM VME STAT OFF Usage MEMORY VME STATE ON enable VME card as reading storage MEM VME STAT 0 Disable VME card as reading storage MEMory VME STATe MEMory VME STATe returned value of 0 indicates that VME reading storage is disabled Returned value of 1 indicates VME memory is enabled Comments e This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A command module e Returned Value Numeric 1 or 0 C SCPI type uint16 e Related Commands MEMory subsystem and FETCH Usage MEM VME STAT Returns 1 for enabled 0 for disabled 244 Chapter 6 OUTPut The OUTPut subsystem is involved in programming source SCPs as well as controlling the state of VXIbus TTLTRG lines 0 through 7 Subsystem Syntax OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt STATe 1 0 ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt POLarity NORMal INVerted lt ch_list gt POLarity lt channel gt SHUNt 1 0 ON OFF lt ch_list gt SHUNt lt channel gt TTLTrg SOURce TRIGger FTRigger SCPlugon LIMit SOURce TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 1 0 ON OFF STATe TYPE PASSive ACTive lt ch_list gt TYPE lt channel gt VOL Tage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt AMPLitude lt channel gt OUTPut CURRen
286. ile To view this data later run the Agilent VEE program dlgr1419 vee and specify the filename aichans as the Input Data File 146 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Calibration Calibration cal 1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is easy to merge it directly into VEE application programs to provide easy access to the calibration sequence The Agilent VEE detail view is all that is developed as illustrated in Figure 5 3 A counter in the upper right hand section of the detail gives the number of seconds elapsed so it can be determined if progress is being made This program performs a CAL and CAL STORE ADC to perform a complete calibration of the VT1419A card Any errors detected are displayed so that the exact channels in question can be identified Calibration may take from 3 to 10 or more minutes to occur depending upon the number and type of SCPs loaded Calibration should be performed whenever SCP s are moved or added After turn ON wait 1 hour for the VT1419A to reach temperature stabilization before performing calibration Start Configure SCP s This example can be merged directly into your application program to provide calibration of the El419A card and its Signal Conditioning Plug ons Any error messages generated during CAL will be reflected and channel related errors will be displayed Figure 5 3 Calibration Detail View Chap
287. ill be executed from space 1 and so on Note that swap size gt must be large enough to contain the original executable code derived from lt source code gt and any subsequent replacement for it or an error 3085 Algorithm too big will be generated If lt swap size gt is not included the VT1419A will allocated just enough memory for algorithm lt alg_name gt Since there is no swapping buffer allocated this algorithm cannot be changed until a RST command is sent to clear all algorithms See When Accepted and Usage e The lt source code gt parameter contents can be When alg name gt is ALG through ALG32 Algorithm Language source code representing a user s algorithm ALG DEF ALGO if First loop 0136 0 0136 0136 0 01 When alg name gt is GLOBALS Algorithm Language variable declarations A variable name must not be the same as an already define user function ALG DEF GLOBALS static float my glob scalar my glob array 24 The Algorithm Language source code is translated by the VT1419 s driver into an executable form and sent to the module The lt source_code gt parameter can be one of three different SCPI types Quoted String For short segments single lines of code enclose the code string within single apostrophes or double quotes Because of string length limitations within SCPI and some programming platforms it is recommended that the quoted s
288. ill disable OTD wait 1 minute to allow channels to settle perform the calibration and then re enable OTD To keep the OTD current on while CAL TARE executes the DIAG CAL TARE OTD MODE STATE command must be used to set this configuration e The maximum voltage that CAL TARE can compensate for is dependent on the range chosen and SCP gain setting The following table lists these values Maximum CAL TARE Offsets A D range Offset V Offset V Offset V Offset V V F Scale Gain x1 Gain x8 Gain x16 Gain x64 16 3 2213 0 40104 0 20009 0 04970 4 0 82101 0 10101 0 05007 0 01220 1 0 23061 0 02721 0 01317 0 00297 0 25 0 07581 0 00786 0 00349 0 00055 0 0625 0 03792 0 00312 0 00112 n a e Channel offsets are compensated by the CAL TARE command even when not stored in the flash memory There is no need to use the CAL STORE TARE command for channels which are re calibrated frequently e The VT1419 s flash memory has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand write cycles unlimited read cycles While executing CAL STOR once every day would not exceed the lifetime of the flash memory for approximately 27 years an application that stored constants many times each day would unnecessarily shorten the flash memory s lifetime See Comments below e Executing CAL TARE sets the Calibrating bit bit 0 in Operation Status Group Executing CAL TARE resets the bit e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands CAL TARE
289. ing This response varies with date of the firmware The revision will vary with the revision of the driver software installed This is the only indication of which version of the driver is installed Learn Macros query Returns a quoted string name for each currently defined macro If more than one macro is defined the strings are separated by commas If no macro is defined LMC returns a null string Chapter 6 313 VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference OPC OPC NOTE NOTE Operation Complete Causes an instrument to set bit O Operation Complete Message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations invoked by SCPI commands have been completed By enabling this bit to be reflected in the Status Byte Register ESE 1 command synchronization between the instrument and an external computer or between multiple instruments can be ensured Do not use OPC to determine when the CAL SETUP or CAL TARE commands have completed Instead use their query forms CAL SETUP or CAL TARE Operation Complete Query Causes an instrument to place a 1 into the instrument s output queue when all pending instrument operations invoked by SCPI commands are finished By requiring the computer to read this response before continuing program execution synchronization can be ensured between one or more instruments and the computer The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 Do not use OPC to de
290. ing ON LTI REM BOARD HI On Board Current Source Ll E E Any Sense i Channel lt Lnn Figure 2 7 On Board Thermistor Connections Chapter 2 33 Field Wiring Configuring the On Board Remote Reference Jumpers Configuring the On Board Remote Reference Jumpers Figure 2 8 shows how to set the Option 12 s jumpers for on board and remote thermocouple reference temperature measurement Figure 2 2 shows the jumpers on the Option 11 Terminal Module The Thermistor is used for reference junction temperature sensing for thermocouple measurements Under Cover See figure on page 39 to remove the cover ON BOARD Place both J1 jumpers here to connect current source to on board thermistor RT1 Sense RT1 by connecting any sense channels to terminals HTS and LTS REMote Place both J1 jumpers here to route current source to terminals HTI and LTI Connect these terminals to remote thermistor or RTD Sense with any sense channel Figure 2 8 Temperature Sensing for VT1419A Terminal Module 34 Chapter 2 Considerations for Terminal Module Thermocouple Measurements Field Wiring Configuring the On Board Remote Reference Jumpers The isothermal characteristics of the Terminal Modules are crucial for good TC readings and can be affected by any of the following factors 1 2 The clear plastic cover must be on the Terminal Module
291. ing the SYST ERR query command Doing so more often may be desirable for complex sequences of commands in any particular step Power On and RST Some of the programming operations that follow may already be set after Default Settings Power ON or after an RST command Where these default settings coincide with the configuration settings required it is unnecessary to explicitly execute a command to set them These are the default settings e No algorithms are defined and therefore no channels will be scanned Programmable SCP s are configured to their Power ON defaults see the SCP s manual for these defaults All analog input channels are linked to EU conversion for voltage All non isolated digital I O channels are set to input static digital state VT1536A Isolated digital I O channels are switch configured and wake up as such Trigger subsystem set to ARM SOURCE IMM TRIG SOUR TIMER TRIG COUNT INFinite and TRIG TIMER 0 010 e FIFO CVT data returned in ASCII format e FIFO set to BLOCking mode to disallow overwriting of unread data Figure 3 4 shows a comprehensive step by step programming sequence that may be required for an application As stated earlier many of these steps need only minimal attention since the most common configurations are defaults at power ON or RST Figure 3 5 shows a block diagram of the VT1419A with the numbered programming steps and various SCPI commands associated with those steps Keep in mind that
292. ingle update request If the array is again updated the new values are loaded into the original space and the pointer is again switched e lt progname gt is not case sensitive However array name is case sensitive e Related Commands ALG DEFINE ALG ARRAY e RST Condition No algorithms or variables are defined send array values to my array in ALG4 ALG ARR ALG4 my array block array data Chapter 6 187 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm send array values to the global array glob_array ALG ARR GLOBALS glob_array lt block_array_data gt ALG UPD force update of variables ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay lt alg_name gt lt array_name gt returns the contents of lt array_name gt from algorithm lt alg_name gt ALG ARR can return contents of global arrays when lt alg_name gt specifies GLOBALS Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 GLOBALS none array_name string valid C variable name none Comments An error is generated if alg name gt or array name is not defined e Returned Value Definite length block data of IEEE 754 64 bit float ALGorithm EXPLicit DEFine ALGorithm EXPLicit DEFine lt alg_name gt lt swap_size gt lt source_code gt is used to define control algorithms and global variables Parameters Parameter Paramete
293. initialized number CVT element has not been written respectively Normal data queries for Agilent VEE do not permit these numbers to go unnoticed during a transaction Agilent VEE makes certain that valid numbers are being dealt with to avoid making calculations that can eventually cause errors Therefore any transaction that involves these numbers will cause an error in Agilent VEE and will abort the transaction To avoid this condition the VT1419A SCPI command DIAG IEEE OFF can be issued to the VT1419A to force it to never output INF or NaN The default power on or RST condition is DIAG IEEE ON so this command must be explicitly sent to avoid the condition Keep in mind that this condition ONLY occurs when selecting the FORM REAL command FORM PACKED is another Chapter 3 75 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Defining Data Storage Selecting the FIFO Mode way to avoid the numbers but that is limited to the 8 byte data format For speed use FORM REAL 32 which is only four bytes per element Agilent VEE 4 0 does include in its Main Properties the ability to detect the infinity numbers generated by IEEE 754 and to force 9 9E37 numbers but it will be more efficient to let the VT1419A keep from generating the IEEE 754 numbers The VT1419A s FIFO can operate in two modes One mode is for reading FIFO values while algorithms are executing the other mode is for reading FIFO values after algorithms have been halted A
294. ion Working Calibration The three levels are described below see Figure 6 3 N A D Zero This function quickly compensates for any short term A D converter offset drift This would be called the auto zero function in a conventional voltmeter In the VT1419A where channel scanning speed is of primary importance this function is performed only when the CAL ZERO command is executed Execute CAL ZERO as often as the control setup will allow Channel Calibration This function corrects for offset and gain errors for each module channel The internal current sources are also calibrated This calibration function corrects for thermal offsets and component drift for each channel out to the input side of the Signal Conditioning Plug On SCP All calibration sources are on board and this function is invoked using either the CAL or CAL SETup command Channel Tare This function CAL TARE corrects for voltage offsets in external system wiring Here the user places a short across transducer wiring and the voltage that the module measures is now considered the new zero value for that channel The new offset value can be stored in non volatile calibration memory CAL STORE TARE but is in effect whether stored or not System offset constants which are considered long term should be stored Offset constants which are measured relatively often would not require non volatile storage CAL TARE automatically
295. ion current controlling voltage and controlling current Digital SCPs are available to both read and write digital states read frequency and counts and output modulated pulse signals FM and PWM This term applies to algorithms that are enabled to swap These algorithms can be exchanged with another of the same name while the original is running The new algorithm becomes active after an update command is sent This new algorithm may again be swapped with another and so on This capability allows changing algorithm operation without stopping and leaving this and perhaps other processes without control The screw terminal blocks the system field wiring is connected to The terminal blocks are inside the Terminal Module The plastic encased module which contains the terminal blocks the field wiring is connected to The Terminal Module then is plugged into the VT1419A s front panel Appendix C Glossary Update Update Queue User Function This is an intended change to an algorithm algorithm variable or global variable that is initiated by one of the commands ALG SCALAR ALG ARRAY ALG DEFINE ALG SCAN RATIO or ALG STATE This change or update is considered to be pending until an update command is received Several updates can be sent to the Update Queue waiting for an update command to cause them to take effect synchronously The update commands are ALG UPDATE and ALG UPD CHANNEL A list of scalar varia
296. irmware evisions of the El419A and checks each SCP slot for its contents ou can merge this module into your final VEE program to help rovide quick operator information HEWLETT PACKARD E1419A 1419A00001 a 04 00 HEWLETT PACKARD E1419A 1419A00001 A 04 00 Wed Apr 2 10 29 32 MST 1997 From fi oo Thru 156 step E Slot 100 HEWLETT PACKARD E1501A 8 Channel Straight Through SCP 0 0 Slot 108 HEWLETT PACKARD E1501A 8 Channel Straight Through ScP 0 0 Slot 116 HEWLETT PACKARD E1501A 8 Channel Straight Through SCP 0 0 Slot 124 HEWLETT PACKARD E1501A 8 Channel Straight Through SCP 0 0 Slot 132 HEWLETT PACKARD E1531A 8 Channel Voltage Output SCP 0 0 Slot 140 0 No SCP at this Address 0 0 Slot 148 0 No SCP at this Address 0 0 Slot 156 HEWLETT PACKARD E1533A Digital I O SCP 0 0 Figure 5 7 Configuration Display Detail View Chapter 5 153 VEE Programming Examples Engineering Unit Conversion Engineering Unit Conversion eu_1419 vee This program is designed to be merged into an application program It provides all the necessary objects to build custom EU table conversion on any of the VT1419A s 64 input channels The program eufn1419 vee demonstrates how to use this module The Agilent VEE programming necessary to build the tables is somewhat complex and beyond the scope of this text In fact there is an additional program written in C that is called by this module pc eu exe Both the source
297. is a leading zero and o is an octal digit No decimal point or exponent specified 32 bit hexadecimal integer OXhhh or Oxhhh where his a hex digit 32 bit floating point ddd ddd ddd dddetdd dddE dd ddd dddedd or ddd dddEdd where d is a decimal digit Flow Control conditional construct if else Intrinsic Functions Return absulute value abs lt expr gt Return minimum min lt exprl gt lt expr2 gt Return maximum max lt expr gt lt expr2 gt User defined function user name lt expr gt Write value to CVT element writecvt lt expr gt lt expr gt Write value to FIFO buffer writefifo lt expr gt Write value to both CVT and FIFO writeboth lt expr gt lt expr gt Here are examples of some Algorithm Language elements assembled to show how they are used in context Later sections will explain any unfamiliar elements seen here Example 1 get input from channel 8 calculate output check limits output to ch 40 amp 41 static float output_max 020 20 mA max output static float output_min 004 4 mA min output static float input_val output_val intermediate I O vars input val_ 1108 get value from input buffer channel 8 output_val 12 5 input_val calculate desired output if output_val gt output_max check output greater than limit output_val output_max if so output max limit else if output_val lt output_min
298. is made positive and divided by 2 See the documentation on this rogram for a complete description 0 No error Figure 5 10 Custom EU Function Example Detailed View This program illustrates how to generate a sine wave from a custom function that is then used to program an analog output The analog output channel 132 is assumed wired to analog input channels 100 and 101 Channel 101 is the straight voltage from channel 132 and channel 100 is the same voltage but processed by the EU conversion formula for channel 100 as defined in the CustomEUDeclarationArray The EU conversion formula simply takes the voltage read from channel 100 takes its absolute value and divides it by 2 Notice that the domain of the sin radians function is limited to 0 6 3 which represent a 0 2 PI interval Each time the algorithm executes it writes the new value of 0132 based upon the sin radians function with the passed parameter inc The inc parameter is incremented once for each trigger since each trigger 158 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Custom EU Function Example causes the algorithm to execute When inc exceeds 6 3 it is set back to 0 Also note that the analog input voltages are sent to the FIFO after each trigger The object Collect Data retrieves the voltage pairs and assembles them into a 2 dimension array which is then separated by Get Channel 100 and Get Channel 101 The results are pass
299. is set to 0 the module returns values as 9 9E37 for INF and 9 91E37 for NAN e Related Commands DIAG IEEE e RST Condition DIAG IEEE 1 Usage Set IEEE mode DIAG IEEE 1 INF values returned in IEEE standard DIAGnostic IEEE DIAGnostic IEEE returns the currently set IEEE mode Comments The C SCPI type is int16 e Related Commands DIAG IEEE e RST Condition DIAG IEEE 1 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe intr line sets the VXIbus interrupt line the module will use Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units intr line numeric int16 O through 7 none Chapter 6 223 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic Comments Related Commands DIAG INT LINE e Power on and RST Condition DIAG INT LINE 1 Usage DIAG INT LINE 5 Module will interrupt on VXIbus interrupt line 5 DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe DIAGnostic INTerrupt LINe returns the V XIbus interrupt line that the module is set to use Comments Returned Value Numeric 0 through 7 The C SCPI type is int16 e Related Commands DIAG INT LINE Usage DIAG INT Enter statement will return 0 through 7 DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables and disables the VT1419 s Open Transducer Detection capability OTD When Open Transducer Detection is enabled a very high impedance path connects all SCP channels to a
300. is to perform Curve Fitting and EU Generation regr1419 vee This program operates stand alone It shows how the Agilent VEE regression tools can be used to generate a polynomial equation to fit volts and pressure The generated equation can then be used in the eu_1419 vee module for converting volts to pressure during data acquisition of the VT1419A Interrupt Handling intr1419 vee This program operates stand alone This is an example program that shows how to create multiple threads of operation in Agilent VEE to respond to a FIFO half full interrupt It teaches the concept of interrupt driven programming The example temp1419 vee also incorporates a slightly different version of interrupt processing that can enhance Ino EET About This Chapter page 154 page 158 page 160 page 161 Chapter 5 141 VEE Programming Examples About This Chapter VT1419A Simple Data Logger dlgr1419 vee This program operates stand alone It illustrates how to configure the VT1419A to collect data store that data into its FIFO and retrieve that data for display on a strip chart and optional logging to a file This program can also be used to read the stored data file aichans generated by the pan 1419 vee example or it can be used to observe previously stored data files created with this example This example can easily be modified to a more complicated version or the needed pieces can be cut and pasted where n
301. isabling the Input Protection Feature voids the VT1419A s warranty To disable the Input Protection feature locate and cut JM2202 Make a single cut in the jumper and bend the adjacent ends apart See following illustration for location of JM2202 Disabling Flash The Flash Memory Protect Jumper JM2201 is shipped in the PROG position It Memory Access is recommended that the jumper be left in this position so that all of the calibration a commands can function Changing the jumper to the protect position prevents the Optional following from being executed e The SCPI calibration command CAL STORE ADC TARE e The register based calibration commands STORECAL and STORETAR e Any application that installs firmware updates or makes any other modification to flash memory through the A24 window With the jumper in the PROG position one or more VT1419As can be completely calibrated without being removed from the application system A VT1419A calibrated in its working environment will in general be better calibrated than 1f 1t were calibrated separate from its application system The multimeter used during the periodic calibration cycle should be considered the calibration transfer standard Provide the Calibration Organization control unauthorized access to its calibration constants See the V7 415A VT1419A Service Manual for complete information on VT1419A periodic calibration If access to the VT1419A s calibration constants mu
302. ist string 132 163 none Comments If the channels specified do not support this function an error will be generated e Related Commands INPut POLarity OUTPut POLarity e RST Condition OUTP POL NORM for all digital channels Usage OUTP POL INV 0156 invert output logic sense on channel 56 OUTPut POLarity OUTPut POLarity lt channel gt returns the polarity on the digital output channel in lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Returned Value returns one of NORM or INV The type is string OUTPut SHUNt OUTPut SHUNt lt enable gt lt ch_list gt adds shunt resistance to one leg of bridge on Strain Bridge Completion SCPs This can be used for diagnostic purposes and characterization of bridge response Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 0 1 ON OFF none ch_list channel list string 132 163 none Comments e If lt ch list gt specifies a non strain SCP a 3007 Invalid signal conditioning plug on error is generated 248 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion STRain SENSe STRain e RST Condition OUTP SHUNT 0 on all Strain SCP channels Usage OUTP SHUNT 1 148 151 add shunt resistance at channels 48 51 OU
303. it 8 9 or 10 is set error messages will be found in the Error Queue If bit 7 is set error messages will be in the error queue following the next RST or cycling of power Use the SYST ERR command to read the error s 92 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Using the Status System Bit 4 MAV There is a message available in the Output Queue Execute bit value 16 the appropriate query command Bit 5 ESB Read the Standard Event Group s Event Register using the bit value 32 ESR command This will return bit values for events which have occurred in this group After reading this status register is cleared Note that bits 2 through 5 in this group indicate error conditions If any of these bits are set error messages will be found in the Error Queue Use the SYST ERR command to read these Bit 7 OPR Read the Operation Status Group s Event Register using bit value 128 the STAT OPER EVENT command This will return bit values for events which have occurred in this group After reading the Event Register is cleared Clearing the Enable To clear the Enable Registers execute Registers STAT PRESET for Operation Status and Questionable Data Groups ESE 0 for the Standard Event Group SRE 0 for the Status Byte Group The Status Byte The Enable Register for the Status Byte Group has a special purpose Notice in Grou p s Enable Figure 3 12 how the Status Byte Summary bit wraps back around to the S
304. it two VEE hreads to begin executing Use he A B switch to move between two lgorithms You can even edit hem while VEE is running to get i diate feedback on changes Any yntax errors will be trapped 0000 static float inc 0 1 x 0 0001 0132 10 sin radians x 0002 writefifo 1100 0003 x x inc 0004 if x gt 3 14 x 0 0000 static float inc 0 1 x 0 0002 writefifo 1100 0003 x x inc 0004 if x gt 3 14 x 0 0001 0132 3 sqrt abs 10 sin_radiar Figure 5 15 Example of On the Fly Algorithm Changes Analog output channel 132 is assumed connected to analog input channel 100 for this example Rather than use a custom function to generate the sine wave Agilent VEE s function generator objects are used to generate a sine wave triangle wave and square wave There are three 100 element arrays created that will be downloaded into the VT1419A s memory dependent upon the waveform to be generated Algorithm 1 is expanded in the picture above and shows how it 168 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Algorithm Modification sequences through the array waveform to send values to the analog output With each trigger cycle Algorithm 1 executes and picks a value from the array dependent upon a counter variable i The variable inc is used to increment the counter so elements in the array can be skipped to generate a higher frequency waveform Also note in Algori
305. ith the Integer Situations VT1419A type float is all that is available This usually has to do with writing values to digital SCP channels With the VT1533A Digital I O SCP each channel two per SCP reads or writes 8 bits With the VT1534A and VT1536A SCPs each channel eight per SCP reads or writes bit Note the following behavior when sending values to digital channels e A floating point number sent to a digital channel is truncated to integer by dropping any fractional portion So the value 234 8 sent to an 8 bit channel will have the same effect as the integer value 234 The value 0 8 sent to a 1 bit channel will be evaluated as 0 The value 1 9 becomes 1 The VT1419A treats values sent to a digital channel as signed That is negative and positive values are valid For instance 1 sent toa VT1533A Digital I O channel sets all bits to one e A value sent to a digital channel that is greater than the channel s bit capacity is treated in a modulo bit width fashion For an 8 bit channel the formula is lt channel value gt MODULO 256 For example 255 sent to an 8 bit channel sets all of its bits But 256 clears all eight bits because 256 is a 9 bit value The value 257 would then set bit 0 the 8 bit value 1 One bit channels behave in the same way The formula becomes lt channel value MODULO 1 So the value 1 sent to a 1 bit channel sets the bit but the value 2 clears the bit For 1 bit channels all odd values set the bit whi
306. ition 293 CONDition STAT QUES CONDition 298 Conditional constructs 124 Conditional execution 134 Configuring programmable analog SCP parameters 56 Configuring the enable registers 91 Configuring the Reference Jumpers 34 35 Configuring the transition filters 91 Configuring the VT1419A 15 22 Connection recommended 36 38 signals to channels 36 38 Connections Guard 373 Considerations special 99 Constant octal 129 Constructs conditional 124 Continuous Mode 308 Continuously reading the FIFO FIFO mode BLOCK 83 Control program flow 124 Conversion EU 368 Conversion linking channels to EU 58 Conversions custom EU 66 Conversions custom reference temperature EU 97 Conversions custom thermocouple EU 97 COUNt SENS DATA FIFO COUNt 262 Counter setting the trigger 79 Creating and loading custom EU conversion tables 96 Creating conversion tables 97 CTYPe SYST CTYPe 303 Current Value Table SENSe DATA CVTable 260 CUSTom SENS FUNC CUSTom 268 Custom EU conversion tables creating 96 384 Index loading 96 Custom EU conversions 66 Custom EU operation 96 Custom EU tables 96 Custom reference temperature EU conversions 97 Custom thermocouple EU conversions 97 CVT SENSe DATA CVTable 260 CVT elements reading 113 CVT elements writing value to 112 CVT sending data to 112 D DATA FORMat DATA 229 FORMat DATA 230 Data acquisition algorithm 121 Data structures 126 D
307. l SETTling 259 SENSe CHANnel SETTling 260 SENSe DATA COUN HALF 263 SENSe DATA CVTable RESet 261 SENSe DATA CVTable 260 SENSe DATA FIFO ALL 261 SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt 262 SENSe DATA FIFO HALF 263 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE 264 SENSe DATA FIFO MODE 264 SENSe DATA FIFO PART 265 SENSe DATA FIFO RESet 265 SENSe FREQuency APERture 266 SENSe FREQuency APERture 267 SENSe FUNC CONDition 267 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom 268 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence 269 SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple 270 SENSe FUNCtion FREQuency 271 SENSe FUNCtion RESistance 271 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBEN 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FBP 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FPO 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain HBEN 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain QUAR 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRainHPO 272 Index 383 SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature 274 SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize 275 SENSe FUNCtion VOL Tage 276 SENSe REFerence 277 SENSe REFerence CHANnels 278 SENSe REFerence TEMPerature 279 SENSe STRain EXCitation 279 SENSe STRain EXCitation 280 SENSe STRain GFACtor 280 SENSe STRain GFACtor 280 SENSe STRain POISson 281 SENSe STRain POISson 281 SENSe STRain UNSTrained 282 SENSe STRain UNSTrained 282 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 283 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 284 SOURce subsystem 285 287 290 SOURce FM STATe 285 SOURce FM STATe 286 SOURce FUNC SHAPe CONDition 286 SOURce FUNC SHAPe PULSe 287 SOURce FUNC SHAPe SQUare 287 SOURce PULM STATe 287 SO
308. le A typical UNIX path is included for example The example uses the Agilent VEE function whichOS to determine which directory structure to use Chapter 5 157 VEE Programming Examples Custom EU Function Example Custom EU Function Example 9 in 0 63 Field name Value Channel f oo Maxvolts f 6 Formula abs vy2 First Prey Nex Last eufn1419 vee This program operates stand alone It is designed to show how easy it is to generate complicated EU conversion and Custom functions by simply entering in channel numbers function names and algebraic expressions Need to convert volts to pressure or perform a square root operation Use this program to see how easy it is to perform start 1 Volts 2 Ch100 Ch101 10 y 4 Maximum 5 3 FuncNumber Formula Ein a 1 80 PI First Prey Next Last 0000 static float inc 0 01 x 0 0132 10 sin_radians x 0002 writefifo 1100 PEU V 8 in 0 0003 writefifo 1101 v 0004 xzxinc Field name val 0005 if x gt 6 30 x 0 FuncName sin_radians Minimum o p 700 Auto Scale Samples 1004 TL hmm Program which sends a sine wave oltage output to channel 108 and reads that voltage on channels 100 P and 101 Channel 100 has a custom U equation such that any voltage read from 100
309. le Loads piecewise custom EU table Puts the contents of the Reference Temperature Register into the FIFO Sets the VXIbus interrupt line the module will use Returns the VXIbus interrupt line the module is using Controls Open Transducer Detect on SCPs contained in lt ch_list gt Returns current state of OTD on SCP containing lt channel gt Returns value from an SCP register Returns manufacturer model serial flash revision and date e g AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES E1419B US34000478 A 04 00 Wed Jul 08 11 06 22 MDT 1994 Return readings stored in VME Memory format set by FORM cmd Set format for response data from SENSe DATA Seven bit ASCII format not as fast as 32 bit because of conversion Same as REAL 64 except NaN INF and INF format compatible with Agilent BASIC IEEE 32 bit floating point requires no conversion so is fastest IEEE 64 bit floating point not as fast as 32 bit because of conversion Returns format REAL 32 REAL 64 PACK 64 ASC 7 Put module in Waiting for Trigger state ready to make one scan Control filter Signal Conditioning Plug Ons Sets the cutoff frequency for active filter SCPs Returns the cutoff frequency for the channel specified lt channel gt Sets the state of the SCP filters Return state of SCP filters Set gain for amplifier per channel SCP Returns the channel s gain setting Controls the connection of input LO on a Strain Bridge Opt 21 SCP 322 Chapter
310. le all even values clear the bit Bitfield Access The VT1419A implements bitfield syntax that allows individual bit values to be manipulated within a variable This syntax is similar to what would be done in C but doesn t require a structure declaration Bitfield syntax is supported only for the lower 16 bits bits 0 15 of simple scalar variables and channel identifiers Values read from or written to bitfields behave as integer values as described in Using Type Float in Integer Situations above Use if word_var BO word_var B3 if either bit O or bit 3 true word_var B15 1 set bit 15 NOTES 1 It is not necessary to declare a bitfield structure in order to use it In the Algorithm Language the bitfield structure is assumed to be applicable to any simple variable including channel identifiers 2 Unlike C the Algorithm Language allows both bit access and whole access to the same variable Example static float my_word_var my_word_var 255 set bits O through 7 my word var B3 0 clear bit 3 Declaration Only simple variables not array members can be initialized in the declaration Initialization statement static float my_var 2 Chapter 4 127 The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference NOTE Global Variables The initialization of the variable only occurs when the algorithm is first defined with the ALG DEF command The first time
311. llows more than one output to wire or d together e ACTive configures the digital channel bit to both source and sink current e Related Commands SOURce PULSe POLarity OUTPut TYPE e RST Condition OUTP TYPE ACTIVE for TTL compatibility Usage OUTP TYPE PASS 156 159 make channels 56 to 59 passive pull up Chapter 6 251 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut OUTPut TYPE OUTPut TYPE lt channel gt returns the output drive characteristic for a digital channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Ifthe channel specified is not on a digital SCP an error will be generated e Returned Value returns PASS or ACT The type is string e RST Condition returns ACT OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt sets the excitation voltage on programmable Strain Bridge Completion SCPs pointed to by lt ch list gt the VT1511A for example This command is not used to set output voltage on SCPs like the VT1531A Voltage Output SCP Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units amplitude numeric float32 MIN 0 1 2 5 10 MAX none ch list channel list string 132 163 none Comments To turn off excitation voltage when using external voltage so
312. lse Width Mod Frequency Mod syndu dos IenB1g sindno dos Ieybia C Algorithm Code alg1 IN A16 4 N N static float in val j Command y in_val 1100 5 3 Register j j 1 oe 0108 in_val profile j writecvt in_val 10 Current writefifo 0101 ENSEM Value 7 Table SNaIXA CVT Figure 3 1 Simplified Functional Block Diagram a Plus Multifunction The VT1419A isa complete data acquisition and control system on a single VXI card It is multifunction because it uses the Signal Conditioning Plug On SCP concept whereby analog input output and digital input output channels can be mixed to meet various application needs It is Multifunction because it has local intelligence to permit the card to run stand alone with very little interaction required with the supervisory computer The VT1419A has eight SCP slots with each SCP slot capable of addressing up to eight channels of input or output channels for a total of 64 channels The first four SCP slots which represent channels numbers 100 131 can mix and match any non programmable analog input SCP such as fixed gain fixed filter straight through etc The standard configuration of the VT1419A is four straight through VT1501A SCP s that provide high level signal input capabilities The remaining the four SCP slots can be used for any of the twenty plus analog digital SCP s available for the VT1419A which cover most data acquisition and control
313. lt upon binary boundaries e g 0 125 0 25 0 5 1 2 4 etc and since 7 2 is a number greater than 1 but less than 2 the next binary interval to include this range will be 2 Another requirement for building the table is that the waveform range MUST be centered around 0 e g symmetrical about the X axis Ifthe desired function is not defined on one side or the other of the Y axis then the table is right or left shifted by the offset from X 0 and the table values are calculated correctly but the table is built as though it were centered about the X axis For the most part the last couple of sentences can be ignored if they do not make sense The only reason its brought up here is that accuracy may suffer the farther away from the X 0 point the waveform gets unless the resolution available is understood and the amount of non linearity present in the waveform is known This will be discussed later in the Limitations section Figure E 1 shows the haversine function as stated above This type of waveform is typical of the kind of acceleration and deceleration one wants when moving an object from one point to another The desired beginning point would be the location at 7 2 and the ending point would be at 1 2 With the desired range spread over 7 2 the 128 segments are actually divided over the range of 2 Therefore the 128 Mx B line segments are divided equally on both sides of X 0 64 segments for 0 2 and 64 segments for 2 0
314. m Other tests which fail should be referred to qualified repair personnel Chapter 6 317 VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference NOTE Executing TST returns the module to its RST state RST causes the FIFO data format to return to its default of ASC 7 To read the FIFO for TST diagnostic information and have that data in a format other than ASCII 7 be certain to set the data FIFO format to the desired format FORMAT command after completion of TST but before executing a SENSE DATA FIFO query or command e The C SCPI type for this returned value is int16 e Following TST the module is placed in the RST state This returns many of the module s programmed states to their defaults See page 51 for a list of the module s default states e TST performs the following tests on the VT1419A and installed Signal Conditioning Plug Ons DIGITAL TESTS Testi Description 1 3 Writes and reads patterns to registers via A16 amp A24 4 5 Checks FIFO and CVT 6 Checks measurement complete Measuring status bit Ts Checks operation of FIFO half and FIFO full IRQ generation 8 9 Checks trigger operation ANALOG FRONT END DIGITAL TESTS Testi Description 20 Checks that SCP ID makes sense 30 32 Checks relay driver and fet mux interface with EU CPU 33 71 Checks opening of all relays on power down or input overvoltage 34 37 Check fet mux interface with A D digital ANALOG TESTS Testi Descripti
315. mand Module Driver Download 170 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Firmware Update Download Firmware Update Download flsh1419 vee This program allows the flash memory of the VT1419A to be saved and reprogrammed Updating the flash memory for the VT1419A is usually a rare occurrence but should a new revision become available the new firmware can be downloaded into the VT1419A s flash memory To safe guard against the remote chance that the new flash causes problems the program also allows the old flash memory to be saved HEWLETT PACKARD E1419A 1419A00001 A 04 00 Wed Apr 2 10 29 32 MST 1997 al aa eee File Name For Old Flash eee Done exdabundier oldflash JALG_CTL RU This program needs one Direct IO definition by the name of El419 It should refer to subaddress 03 If the E1406 HPIB is at 709 then use 70903 Loading the program has already prompted you to create this E1419 definition Please check the address value for this E1419 definition The timeout for interactions with the E1419 will be set to 30 seconds Run the program by pressing the Run button Enter the full path and name of the directory with the flash drivers as in c dabundle or users me dabundle no entry current directory Enter a file name for your current version of flash and one for the new version you are going to download Press Continue to allow the program to continue which will Era
316. mask gt Sets mask bits to enable neg Condition Reg transitions to Event reg PTRansition Returns negative transition mask value PRESet Presets both the Operation and Questionable Enable registers to O QUEStionable Questionable Data Status Group Bit assignments 8 Calibration Lost 9 Trigger Too Fast 10 FIFO Overflowed 11 Over voltage 12 VME Memory Overflow 13 Setup Changed CONDition Returns state of Questionable Status signals ENABle enable mask gt Bits set to 1 enable status events to be summarized into Status Byte ENABle Returns the decimal weighted sum of bits set in the Enable register EVENt Returns weighted sum of bits that represent Questionable Data events NTRansition transition mask Sets mask bits to enable pos Condition Reg transitions to Event reg NTRansition Returns positive transition mask value PTRansition transition mask Sets mask bits to enable neg Condition Reg transitions to Event reg PTRansition Returns negative transition mask value SYSTem CTYPe lt channel gt Returns the identification of the SCP at channel ERRor Returns one element of the error queue 0 if no errors VERSion Returns the version of SCPI this instrument complies with TRIGger COUNt rig count Specify the number of trigger events that will be accepted COUNt Returns the current trigger count setting IMMediate Triggers instrument when TRIG SOUR is TIMer or HOLD same as TRG and IEEE 488 1 GET commands SOURce B
317. memory The version information includes manufacturer model serial number firmware version and date Comments Returned Value Examples of the response string format AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES E1419 US34000478 A 04 00 Thu Aug 5 9 38 07 MDT 1994 e The C SCPI type is string e Related Commands IDN Note Depending on the date and revision of the firmware this response will vary A VXI Technology response or an Agilent Technologies response may be seen Usage DIAG VERS Returns version string as shown above 226 Chapter 6 FETCh Subsystem Syntax FETCh The FETCh command returns readings stored in VME memory Comments e This command is only available in systems using an Agilent HP E1405B 06A or command module FETCH does not alter the readings stored in VME memory Only the RST or INIT commands will clear the readings in VME memory The format of readings returned is set using the FORMat DATA command Returned Value REAL 32 REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are returned in the IEEE 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format This data return format is explained in Arbitrary Block Program Data on page 180 of this chapter For REAL 32 readings are 4 bytes in length For REAL 64 and PACK 64 readings are 8 bytes in length PACKed 64 returns the same values as REAL 64 except for Not a Number NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF The NaN IEEE INF and IEEE INF values returned by PACKed 64 are i
318. meric Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MIN MAX and INFinity A parameter that represents units may also include a units suffix These are Volts V mv 10 uv 10 Ohms ohm kohm 10 mohm 10 Seconds S msec 107 usec 10 Hertz hz khz 10 mhz 100 ghz 10 Chapter 6 179 VT1419A Command Reference Boolean Discrete Channel List Arbitrary Block Program and Response Data The Comments section within the Command Reference will state whether a numeric parameter can also be specified in hex octal and or binary H7B Q173 B1111011 Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false ON OFF 1 0 Selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the TRIGger SOURce lt source gt command where lt source gt can be BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TIMer or TTLTrg lt n gt The general form of a single channel specification is ccnn where cc represents the card number and nn represents the channel number Since the VT1419A has an on board 64 channel multiplexer the card number will be 1 and the channel number can range from 00 to 63 Some example channel specifications channel 0 100 channel 5 105 channel 54 154 The General form of a channel range spe
319. mmand is only for programming excitation current used in resistance measurement configurations It is does not program output DAC SCPs like the VT1532A 2 The VT1518A Current Measurement SCP is a combination of 4 channels of current source same as the VT1505A and four channels of amplified analog input same as the VT1508A The current source channels are on the lower four channels of the VT1518A The VT1511A Strain Bridge Completion SCP has a programmable bridge excitation voltage source The command to control the excitation supply is OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt e The lt amplitude gt parameter can specify 0 1 2 5 or 10 volts for the VTI1511 s excitation voltage e The ch list gt parameter specifies the SCP and bridge channel excitation supply that will be programmed There are four excitation supplies in each VTIS11A To set the excitation supplies for channels 40 through 43 to output 2 volts OUTP VOLT AMPL 2 140 143 The OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude command is only for programming excitation voltage used measurement configurations It is does not program output DAC SCPs like the VT1531A and VT1537A This step links each of the module s channels to a specific measurement type For analog input channels this tells the on board control processor which EU conversion to apply to the value read on any channel The processor is creating a list of conversion types vs channel numbers
320. must be read STAT OPER EVENT or STAT QUES EVENT in order to clear the register and prevent further interrupts from occurring Chapter 3 95 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Creating and Loading Custom EU Conversion Tables Note for C SCPI and SICL Sending the STAT PRESET will disable all the interrupts from the VT1419A Sending the OPC command will enable the measurement complete interrupt Once this interrupt is received and the OPC condition sent to the status system this interrupt will be disabled if it was not previously enabled via the STATUS OPER QUES ENABLE command The above description is always true for a downloaded driver In the C SCPI driver however the interrupts will only be enabled if escpi_overlap mode is ON when the enable command is given If escpi overlap is OFF the user indicates that interrupts are not to be enabled Any subsequent changes to escpi_overlap will not change which interrupts are enabled Only sending OPC or STAT OPER QUES ENAB with escpi_overlap ON will enable interrupts In addition the user can enable or disable all interrupts via the SICL calls iintron and iintroff Creating and Loading Custom EU Conversion Tables Standard EU Operation Custom EU Operation NOTE Custom EU Tables The VT1419A provides for loading custom EU conversion tables This allows for the on board conversion of transducers not otherwise supported by the VT1419A The EU conversion tables buil
321. n FIFO Overflowed bit goes false set bit 10 in Status Ouestionable Event register 300 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Comments Usage STATus QUEStionable NTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Negative Transition Filter NTF register e Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands STAT QUES NTR e RST Condition No change STAT QUES NTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the NTF register STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Parameters Comments Usage STAT QUES PTR 1024 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt transition_mask gt sets bits in the Positive Transition Filter PTF register When a bit in the PTF register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition register must change from a zero to a one in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event register When a bit in the PTF register 1s zero a positive transition of the Condition register bit will not change the Event register bit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units transition_mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none e transition mask may be sent as decimal hex H octal Q or binary ZB e If both the STAT QUES PTR and STAT QUES NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit i
322. n error 12 4096 1000 6 VME Memory The number of readings taken exceeds VME memory Overflow space 13 8192 20005 Setup Changed Channel Calibration in doubt because SCP setup may have changed since last CAL or CAL SETup command RST always sets this bit STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Condition register Comments The Condition register reflects the real time state of the status signals The signals are not latched therefore past events are not retained in this register see STAT QUES EVENT Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands CAL VALUE RESISTANCE CAL VALUE VOLTAGE STAT QUES EVENT STAT QUES ENABLE STAT QUES ENABLE e RST Condition No change Usage STATUS QUESTIONABLE CONDITION Enter statement will return value from condition register 298 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt enable mask gt sets bits in the Enable register that will enable corresponding bits from the Event register to set the Questionable summary bit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none Comments e The enable mask gt parameter may be sent as decimal hex H octal Q or binary
323. n a form compatible with HP Workstation BASIC and HP BASIC UX Refer to the FOR Mat command for the actual values for NaN INF and INF ASCii is the default format ASCII readings are returned in the form 1 234567E 123 For example 13 325 volts would be 1 3325000E 001 Each reading is followed by a comma A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOI follow the last reading Related Commands MEMory Subsystem FORMat DATA RST Condition MEMORY VME ADDRESS 240000 MEMORY VME STATE OFF MEMORY VME SIZE 0 Chapter 6 227 VT1419A Command Reference FETCh Use Sequence MEM VME ADDR H300000 NOTE MEM VME SIZE H100000 1 megabyte MB or 262 144 readings MEM VME STAT ON id set up VT1419A for scanning TRIG SOUR IMM let unit trigger on INIT INIT program execution remains here until VME memory is full or the VT1419A has stopped taking readings FORM REAL 64 affects only the return of data FETCH When using the MEM subsystem the module must be triggered before executing the INIT command as shown above unless an external trigger EXT trigger is used When using EXT trigger the trigger can occur at any time 228 Chapter 6 FORMat The FOR Mat subsystem provides commands to set and query the response data Subsystem Syntax FORMat FORMat DATA DATA lt format gt lt size gt DATA FORMat DATA lt format gt lt size gt sets the format for data returned using the SENSe DATA
324. n and RST defaults 53 PRESet STAT PRESet 297 Pre setting algorithm variables 74 Primary expression 129 Problem fixing the 102 Problems checking for 102 Process monitoring algorithm 121 Program flow control 124 Program structure and syntax 133 138 Programming model executing the 53 55 Programming the trigger timer 79 PTRansition STAT OPER PTRansition 296 STAT QUES PTRansition 301 PTRansition STAT OPER PTRansition 297 STAT QUES PTRansition 302 PULSe SOURce FUNC SHAPe PULSe 287 Q Questionable data group examples 91 Quick Reference Command 321 323 328 Quiet measurements HINTS 36 Quieter readings with amplifier SCPs NOTE 103 R Rack Mount Terminal Panel Accessories 46 Index 389 Ranges measurement 329 RATio ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN 193 RATio ALGorithm EXPLicit SCAN 194 Reading condition registers 94 Reading CVT elements 113 Reading event registers 94 Reading status groups directly 93 Reading the latest FIFO values FIFO mode OVER 84 Reading the status byte 92 Reading values from the FIFO 113 Recommended measurement connections 36 38 Re Execute CAL when 72 REFerence SENS FUNC CUST REF 269 SENS REFerence 277 Reference Jumpers configuring the 34 35 Reference junction 34 Reference measurement before thermocouple measurements 64 Reference temperature measurement NOTE 28 Reference temperature sensing 33 Reference temperature sensing with the VT1419
325. n be compound statement That is statement statement statement y The return statement allows terminating algorithm execution before reaching the end by returning control to the main function The return statement can appear anywhere in an algorithm A return statement is not required to end an algorithm The translator treats the end of an algorithm as an implied return 124 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference Data Types The data type for variables is always static float However decimal constant values without a decimal point or exponent character E or e as well as Hex and Octal constants are treated as 32 bit integer values This treatment of constants is consistent with ANSI C To understand what this can mean it must be understood that not all arithmetic statements in an algorithm are actually performed within the VT1419A s DSP chip at algorithm run time Where expressions can be simplified the VT1419A s translator a function of the driver invoked by ALG DEF performs the arithmetic operations before downloading the executable code to the algorithm memory in the VT1419A For example look at the following statement a 5 8 When the VT1419A s translator receives this statement it simplifies it by adding the two integer constants 5 and 8 and storing the sum of these as the float constant 13 At algorithm run time the float constant 13 is assi
326. n expression THEN statement IF boolean expression THEN statement END IF IF boolean expression THEN statement statement statement END IF IF boolean expression THEN statement statement ELSE statement END IF Comments Simplest form used often Two line form not recommended use multiple line form instead Multiple line form used often Multiple line form with else used often C Syntax if boolean expression statement if boolean expression statement if boolean expression statement statement statement if boolean expression statement statement else statement Figure 4 3 The if Statement C versus BASIC this line is solely a comment line if al b c d 1 comment within a code line This comment is composed of more than one line The comment can be any number of lines long and terminates when the following two characters appear About the only character combination that is not allowed within a comment is since this will terminate the comment 136 Chapter 4 BASIC Syntax IF A lt 0 THEN C ABS A IF A lt gt 0 THEN C B A END IF IF A lt gt B AND A lt gt C THEN A A B B B 1 C 0 END IF IF A 5 OR B 5 THEN C ABS C C 2 C ELSE C A B END IF The Algorithm Language and Environment Program Structure and Syntax Examples C Syntax if a lt 0 c abs a if a 0 c b a if a b amp
327. n the Event register e f neither the STAT QUES PTR or STAT QUES NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition register will have no effect on the Event register e Related Commands STAT QUES PTR STAT QUES NTR Set to all ones by STAT PRESet and power on e RST Condition No change When FIFO Overflowed bit goes true set bit 10 in Status Operation Event register Chapter 6 301 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Positive Transition Filter PTF register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands STAT QUES PTR e RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER PTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the PTF register 302 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SYSTem SYSTem The SYSTem subsystem is used to query for error messages types of Signal Conditioning Plug Ons SCPs and the SCPI version currently implemented Subsystem Syntax SYSTem CTYPe lt channel gt ERRor VERSion SYSTem CTYPe SYSTem CTYPe lt channel gt returns the identification of the Signal Conditioning Plug On installed at the specified channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none
328. nabling and Disabling Algorithms 85 Setting Algorithm Execution Frequency ooooccoccoccooc eee 86 Example Command Sequence 1 2 0 0 cece cece teen teen eens 86 Using the Status System 0 cee ete ene nent nen eee 88 Enabling Events to be Reported in the Status Byte 2 2 llle 91 Reading the Status Byte osos sd a ote Ren eae de 92 Clearing the Enable Registers 0 0 2 eee cee Ie 93 The Status Byte Group s Enable Register 93 Reading Status Groups Directly 5 93 VT1419A Background Operation lsseeeeeeeee tenes 94 Updating the Status System and VXIbus Interrupts 0 0 02 eee eee ee eee 95 Creating and Loading Custom EU Conversion Tables esses eee eee 96 Compensating for System Offsets isses 97 Special Considerations 99 Detecting Open Transducers ripressione a m aa E E a tent eens 100 More On Auto Ranging 0 0 cee eee E E ARAE E A eens 101 Settling Characteristics spis a nard arts ie da A wie ti 101 Background Dada 101 Checking for Problems uet adas 102 Fixing the Problem sas ici cei e a sexe eo a diem DES CA 102 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment eee 105 About Tis eter Pr dl dada eo 105 Overview of the Algorithm Lang age csee ccce icrirerericsi cette 106 Example Language Usage 00 eee c eee tee hh 107 The Algorithm Execution Environment 0 0 ce eee eee ete 108 The Main Function asioi instaan a eee hh
329. nd is used to accept and make changes to local and global variables from the supervisory computer Up to 512 scalar or array changes can be made while executing algorithms Special care was taken to make sure all changes take place at the same time so that any particular algorithm or group of algorithms all operate on the new changes at a user specified time This does not mean that all scalar and array changes have to be received during one cycle to become effective at the next cycle On the contrary it may take a number of cycles to download new values especially when trying to re write 1024 element arrays and especially when the trigger cycle time is very short There are multiple times between the base triggers where scalar and array changes can be accepted from the supervisory computer and these changes are held in a holding buffer until the supervisory computer instructs the changes to take effect These changes then take place during the Update window and take effect BEFORE algorithms start executing The do update now signal can be sent by command ALG UPD or by a change in a digital input state ALG UPD CHAN In either case the programmer has control over when the new changes take effect 50 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction The VT1419A s ability to execute programs directly on the card and its fast execution speed give the programmer real time response to changin
330. nd querying instrument states or retrieving data A subsystem command structure is a hierarchical structure that usually consists of a top level or root command one or more lower level commands and their parameters The following example shows part of a typical subsystem MEMory VME ADDRess lt A24_address gt ADDRess SIZE mem size SIZE MEMory is the root command VME is the second level command and ADDRess and SIZE are third level commands A colon always separates one command from the next lower level command as shown below ROUTE SEQUENCE DEFINE Colons separate the root command from the second level command ROUTE SEQUENCE and the second level from the third level SEQUENCE DEFINE If parameters are present the first is separated from the command by a space character Additional parameters are separated from each other by a commas The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability send the entire command The instrument will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command 178 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference For example if the command syntax shows SEQuence then SEQ and SEQUENCE are both acceptable forms Other forms of SEQuence such as SEQUEN or SEQU will generate an error Upper or lo
331. nds INITiate IMMediate TRIGger e RST Condition TRIG SOUR HOLD ABORT If INITed goes to Trigger Idle state If running algorithms stops and goes to Trigger Idle State Chapter 6 185 ALGorithm The ALGorithm command subsystem provides e Definition of measurement and control algorithms e Communication with algorithm array and scalar variables e Controls to enable or disable individual algorithms e Control of ratio of number of scan triggers per algorithm execution e Control of algorithm execution speed e Easy definition of algorithm data conversion functions Subsystem Syntax ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay lt alg_name gt lt array_name gt lt block_data gt ARRay lt alg name gt lt array name gt DEFine alg name gt lt swap_size gt lt program_block gt SCALar alg name gt lt var name gt lt value gt SCALar alg name gt lt var name gt ISCAN RATio alg name gt lt value gt SCAN RATio alg name gt SSIZe alg name gt STATe alg name gt ON OFF STATe alg name gt TIME alg name gt FUNCtion DEFine lt func_name gt lt range gt lt offset gt lt block_data gt OUTPut DELay lt usec gt AUTO OUTPut DELay UPDate IMMediate CHANnel channel item WINDow num updates WINDow 186 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay NOTE Parameters ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay lt alg_name gt lt array_n
332. ne It illustrates how to configure the VT1419A to collect data store that data into its FIFO and retrieve that data for display on a strip chart and optional logging to a file This program can also be used to read stored data files generated by both this examples and the panl1419 vee example The example can easily be modified to a more complicated version or pieces can be cut and pasted where needed ral Select for CVT Until Break AlphaNumeric 4 A SCP 0 0 1 20544m File or E1419 VO and Logging brin psum CycleTime Time CycleTime SCP 2 2 0 165939 10m 10m lt SCP3 BE ud ns 3 0 536163 4 0 412567 i 5 0 321442 a a E M uz a p 2 Input 4 6 0 242249 10 100 7 0 188705 Figure 5 13 Simple Data Logger The first object Setup Configure can be used to configure the VT1419A trigger subsystem SCPs and data formats Since the VT1419A comes pre configured with four analog input SCPs in the first four slots this example will concentrate only on those channels and leave them configured for voltage input Since the example panl1419 vee also assumes this condition data stored by that example s logging function can also be read by this example If desired refer to the example temp1419 vee to see how channels can be configured for temperature measurements using SCPI commands Chapter 3 also illustrates how to configure analog channels fo
333. ne will allow the output of any analog output channel to be modified Since all analog output SCP s also display their output values as input channels the results of changing the output values in section F can be seen when START is active Please note that these output values are only accurate to within 10 of the programmed value These are Chapter 5 145 VEE Programming Examples Virtual Front Panel Program sanity check readings The actual output will be precisely what was programmed if the VT1419A has been calibrated and an analog output can be connected to one of the analog input channels to see exactly what values are being set When returning to a previously selected output channel the Analog Output slider will adjust itself to the last programmed value used when the other channel was selected H These two sections provide some added flexibility Under the Analog Output section two buttons called STORE and RECALL can be seen Once the values of all the analog outputs have been programmed press the STORE button to save the output states If RESET is pressed or the program is restarted later press RECALL to restore all those programmed values The LOG ON OFF buttons permit the measurement results to be logged from the first 32 analog input channels to a file named aichans Each time this Agilent VEE example is RUN this file is cleared Successive ON OFF selections while START is active will append data to the f
334. nels Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels Configuring Programmable Analog SCP Parameters Note Setting SCP Gains This section covers configuring input and output channels to provide the measurement values and output characteristics that an algorithm needs to operate This step applies only to programmable Signal Conditioning Plug Ons such as the VT1503A Programmable Amplifier Filter SCP the VT1505A Current Source SCP the VT1518A Resistance Measurement SCP the VT1510A Sample and Hold SCP and the VT1511A Transient Strain SCP See the particular SCP s User s manual to determine the gain filter cutoff frequency or excitation amplitude selections that it may provide The VT1419A only supports these programmable analog SCPs on SCP positions 4 through 7 An important thing to understand about input amplifier SCPs is that given a fixed input value at a channel changes in channel gain do not change the value an algorithm will receive from that channel The DSP chip Digital Signal Processor keeps track of SCP gain and range amplifier settings and calculates a value that reflects the signal level at the input terminal The only time this in not true is when the SCP gain chosen would cause the output of the SCP amplifier to be too great for the selected A D range As an example with SCP gain set to 64 an input signal greater than 0 25 volts would cause an over range reading even with the A D set to its 16 volt range
335. nels as variables The rest is handled and optimized by the Input and Output phases Instead of concentrating on how to deal with differences between each SCP one can think of solving applications in terms of input and output value variables Chapter 3 51 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Operating Model Operating Model Before INIT Commands Accepted All commands except TRG TRIGGER and ALG UPD CHAN After INIT Commands Accepted RST ABORt Most of ALG subsystem ARM IMM FETCh SENSe DATA STATus SYSTem TRG amp TRIGger IMMediate if TRIG SOUR is HOLD The VT1419A card operates in one or two states either the idle state or the running state The idle can be referred to as Before INIT and the running state can be referred to as After INIT See Figure 3 3 for the following discussion Power On Trigger Idle State F U INITiate IMM Waiting for Trig Count Trigger State Exhausted TIMer or other trigger event RST or ABORt Input Execute Algs Output Figure 3 3 Module States Before INIT positions the card in the Trigger Idle State and its DSP chip is ready to accept virtually all SCPI commands This is the time when configuring and set up operations are performed This would include linking Engineering Unit conversions to channels designating digital inp
336. ng for TC use CUSTom E EEXT none J K N R S T range numeric float32 see comments V dc ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Resistance temperature measurements RTDs and THERmistors require the use of Current Source Signal Conditioning Plug Ons The following table shows the Current Source setting that must be used for the following RTDs and Thermistors Required Current Temperature Sensor Types and Amplitude Subtypes MAX 488 uA for RTD and THER 2250 MIN 30 A for THER 5000 and THER 10000 The lt range gt parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V dc 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range Ifa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 generates an error Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified is auto range If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 range must be set no lower than 1 V dc or an input out of range condition will exist
337. ng operations 1 2 Request Control Not used by VT1419A 2 4 Query Error Attempting to read empty output queue or output data lost 3 8 Device Dependent A device dependent error occurred See Appendix B Error 4 16 Execution Error Parameter out of range or instrument cannot execute a proper command because it would conflict with another instrument setting 5 32 Command Error Unrecognized command or improper parameter count or type 6 64 User Request Not used by VT1419A 7 128 Power On Power has been applied to the instrument 90 Chapter 3 Enabling Events to be Reported in the Status Byte Configuring the Transition Filters Configuring the Enable Registers Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Using the Status System There are two sets of registers that individual status conditions must pass through before that condition can be recorded in a group s Event Register These are the Transition Filter Registers and the Enable registers They provide selectivity in recording and reporting module status conditions Figure 3 12 shows that the Condition Register outputs are routed to the input of the Negative Transition and Positive Transition Filter Registers For space reasons they are shown together but are controlled by individual SCPI commands Here is the truth table for the Transition Filter Registers Condition Reg Bit PTRansition Reg Bit NTRansition Reg Bit Event Reg Input 021 0 0 0 150 051 150 051 150 051 150
338. ng the register Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT QUES COND STAT QUES ENABLE STAT QUES ENABLE Enter statement will return the value of bits set in the Questionable Event register STAT QUES Same as above STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Parameters Comments Usage STAT QUES NTR 1024 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt transition_mask gt sets bits in the Negative Transition Filter NTF register When a bit in the NTF register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition register must change from a one to a zero in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event register When a bit in the NTF register is zero a negative transition of the Condition register bit will not change the Event register bit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units transition mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none The transition mask gt parameter may be sent as decimal hex H octal Q or binary ZB If both the STAT QUES PTR and STAT QUES NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit in the Event register If neither the STAT QUES PTR or STAT QUES NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition register will have no effect on the Event register Related Commands STAT QUES NTR STAT QUES PTR Cleared By STAT PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Whe
339. nnections that should be made to the VT1419A to allow the example programs in this chapter to operate as described For detailed information on connecting wiring to the VT1419A see Chapter 2 SCP Pos 0 SCP Pos 7 VT1533A Digital I O VT1531A Voltage DAC Figure 5 1 Signal Connections for Examples The supplied VXIp ug amp play Drivers amp Product Manuals CD P N 72 0030 000 contains all of these example programs stored in the Agilent VEE 3 0 compatibility mode If using Agilent VEE 4 0 or higher it may be beneficial to compile those examples that would benefit from the increased speed panl1419 vee temp1419 vee and swap1419 vee The Directory path to these examples is cd drive letter gt Misc Product InfolProgram Examples VT 1419 In order for the example programs to run they must be installed onto the hard drive in the C dabundle directory The Misc Product Info Program Examples VT1419 directory mentioned above contains a batch file install bat that will copy the examples to C dabundle Using Windows system s File Manager or Explorer open the CD directory Mise Product Info Program Examples VT1419 vee_files and double click on install bat Agilent VEE can then be started and the example programs loaded Chapter 5 143 B VEE Programming Examples Virtual Front Panel Program MEASURE CHANNELS DIAGNOSTICS RESET CALIBRATE TEST CAL Test Results Virtual Fr
340. nnel number Invalid word address Bus error Scan list not initialized Too many channels in channel list Byte count is not a multiple of two Illegal while initiated Operation must be performed before INIT or INIT CONT ON Illegal command CAL CONF not sent Incorrect sequence of calibration commands Send CAL CONF VOLT command before CAL VAL VOLT and send CAL CONF RES command before CAL VAL RES Appendix B 359 Error Messages 3005 3006 3007 3008 3012 3015 3019 3020 3021 3026 3027 3028 3030 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 Illegal command Send CAL VAL RES The only command accepted after a CAL CONF RES is a CAL VAL RES command Illegal command Send CAL VAL VOLT The only command accepted after a CAL CONF VOLT is a CAL VAL VOLT command Invalid signal conditioning module The command sent to an SCP was illegal for its type Too few channels in scan list A Scan List must contain at least two channels Trigger too fast Scan list not completed before another trigger event occurs Channel modifier not permitted here TRIG TIM interval too small for SAMP TIM interval and scan list size TRIG TIM interval must allow for completion of entire scan list at currently set SAMP TIM interval See TRIG TIM in Chapter 5 the Command Reference Input overvoltage
341. nput read_data here Format depends on FORMat cmd end if end while loop following checks for values remaining in FIFO after measuring false SENS DATA FIFO COUNT query for values still in FIFO input n_values here if n_values if any values SENS DATA FIFO PART n_values input read_data here get remaining values from FIFO end if Reading the Latest FIFO Values FIFO mode OVER In this mode the FIFO always contains the latest values up to the FIFO s capacity of 65 024 values from running algorithms In order to read these values the algorithms must be stopped use ABORT This forms a record of the algorithm s latest performance In the OVERwrite mode the FIFO must not be read while it is accepting data from algorithms Algorithm execution must be stopped before an application program reads the FIFO Here is an example command sequence that can be used to read values from the FIFO after algorithms are stopped ABORT sent SENS DATA FIFO COUNT query count of values in FIFO input n_values here if n_values if any values SENS DATA FIFO PART n_values Format of values set by FORMat input read_data here get remaining values from FIFO end of if 84 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Modifying Running Algorithm Variables Modifying Running Algorithm Variables U pdati ng the The values sent with the ALG SCALAR command are kept in the Update Queue Algorithm Variables until an ALGorithm UPDate command is received an
342. nt Source Signal Conditioning Plug Ons The following table shows the Current Source setting that must be used for the following RTDs and Thermistors Required Current Temperature Sensor Types and Amplitude Subtypes MAX 488 uA RTD 85 92 and THER 2250 MIN 30 A THER 5000 10000 To set channels 0 through 7 to measure temperature using 2 250 ohm thermistors in this case paired to current source SCP channels 32 through 39 Chapter 3 61 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels OUTP CURR AMPL 488e 6 132 139 set excite current to 488 uA on current SCP channels 32 through 39 SENS FUNC TEMP THER 2250 100 107 link channels 0 through 7 to temperature EU conversion for 2 2500 thermistor To set channels 8 through 15 to measure temperature using 10 000 Q thermistors in this case paired to current source SCP channels 40 through 47 OUTP CURR AMPL 306 6 0140 147 set excite current to 30 uA on current SCP channels 40 through 47 SENS FUNC TEMP THER 10000 108 115 link channels 8 through 15 to temperature EU conversion for 10 000 Q thermistor To set channel 7 to measure temperature using 100 O RTD with a TC of 0 00385 ohm ohm C in this case paired to current source SCP channel 39 OUTP CURR AMPL 488 6 139 set excite current to 488 uA on current SCP channels 32 through 47 SENS FUNC TEMP RTD 85 107 link channel 7 to temperature E
343. nt source compliance Checks strain SCP s Wagner Voltage control Checks autobalance dac range with input shorted Sample and Hold channel holds value even when input value changed Sample and Hold channel held value test for droop rate ANALOG OUTPUT AND DIGITAL I O TESTS 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 313 315 316 317 318 331 332 333 334 335 336 Current and Voltage Output SCPs digital DAC control Current and Voltage Output SCPs DAC noise Current Output SCP offset Current Output SCP gain shift Current Output SCP offset Current Output SCP linearity Current Output SCP linearity Current Output SCP turn over Voltage Output SCP offset Voltage Output SCP offset Voltage Output SCP linearity Voltage Output SCP linearity Voltage Output SCP turn over Digital I O SCP internal digital interface Digital I O SCP user input Digital I O SCP user input Digital I O SCP user output Digital I O SCP user output Digital I O SCP output current Chapter 6 319 VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference 337 Digital I O SCP output current 341 Freq PWM FM SCP internal data0 register 342 Freq PWM FM SCP internal datal register 343 Freq PWM FM SCP internal parameter register 344 Freq PWM FM SCP on board processor self test 345 Freq PWM FM SCP on board processor self test 346 Freq PWM FM SCP user inputs 347 Freq PWM FM SCP user outputs 348 Freq PWM FM SCP output
344. nt with updates pending The INIT command automatically performs the updates before starting the algorithms 202 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm ALGOrithm UPDate WINDow ALGOrithm UPDate WINDow returns the number of variable and algorithm updates allowed within the UPDATE window e Returned Value number of updates in the UPDATEwindow The type is int16 Chapter 6 203 ARM NOTE BUS With the VT1419A when the TRIG SOURCE is set to TIMer an ARM event must occur to start the timer This can be something as simple as executing the ARM IMMediate command or it could be another event selected by ARM SOURCE The ARM subsystem may only be used then the TRIGger SOURce is TIMer If the TRIGger SOURce is not TIMer and ARM SOURce is set to anything other than IMMediate an Error 221 Settings conflict will be generated The ARM command subsystem provides e An immediate software ARM ARM IMM e Selection of the ARM source ARM SOUR BUS EXT HOLD IMM SCP TTLTRG lt n gt when TRIG SOUR is TIMer Figure 6 7 shows the overall logical model of the Trigger System Arm Source Selector ARM SOURce lt source gt TRIGger TIMer interval TRIGger SOURce lt source gt Arm Trigger Sources External Trigger Source Selector Figure 6 2 Logical Trigger Model Only while INIT CONT is ON amp TRIG SOUR is IMM Internal Trigger Trig
345. ntext Reference to an undefined custom function Can t have executable code in GLOBALS definition CVT address range is 10 511 Numbered algorithms can only be called from MAIN Reference to an undefined algorithm Attempt to redefine an existing symbol var or fn Array size is 1 1024 Expecting a default PID parameter Too many FIFO or CVT writes per scan trigger Statement is too complex Unterminated comment 299 e Algorithm too big Algorithm exceeds 46k words 23k if enabled to swap or exceeds size specified in swap size gt Not enough memory to compile Algorithm The algorithm s constructs are using too much translator memory Need more memory in the Agilent HP E1406 Try breaking the algorithm into smaller algorithms Too many functions Limit is 32 user defined functions 364 Appendix B 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 Error Messages Bad Algorithm array index Must be from 0 to declared size 1 Algorithm Compiler Internal Error Call VXI Technology with details of operation legal while not initiated Send INIT before this command No updates in queue Illegal Variable Type Sent ALG SCAL with identifier of array ALG ARR with scalar identifier ALG UPD CHAN with identifier that is not a channel etc Invalid Array Siz
346. oaded into the Agilent HP E1405 06 Driver RAM The program will first list the drivers found in the Agilent HP E1405 6 s memory and the CONTINUE button must be pressed to proceed with the download ALG CTL E1415 19 A 04 00 RAM cAdabundle 0000 ALG CTL DU 209828 This program needs one Direct IO definition by the name of E1406 It should refer to subaddress 00 If the E1406 HPIB is at 709 then use 70900 Loading the program has already prompted you to create this E1406 definition Please check the address value for this E1406 definition Run the program by pressing the Run button Information of all currently loaded downloadable drivers is shown Enter the full path and name of the directory with the downloadable drivers as in c dabundle or users me dabundle no entry current directory Enter the file names of the downloadable driver files that you wish to send to the E1406 command module over HPIB These must be the DU files Press Continue to allow the program to continue which will Remove all of the currently loaded drivers Destroy all contents in the current RAM Disk if any Download the drivers that you entered by filename in the box Files Take a little longer than you expected To prevent the program from doing all this press the HP VEE main Stop button in place of the Continue button ALG CTL E1415 19 A 04 00 RAM Figure 5 16 Example of Com
347. odule will return a reading of 0 volts with a short applied at the UUT and the system wiring offset will be removed from all measurements of the signal to channel 0 Think of the signal applied to the instrument s channel input as the gross signal value CAL TARE removes the tare portion leaving only the net signal value Because of settling times especially on filtered channels CAL TARE can take a number of minutes to execute 98 Chapter 3 NOTE Resetting CAL TARE Special Considerations Maximum Tare Capability Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Compensating for System Offsets The tare calibration constants created during CAL TARE are stored in and are usable from the instruments RAM To store the Tare constants in non volatile flash memory execute the CAL STORE TARE command The VT1419A s flash memory has a finite lifetime of approximately ten thousand write cycles unlimited read cycles While executing CAL STOR once every day would not exceed the lifetime of the flash memory for approximately 27 years an application that stored constants many times each day would unnecessarily shorten the flash memory s lifetime To undo the CAL TARE operation execute CAL TARE RESet then CAL CAL SET If current Tare calibration constants have been stored in flash memory execute CAL TARE RESET then CAL STORE TARE Here are some things to keep in mind when using CAL TARE The tare value that can be compensat
348. of placing data into the FIFO Note that one can select which SCP data will to be monitored on the alphanumeric display Each SCP can have up to eight channels of analog input so selecting SCP 0 3 will allow for all eight channels to be displayed The data displayed is just one of the ten readings acquired from the 320 FIFO readings Normally the better choice is to use the VT1419A s CVT and read that directly however since the data was already read adding the additional I O statement to fetch the eight channels from the CVT is an unnecessary performance slow down for this application 164 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Simple Data Logger Example The four Integer input boxes labeled Input 1 4 specify which channels will be displayed on the strip chart These are scanned as part of the REPEAT loop that acquires readings from the VT1419A card Ten readings for each of the selected channels are fetched from the FIFO data and sent to the strip chart The Cycle Time object allows the rate at which data is placed in the FIFO by the VT1419A s C algorithm to be slowed down The SCPI command ALG SCAN RATIO is used to cause the C algorithm to skip execution intervals established by the scan triggers Since the TRIG TIMER 0 01 command was issued during Setup Configure this slider will convert to multiples of this rate For example if the 0 04 second Cycle Time is selected then the C algorithm will only execute every four scan tri
349. of readings in the FIFO is very deterministic Reading values from the FIFO For a discussion on reading values from the FIFO see Retrieving Algorithm Data on page 81 Writing values to the FIFO and CVT The writeboth lt expression gt lt cvt_element gt statement sends the value of lt expression gt both to the FIFO and to a lt cvt element gt Reading these values is done the same way as mentioned for writefifo and writecvt Setting aVXlbus The algorithm language provides the function interrupt to force a VXIbus Interru pt interrupt When interrupt is executed in an algorithm a VXIbus interrupt line selected by the SCPI command DIAG INTR LINe is asserted The following example algorithm code tests an input channel value and sets an interrupt ifit is higher or lower than set limits static float upper limit 1 2 lower limit 0 2 if 1124 gt upper limit 1124 lt lower limit interrupt Chapter 4 113 The Algorithm Language and Environment Operating Sequence Calling User Defined Functions NOTE Access to user defined functions is provided to avoid complex equation calculation within an algorithm Essentially what is provided with the VT1419A is a method to pre compute user function values outside of algorithm execution and place these values in tables one for each user function Each function table element contains a slope and offset to calculate an mx b over the interval x is the value provi
350. ommand 86 87 Sequence operating 114 115 Sequence overall 114 Sequence the operating 81 Setting algorithm execution frequency 86 Setting filter cutoff frequency 57 Setting input function 67 Setting input polarity 66 Setting output drive type 68 Setting output functions 69 Setting output polarity 68 Setting SCP gains 56 Setting the logical address switch 15 Setting the trigger counter 79 Setting the VT1505A current source SCP 57 Setting the VT1511A strain bridge SCP excitation voltage 58 Setting up analog input and output channels 56 65 Setting up digital input and output channels 66 70 Setting up digital inputs 66 Setting up digital outputs 67 Setting up the trigger system 77 79 Settings conflict ARM SOUR vs TRIG SOUR 204 308 SETTling SENSe CHANnel SETTling 259 Settling characteristics 101 104 SETTling SENSe CHANnel SETTling 260 SETup CAL SETup 210 CAL SETup 210 Shield Connections When to make 373 SHUNt OUTP SHUNt 248 OUTPut SHUNt 249 Signal connection to channels 36 38 Signals outputting trigger 79 SIZE MEM VME SIZE 242 Size determining an algorithm s 119 SIZe ALGorithm EXPLicit 194 SIZE MEM VME SIZE 243 SOURce ARM SOURce 205 ARM SOURce 206 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce 249 TRIG SOURce 308 SOURce subsystem 285 287 290 Source selecting the trigger 77 Source selecting trigger timer arm 78 SOURce FM STATe 285 SOURce FM STATe 286
351. ommand will return the module to the Trigger Idle State after the current scan is completed See TRIG SOURce for more detail Chapter 6 205 VT1419A Command Reference ARM While ARM SOUR is IMM simply INITiate the trigger system to start a measurement scan e When Accepted Before INIT only e Related Commands ARM IMM ARM SOURCE INIT IMM TRIG SOUR e RST Condition ARM SOUR IMM Usage ARM SOUR BUS Arm with ARM command ARM SOUR TTLTRG3 Arm with VXIbus TTLTRG3 line ARM SOURce ARM SOURce returns the current arm source configuration See the ARM SOUR command for more response data information e Returned Value Discrete one of BUS HOLD IMM SCP or TTLTO through TTLT7 The C SCPI type is string Usage ARM SOUR An enter statement return arm source configuration 206 Chapter 6 CALibration The Calibration subsystem provides for two major categories of calibration 1 A D Calibration In these procedures an external multimeter is used to calibrate the A D gain on all five of its ranges The multimeter also determines the value of the VT1419A s internal calibration resistor The values generated from this calibration are then stored in nonvolatile memory and become the basis for Working Calibrations These procedures each require a sequence of several commands from the CALibration subsystem CAL CONFIG CAL VALUE and CAL STORE ADC Always execute CAL or a CAL TARE operation after A D Calibrat
352. on 000s 298 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 0 00 0c cette eens 299 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 2 0 0 ccc 299 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 2 0 0 0 0 0 eens 299 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 00 0 000 300 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition nunana eect ees 301 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 00 00 cece eh 301 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 2 0 0 0 000 ees 302 SYST Cross ots e E O E E t res eaten 303 SYSTem ClyY Pe iiss disses WV ee rk Pande x o eee beanie deal 303 SSL en ERROR ato 304 SY STem VERSION sau dare ua dos eee ae ie eae dad bonded eee 304 uide MR 305 TRIG Ber COUNE suede uenerit decet sa cse rho enses re dr cd 307 TRIGSer COUNt ssa iex Ub tur etre eed pem et e t EAR Edge 307 TRIGger IMMediatel hebr eem rr Rr db pH eters CHE 308 TRIGger SOURCE 4 uus atm sisse dt epa Hor eeu 308 TRIGgersSOURce iii a esencia der re Euch dad E 309 TRIGger TIMer PERiod o 0oooococoocooorr e 309 TRIGger TIMer PERiOd ios id 310 Common Command Reference 0 cece tent teenies 311 BONO rm 311 ES a Bere VE a iia 312 DMC lt name gt Ecmd_ datd gt ici ac da di 312 dj ca Peur 312 BMG oad Ba hss A AAA A a 312 ESE SASK ur a era ride E a REA 312 FESE as seia doi secador AE Se QUE as debe dd 313 A eM 313 GMC name sui nda A AUS adeat o Notit OS E ee 313 MONA o pa ee T OR eeegte eon 313 TM Crta dad 313 A O ee 314 OP ae ii A me E 314 A O a 315 Contents 11 O
353. on 40 42 Checks internal voltage reference 43 44 Checks zero of A D internal cal source and relay drives 45 46 Checks fine offset calibration DAC 47 48 Checks coarse offset calibration DAC 49 Checks internal and 15 V supplies 50 53 Checks internal calibration source 54 55 Checks gain calibration DAC 56 57 Checks that autorange works 58 59 Checks internal current source 60 63 Checks front end and A D noise and A D filter 64 Checks zeroing of coarse and fine offset calibration DACs 318 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference ANALOG TESTS continued Test 65 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Description Checks current source and CAL BUS relay and relay drives and OHM relay drive See 33 Checks continuity through SCPs bank relays and relay drivers Checks open transducer detect Checks current leakage of the SCPs Checks voltage offset of the SCPs Checks mid scale strain dac output Only reports first channel of SCP Checks range of strain dac Only reports first channel of SCP Checks noise of strain dac Only reports first channel of SCP Checks bridge completion leg resistance each channel Checks combined leg resistance each channel Checks current source SCP s OFF current Checks current source SCP s current dac mid scale Checks current source SCP s current dac range on HI and LO ranges Checks curre
354. onnect reference resistor to Calibration Bus OPC or SYST ERR must wait for CAL CONF RES to complete now measure ref resistor with external DMM CAL VAL RES lt measured value gt Send measured value to module CAL STORE ADC Store cal constants in non volatile memory used only at end of complete cal sequence CALibration CONFigure VOLTage Parameters Comments Command Sequence CALibration CONFigure VOLTage lt range gt lt zero fs gt connects the on board calibration source to the Calibration Bus A measurement of the calibration source voltage can be made with an external calibration DVM connected to the H Cal and L Cal terminals on the Terminal Module or the V H and V L terminals on the Cal Bus connector The lt range gt parameter controls the source voltage level available when the lt zero fs gt parameter is set to FSCale full scale Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 see comments volts zero fs discrete string ZERO FSCale none e The range parameter must be within 5 of one of the five following values 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V dc 1 V dc 4 V de 16 V dc range may be specified in millivolts mv e The FSCALE output voltage of the calibration source will be approximately 90 of the nominal value for each range except the 16 V range where the output is approximately 10 V e When Accepted Not while INITiated e
355. ont Panel Program panl1419 vee This program performs virtually all calibration testing and general wiring connection verification needs It s a quick way to get the card up and running and making measurements Analog outputs can be set all input channels can be looked at SCP configurations can be seen strip chart comparisons performed among any channel and data can be logged to a disk H og Yo File aich alog Output 132 o om G s 100 SCP E15014 0 0 115891 1 0 115952 2 0 265122m 3 0 537231 4 0 412262 5 0 320862 6 0 24173 7 0 187759 156 SCP E1533A 0 255 1 255 HELP SELECT OUTPUT CAL Test Results Strip Chart Channels eur 1 ona 100 weur2 nae 1 INPUT 3 CHANNEL 02 0 No error Figure 5 2 Virtual Front Panel Program F 108 SCP E15014 0 148872 0 11512 90 21m 67 1463m 70 7321m 56 9458m 6 38 208m 22 4114m 148 SCP EMPTY JODE ON gt Oo 116 18 5223m 16 4604m 10 8681m 9 9067 7m 5 43976m 7 21359m 7 20787m 10 3148m 140 SCP EMPTY SCP E1501A 124 SCP E1501A 0 11 8828m 1 8 84247m 2 11 4822m 3 6 00433m 4 8 05092m 5 5 54276m 6 4 74358m 7 3 479m 132 SCP E15314 0 0 113045 1 2 13242m 2 0 873566m 3 0 419617m 4 0 976563m 5 0 505447m 6 0 1297m 7 0 488281m The various sections illustrated in Figure 5 2 are described as follows d After
356. orm the calibration function CAL generates calibration correction constants for each analog input channel for offset and gain at all 5 A D range settings For programmable input SCPs these calibration constants are only valid for the current configuration gain and filter cut off frequency This means that CAL calibration is no longer valid if channel gain or filter settings INP FILT or INP GAIN are changed but is still valid for changes of channel function or range using SENS FUNC Calibration also becomes invalid if the SCPs are moved to different SCP locations For analog output channels both measurement excitation SCPs as well as control output SCPs CAL also generates calibration correction constants These calibration constants are valid only for the specific SCPs in the positions they are currently in Calibration becomes invalid if the SCPs are moved to different SCP locations When power is turned on to the VT1419A after first installing the SCPs or after SCPs have been moved the module will use approximate values for calibration constants This means that input and output channels will function although the values will not be very accurate relative to the VT1419A s specified capability At this point make sure the module is firmly anchored to the mainframe front panel screws are tight and let it warm up for a full hour After it has warmed up execute the CAL operation The CAL command causes the module to
357. orm will include the End Identifier If it is not included the ALG DEF command will swallow whatever data follows the algorithm code The syntax for this parameter type is 0 lt data byte s gt lt null byte with End Identifier gt Example from Quoted String above ALG DEF ALG1 200132 1100 2 where is a null byte required for C SCPI only NOTE for For Block Program Data the Algorithm Parser requires that the lt source_code gt C SCPI data end with a null byte The null byte must be appended to the end of the block s lt data byte s gt The null byte is sent with the End Identifier If the null byte is not included the error Algorithm Block must contain termination 0 will be generated When accepted and Usage 1 If lt alg name gt is not enabled to swap not originally defined with the lt swap_size gt parameter included then both of the following conditions must be true a Module is in Trigger Idle State after RST or ABORT and before INIT OK RST ALG DEF GLOBALS static float My global ALG DEF ALG3 My global My global 1 Error INIT ALG DEF ALG5 static float a out 0136 a out Can t define new algorithm while running 190 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm b The lt alg name gt has not already been defined since a RST command Here lt alg name gt specifines either an algorithm name or GLOBALES OK RST ALG DEF
358. ormers reference block performance for thermocouple measurements This works by virtue of the inductance in the shield connected winding presenting a significant impedance to high frequency common mode noise and forcing all the noise voltage to be dropped across the winding The common mode noise at the input amplifier side of the winding is forced to O volts by virtue of the low impedance connection to the VT1419A ground via the selectable short or parallel combination of 1 kQ and 0 1 uF The short can t be used in situations where there is a very high common mode voltage dc and or ac that could generate very large shield currents Appendix D 375 Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods The tight coupling through the transformer windings into the signal Hi and Low leads forces the common mode noise at the input amplifier side of those windings to O volts This achieves the 110 dB to 10 MHz desired keeping the high frequency common mode noise out of the amplifier thus preventing the amplifier from rectifying this into an offset error This effectively does the same thing that shielded twisted pair cable does only better It is especially effective if the shield connection to the VT1419A ground can t be a very low impedance due to large de and or low frequency common mode voltages The tri filar transformers don t limit the differential normal mode signal bandwidth Thus removing the requirement for slowly varying signal volta
359. ould not be flashing Another check to know that Agilent VEE is running is performed with the Variable Access object Agilent VEE reads the value of the global vee_running increments it by one and re writes that value back to the VT1419A Although not included in this example an algorithm could detect that the variable was changing and know that Agilent VEE was still executing This might be a situation where if Agilent VEE were to be taken off line or stopped the VT1419A could detect the situation and begin a possible shut down of operations by itself Note that Algorithm 1 performs an average of sixteen temperature readings before writing the result to CVT location 10 Each time the algorithm executes a check is performed to see if it has executed sixteen times If not only the sum and count is affected and the routine exits prematurely The average is done to provide quieter readings when trying to make temperature measurements at high speed with a non filter non gain SCP This is a caution High accuracy and low drift temperature measurements are better with SCP s that have gain and filtering However decent 1 3 C accuracy can be attained with the VT1501A straight through SCP s which is typically very reasonable for thermocouples 150 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Programming Model Example Spend some time opening each of the objects in this example and see what SCPI commands are used and how they relate back to
360. peak With VT1513A Divide by 16 Attenuator SCP Operating lt 60 V dc lt 42 V peak Common Mode Rejection O to 60 Hz 105 dB Input Impedance greater than 90 MQ differential 1 MQ with VT1513A Attenuator On Board Current Source 122 yA 0 02 with 17 volts Compliance Maximum Tare Cal Offset SCP Gain 1 Maximum tare offset depends on A D range and SCP gain A D range 16 4 1 0 25 0 0625 V F Scale Max Offset 3 2213 0 82101 0 23061 0 07581 0 03792 Notice Published specifications indicate accuracy degradation when subjected to radiated fields The following specifications reflect the performance of the VT1419A with the VT1501A Direct Input Signal Conditioning Plug On The performance of the VT1419A with other SCPs is found in the Specifications section of that SCP s manual Measurement Accuracy 90 days 23 C 1 C with CAL done after 1 hr warm up and CAL ZERO dc volts within 5 min NOTE If autoranging is ON for readings lt 3 8 V add 0 02 to linearity specifications for readings gt 3 8 V add 0 05 to linearity specifications A D range Linearity Offset Error Noise Noise VF Scale of reading 3 sigma 3 sigma 0 0625 0 01 5 3 pV 18 uV 8 uv 0 25 0 01 10 3 pV 45 pV 24 UV 1 0 01 31 uV 110 pV 90 uV 4 0 01 122 uV 450 uV 366 pV 16 0 01 488 uV 1 8 mV 1 5 mV Temperature Coefficients Gain 10ppm C Offset 0 40 C 0 14 uV C 40 55 C 0 8 uV 0 38 pV C
361. pendix A 350 001 01 Xo ed 080 09 0 070 oco 000 ovo 00 OS 440 39114 81 IdO V8OSLLA ULA 00001 EOS T GO 00 00 0ST c O1 XD 3q 351 Appendix A 00 001 00 08 00 09 00 0p opoz 000 o Bag E TNR pr PA A bined UG ji E eee SPN a ee AA erre M ee ee EAE RSA A m PAS O0 Z NINE CA A IR OF I sip tigi 09 I det A ooi NE er Ee le aaa Or Je ereen ES i amas mE mm CE d A OC I e HUM cn dar o I i es 08 0 I esc ERES occi PECORE mene 09 0 Ra ix eee Or o JO Mt 49X ET 10 VEOSTIA mr J40 PULA SX 1 140 VEOSILA T a ME pee DEA scs TO PMA ZI 1O VZOS LA Veces o 440 133184 11 300 VIOSTLA WAIL ZSTZ Appendix A 352 o sq FAO 20014 61 3dO V60S LLA RARE ar AAO 391114 81 MIO V8OSTLA OVC CU A OO E 0g E eee pp T ort WYL cscc 353 Appendix A 00 08 00 09 00 0p 00 07 000 o Seg Mucianus IR 091 Of Qc Tr ee mr ee ae a A A M s A dim om He am RR CAP RI IM MK ME der i A ee Hm mom re Ago muta 11 340 VIOSLEA unu HS Appendix A 354 2 32d AJO lla 61 300 V60SLLA mueren AAA ee pem HAO 29014 81 O VEOSLLA 00 0 QU 0
362. peratures using custom Temperature EU characterized RTDs and thermistors The custom EU table generated for the Conversions individually characterized transducer is loaded to the appropriate channel s using the DIAG CUST PIEC command see the Agilent VEE example eu_ 419 vee Since the EU conversion from this custom EU table is to be considered the reference junction temperature the channel is linked to this EU table using the command SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom REFerence lt range gt lt ch_list gt This command uses the custom EU conversion to generate the reference junction temperature as explained in the section Thermocouple Reference Temperature Compensation on page 62 Creating Conversion The VT1419A comes with an Agilent VEE example program that can be used to Tables generate custom EU tables See the eu 1419 vee example in Chapter 5 for more information Summary The following points describe the capabilities of custom EU conversion e A given channel only has a single active EU conversion table assigned to it Changing tables requires loading it with a DIAG CUST command e The limit on the number of different custom EU tables that can be loaded in a VT1419A is the same as the number of channels e Custom tables can provide the same level of accuracy as the built in tables In fact the built in resistance function uses a linear conversion table and the built in temperature functions use the piecewise conver
363. ping constructs the VT1419 s C compiler can perform a worst case branch analysis of user programs and return the execution time for determining the minimum time base interval Making this timing query available allows the programmer to know exactly how much time may be required to execute any all phases before attempting to set up physical test conditions Note the darker shaded portion at the end of the Execute Algorithms Phase in Figure 3 2 The conditional execution of code can cause the length of this phase to move back and forth like an accordion This can cause undesirable output jitter when the beginning of the output phase starts immediately after the last user algorithm executes The VT1419 s design allows the user to specify when output signals begin relative to the start of the trigger cycle Outputs then always occur at the same time every time The programming task is further made easy with this design because all the difficult structure of handling input and output channels is done automatically This is not true of many other products that may have several ways to acquire measurement data or write results to its I O channels When the VT1419A s user written C algorithms are compiled input channels and output channels are detected in the algorithms and are automatically grouped and configured for the Input and Output phases as seen in Figure 3 2 Each algorithm simply accesses input channels as variables and writes to output chan
364. plete the update e Note that an update command issued after the start of the UPDATE phase will be buffered but not executed until the beginning of the next INPUT phase At that time the current stored state of the specified digital channel is saved and used as the basis for comparison for state change If at the beginning of the scan trigger the digital input state had changed then at the beginning of the UPDATE phase the update command would detect a change from the previous scan trigger and the update process would begin e When Accepted Before and After INIT The following example shows three scalars being written with the associated update command following When the ALG UPD CHAN command is received it will read the current state of channel 136 bit 0 At the beginning of the UPDATE phase a check will be made to determine if the stored state of channel 136 bit 0 is different from the current state If so the update of all three scalars take effect next Phase 2 INIT ALG SCAL ALG1 Outplimit 25 ALG SCAL ALG1 Alarmtrip 1 3 ALG SCAL ALG2 Alarmtrip 1 7 ALG UPD CHAN 1136 B0 update on state change at bit zero of 8 bit channel 36 Chapter 6 201 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm ALGorithm UPDate WINDow ALGorithm UPDate WINDow num updates gt specifies the number of updates that will be performed during phase 2 UPDATE The DSP will process this command and assign a constant window of time
365. r DSP chip that performs all of the VT1419 s internal hardware control functions as well as performing the EU Conversion process Appendix C 367 DSP EU EU Conversion FIFO Flash or Flash Memory Scan List SCP Swapping Terminal Blocks Terminal Module Glossary Same as Control Processor Engineering Units Engineering Unit Conversion Converting binary A D readings in units of A D counts into engineering units of voltage resistance temperature strain These are the built in conversions see SENS FUNC The VT1419A also provides access to custom EU conversions see SENS FUNC CUST in command reference and Creating and Loading Custom EU Tables in Chapter 3 The First In First OUT buffer that provides output buffering for data sent from an algorithm to an application program Non volatile semiconductor memory used by the VT1419A to store its control firmware and calibration constants A list of up to 64 channels that is built by the VT1419A Channels referenced in algorithms are placed in the Scan List as the algorithm is defined This list will be scanned each time the module is triggered Signal Conditioning Plug On Small circuit boards that plug onto the VT1419A s main circuit board Available analog input SCPs can provide noise canceling filters signal amplifiers signal attenuators and strain bridge completion Analog output SCPs are available to provide measurement excitat
366. r Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 GLOBALS none swap size numeric uint16 0 Max Available Algorithm Memory words source code string or block data algorithm source none see Comments Comments The alg name must be one of ALG1 ALG2 ALG3 etc through ALG32 or GLOBALS The parameter is not case sensitive ALG1 and algl are equivalent as are GLOBALS and globals e The swap size parameter is optional Include this parameter with the first definition of alg name gt if it will be changed later while it is running The value can range up to about 23k words ALG DEF will then allocate 46k words as it creates two spaces for this algorithm 188 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Ifincluded lt swap size gt specifies the number of words of memory to allocate for the algorithm specified by lt alg_name gt The VT1419A will then allocate this much memory again as an update buffer for this algorithm Note that this doubles the amount of memory space requested Think of this as spacel and space2 for algorithm lt alg_name gt When a replacement algorithm is sent later must be sent without the lt swap_size gt parameter 1t will be placed in space2 An ALG UPDATE command must be sent for execution to switch from the original to the replacement algorithm If the algorithm for lt alg_name gt is again changed it w
367. r each data format Chapter 6 263 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe e Related Commands DATA FIFO COUNT HALF e RST Condition FIFO buffer is empty Command DATA FIFO COUNT HALF poll FIFO for half full status Sequence DATA FIFO HALF returns 32768 values SENSe DATA FIFO MODE SENSe DATA FIFO MODE lt mode gt sets the mode of operation for the FIFO buffer Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete string BLOCK OVERwrite none Comments In BLOCk ing mode if the FIFO becomes full and measurements are still being made the new values are discarded e OVERwrite mode is used to record the latest 65 024 values The module must be halted ABORT sent before attempting to read the FIFO In OVERwrite Mode if the FIFO becomes full and measurements are still being made new values overwrite the oldest values e In both modes Error 3021 FIFO Overflow is generated to indicate that measurements have been lost e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands SENSE DATA FIFO MODE SENSE DATA FIFO ALL SENSE DATA FIFO HALF SENSE DATA FIFO PART SENSE DATA FIFO COUNT e RST Condition SENSE DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK Usage SENSE DATA FIFO MODE OVERWRITE Set FIFO to overwrite mode DATA FIFO MODE BLOCK Set FIFO to block mode SENSe DATA FIFO MODE SENSe DATA FIFO MODE returns the currently set FIFO mode Comments
368. r in the declaration Array variables must have a single dimension The array dimension specifies the number of elements The lower bound is always zero 0 in the Algorithm Language Therefore the variable array from above has three elements array 0 through array 2 Assigning Values BASIC and C are the same in this aspect In both languages the symbol is used to assign a value to a simple variable or an element of an array The value can come from a constant another variable or an expression Examples a 12 345 a My var a My array 2 a My array 1 6 2 My var Chapter 4 133 The Algorithm Language and Environment Program Structure and Syntax NOTE The Operations Symbols The Arithmetic Operators Unary Arithmetic Operator The Comparison Operators The Logical Operators Conditional Execution 1 ce In BASIC the assignment symbo is also used as the comparison operator is equal to For example IF a b THEN As is shown later in this chapter C uses a different symbol for this comparison Many of the operation symbols are the same and are used the same way as those in BASIC However there are differences and they can cause programming errors until they are understood The arithmetic operators available to the VT1419A are the same as those equivalents in BASIC addition subtraction multiplication division Again same as BASIC
369. r other measurements such as resistance for example Chapter 5 163 VEE Programming Examples Simple Data Logger Example Note the TRIG TIMER 0 01 command will establish the scan trigger rate at which measurements are taken and C algorithms are executed This rate was chosen purposely to illustrate the concept of slowing down data acquisition at multiples of 10 ms Also note that the data format of FORM REAL 32 is used so the maximum rate can be achieved when reading data from the FIFO The second object Download Algorithm illustrates how to download a C program to access the channel variables for input measurements This object consists of a REPEAT loop with a count range to automatically generate 32 of the writefifo Ixx statements The Ixx will range from 1100 1131 which represents each of the first 32 analog input channels The only function this algorithm will have is to read all 32 analog input values for each scan trigger and place that data into the FIFO The Output and Input Data File text boxes allow names of data files to be specified The Output Data File assumes the working directory unless the entire path is specified This file will be cleared upon executing the RUN key of Agilent VEE If the LOG ON switch is set all data acquired will be written to the specified data file If the VT1419A switch is selected then data is acquired from the actual input channels If FILE is selected data is read from the
370. r programming and is documented in each command in this chapter Data Types Description int16 Signed 16 bit integer number int32 Signed 32 bit integer number uint16 Unsigned 16 bit integer number uint32 Unsigned 32 bit integer number float32 32 bit floating point number float64 64 bit floating point number string String of characters null terminated Chapter 6 183 SCPI Command Reference The following section describes the SCPI commands for the VT1419A Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also within each subsystem A command guide is printed in the top margin of each page The guide indicates the current subsystem on that page 184 Chapter 6 ABORt Subsystem Syntax CAUTION Comments Usage The ABORt subsystem is a part of the VT1419A s trigger system ABORt resets the trigger system from 1ts Wait For Trigger state to its Trigger Idle state ABORt ABORT stops execution of a running algorithm The control output is left at the last value set by the algorithm Depending on the process this uncontrolled situation could be dangerous Make certain that the process is in a safe state before halting the execution of a controlling algorithm e ABORt does not affect any other settings of the trigger system When the INITiate command is sent the trigger system will respond just as it did before the ABORt command was sent e Related Comma
371. r_name gt for algorithm lt alg name gt into the Update Queue This update is then pending until ALG UPD is sent or an update event as set by ALG UPD CHANNEL occurs NOTE ALG SCALAR places a variable update request in the Update Queue Do not place more update requests in the Update Queue than are allowed by the current setting of ALG UPD WINDOW or a Too many updates send ALG UPDATE command error message will be generated Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 or GLOBALS none var name string valid C variable name none value numeric float32 IEEE 754 32 bit floating point number none Comments To send values to a global scalar variable set the a g name parameter to GLOBALS To define a scalar global variable see the ALGorithm DEFine command 192 Chapter 6 e An error is generated if alg name gt or lt var_name gt is not defined VT1419A Command Reference e Related Commands ALG DEFINE ALG SCAL e RST Condition No algorithms or variables are defined Usage ALG SCAL ALG1 my_var 1 2345 ALG SCAL ALG1 another 5 4321 ALG SCAL ALG3 my global var 1 001 ALG UPD ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar lt alg_name gt lt var_name gt returns the value of the scalar variable lt var_name gt in algorithm lt alg_name gt ALGorithm 1 2345 to varia
372. range gt lt ch_list gt QUARter lt range gt lt ch_list gt RTD TCouple CUST E EEXT J K N S T THERmistor 2250 5000 10000 TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt TOTalize lt ch_list gt VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_list gt RTD 85 92 THERmistor 5000 REFerence lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt CHANnels W lt ref channel gt U lt ch_list gt TEMPerature degrees c STRain EXCitation excite v gt 0 lt ch list STRain EXCitation lt excite_v gt lt ch_list gt EXCitation lt channel gt GFACtor gage factor7 a ch list GFACtor lt channel gt POISson lt poisson_ratio gt lt ch_list gt SENSe STRAin continued POISson lt channel gt UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt UNSTrained lt channel gt SOURce FM ESTATe 1 0 ON OFF lt ch_list gt STATe lt channel gt FUNCtion SHAPe CONDition lt ch_list gt Description Equate a function and range with groups of channels Sets function to sense digital state Links channels to custom EU conversion table loaded by DIAG CUST LIN or DIAG CUST PIEC commands Links channels to custom reference temperature EU conversion table loaded by DIAG CUST PIEC commands Links channels to custom temperature EU conversion table loaded by DIAG CUST PIEC and perform
373. range7 Q ch list ee page 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain FPOisson lt range gt lt ch_lis gt sn page 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain HBENding lt range gt lt ch_list gt page 272 SENSe FUNCtion STRain HPOisson lt range gt lt ch_lis ln page 272 Chapter 6 175 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe FUNCtion STRain QUARter lt range gt D lt ch list ooo SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_lis gt SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize Q ch list oo SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC lt range gt lt ch_lis gt ee SENSe REFerence lt sensor_type gt lt sub_type gt lt range gt lt ch_lis gt SENSe REFerence CHANnels lt ref_channel gt lt tc_channels gt lle SENSe REFerence TEMPerature degrees gt 1 aaa SENSe STRain EXCitation excite v Q ch list 2 22 SENSe STRain EXCitation lt channel gt oo SENSe STRain GFACtor gage factor2 q ch list oo SENSe STRain GFACtor lt channel gt ooo SENSe STRain POISson lt poisson_ratio gt lt ch_list gt ee SENSe STRain POISson lt channel gt 22e SENSe STRain UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt o o SENSe STRain UNSTrained lt channel gt 2222s SENSe TOTaliz
374. return IEEE INF see table on page 230 for actual values for each data format e Related Commands SENSE DATA FIFO HALF FORMAT DATA e RST Condition FIFO is empty Usage DATAFIFO return all FIFO values until measurements complete and FIFO empty Command set up scan lists and trigger Sequence SENSE DATA FIFO ALL now execute read statement read statement does not complete until triggered measurements are complete and FIFO is empty SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt returns the number of values currently in the FIFO buffer Comments DATA FIFO COUNT is used to determine the number of values to acquire with the DATA FIFO PART command e Returned Value Numeric 0 through 65 024 The C SCPI type is int32 e Related Commands DATA FIFO PART e RST Condition FIFO empty Usage DATA FIFO COUNT Check the number of values in the FIFO buffer 262 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF SENSe DATA FIFO COUNt HALF returns a 1 if the FIFO is at least half full contains at least 32 768 values or 0 if FIFO is less than half full Comments e DATA FIFO COUNT HALF is used as a fast method to poll the FIFO for the half full condition Returned Value Numeric 1 or 0 The C SCPI type is int16 Related Commands DATA FIFO HALF RST Condition FIFO empty Command DATA FIFO COUNT HALF poll FIFO for half full status Sequence DATA FIFO HALF returns 32768 values
375. rge the examples and cut and paste what is needed This typically results in complex functions being performed in a very short period of time These example programs are written to run on any Agilent VEE 3 0 platform This includes UNIX and Microsoft Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems These programs are primarily designed to run from an external computer communicating over a GPIB link to the Agilent HP E1405B 06A Command Module The Command Module holds the VT1419A driver which controls the VT1419A VXI card The VT1419A VXI card comes pre configured to LADD 208 GPIB address 70926 for example These Agilent VEE programs are also viable for the VT1415A Algorithmic Closed Loop Control card since the programming architecture of both cards is very similar The VT1415A provides greater flexibility and focuses more closely on PID closed loop control applications The VT1419A is a more general purpose lower cost data acquisition and control system solution The programming examples that follow reference model numbers which have an E prefix e g E1419A After the acquisition of these products by VXI Technology Inc the prefix has been changed to VT e g VT1419A These prefixes are interchangeable and vary with firmware revision and date of product purchase Chapter 5 139 VEE Programming Examples About This Chapter The contents of this chapter are Wiring Connections and File Loca
376. rger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 causes an error Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified is auto range If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a gain of 8 lt range gt must be set no lower than 1V dc or an input out of range condition will exist The CAL command calibrates channels based on Sense Amplifier SCP setup at the time of execution If SCP settings are changed those channels are no longer calibrated CAL must be executed again See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion on page 57 for more information When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands CAL INPUT GAIN RST Condition SENSE FUNC VOLT AUTO 100 163 276 Chapter 6 Usage VT1419A Command Reference SENSe FUNC VOLT 140 163 Channels 40 63 measure voltage in auto range defaulted SENSe REFerence NOTE Parameters SENSe JREFerence lt type gt lt sub type gt lt range gt 0 lt ch list gt links channel in lt ch list gt to the reference junction temperature EU conversion based on lt type gt and lt sub type
377. ription 0 1 16 000116 0010 Calibrating Measuring Set by CAL TARE and CAL SETup Cleared by CAL TARE and CAL SETup Set while CAL executes and reset when CAL completes Set by CAL CONFIG VOLT or CAL CONFIG RES cleared by CAL VAL VOLT or CAL VAL RES Set when instrument INITiated Cleared when instrument returns to Trigger Idle State 8 256 0100 Scan Complete Set when each pass through a Scan List completed may not indicate all measurements have been taken when TRIG COUNT gt 1 9 512 02004 SCP Trigger An SCP has sourced a trigger event future VT1419A SCPs 10 1024 0400 6 FIFO Half Full The FIFO contains at least 32 768 readings 11 2048 08006 Algorithm Interrupted The interrupt function was called in an algorithm STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation CONDition returns the decimal weighted value of the bits set in the Condition register Comments The Condition register reflects the real time state of the status signals The signals are not latched therefore past events are not retained in this register see STAT OPER EVENT Chapter 6 293 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands CAL CAL ZERO INITiate IMMediate STAT OPER EVENT STAT OPER ENABLE STAT OPER ENABLE e RST Condition No Change Usage STATUS OPERATION CONDITION Enter s
378. rm ojolior I e e n SIS st o SES TYLON OC O WO Ol 0 Ro Ro r ri23iri 2iri ri2 ir ir 2 r 2 heavy line indicates side of terminal block wire enters TN DEI fee olola OFF oa 5 IN Figure 2 18 VT1419A Option 11 Terminal Module Map Chapter 2 44 Field Wiring Option 12 Terminal Module Wiring Map Option 12 Terminal Module Wiring Map Figure 2 19 shows the Terminal Module map for the VT1419A ap SINE PROS casa oo oo Top gt 2200 JOD A UNO WHIT 0 o Te All wiring entering Terminal Module passes under this 3 9 strain relief bar r Heavy line indicates the side h of the terminal block on E which the wire enters Figure 2 19 VT1419A Option 12 Terminal Module Map Chapter 2 45 Field Wiring The Option A3F The Option A3F Rack Mount Terminal Panel Accessories Option A3F allows a VT1419A to be connected to a VT1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel The option provides four SCSI plugs on a Terminal Module to make connections to the Rack Mount Terminal Panel using four separately ordered SCSI cables Option A3F is shown in Figure 2 20 Figure 2 20 Option A3F There are two different cables available to connect the VT1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel to the VT1419A Option A3F In both cases four cable
379. rument returns to the Trigger Idle state e INIT IMM clears the FIFO and Current Value Table e fa trigger event is received before the instrument is Initiated a 211 Trigger ignored error is generated If another trigger event is received before the instrument has completed the current trigger cycle measurement scan the Questionable Data Status bit 9 is set and a 3012 Trigger too fast error is generated Sending INIT while the system is still in the Wait for Trigger state already INITiated will cause an error 213 Init ignored Sending the ABORt command send the trigger system to the Trigger Idle state when the current input calculate output cycle is completed e If updates are pending they are made prior to beginning the Input phase e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands ABORt CONFigure TRIGger e RST Condition Trigger system is in the Idle state INIT Both versions same function INITIATE IMMEDIATE 232 Chapter 6 INPut The INPut subsystem controls configuration of programmable input Signal Conditioning Plug Ons SCPs Subsystem Syntax INPut DEBounce TIME lt time gt lt ch_list gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency cutoff freq7 Q ch list FREQuency lt channel gt STATe 1 0 ON OFF lt channel gt STATe lt channel gt GAIN lt chan_gain gt lt ch_list gt GAIN lt channel gt LOW lt wvolt_type gt lt ch_list gt LOW lt
380. s esee 29 Optional Terminal Modules ooooccoccoccocccor e 30 The SCPs and Terminal Module Connections 0 000 eee eee eese 30 Option 11 Terminal Module Layout 0 0 0 eee eee 31 Option 12 Terminal Module Layout 0 0 32 Reference Temperature Sensing with the VTI419A ooocoococccccooc eee 33 Configuring the On Board Remote Reference Jumpers 0 000 cee eee eee eee 34 Preferred Measurement Connections sese 36 Wiring and Attaching the Terminal Module 0 0 cece eee eese 39 Attaching Removing the VT1419A Terminal Module 0 00 00 c eee eee 41 Adding Components to the Option 12 Terminal Module 000 0020 ee 43 Option 11 Terminal Module Wiring Map 0 0 cece eee eens 44 Option 12 Terminal Module Wiring Map 0 0 0 cece I 45 The Option ASF sucia ra a T 46 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction 00 0 0 cece eee eee e ee es 47 About This CH Apter ei oa 47 Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction 20 00 0 0 ccc cece eee nee es 48 Mione O sas T E a te cia ene SR a TEE 48 Operating Model lt lt passed da enced ii dra dte Goa abus 52 Executing The Programming Model 00 cece cece eh 53 Power On and RST Default Settings lese 53 Setting Up Analog Input and Output Channels 56 Configuring Programmable Analog SCP Parameters 000 0 eee eee eee 56 Contents Setting Filter Cutoff Fr
381. s Minimum and Maximum a unique function number between 1 and 32 and the formula to be used which includes any Agilent VEE math function It s that simple The only restriction is that the variable A must be used to represent the value that will be passed to the function from the C algorithm When the function is called that value will be inserted into the formula just as represented in the formula box Also note that the accuracy of this piece wise linear table conversion technique is highly dependent upon the non linearity and domain over which the tables are built The table consists of 128 segments spread over a binary representation of the domain limits Appendix E gives some background information on the capabilities and limitations of this programming technique The FunctionDeclarationsArray can hold up to 32 function definitions Any valid function number 1 32 will cause the associated table to be built and downloaded into the VT1419A s function table memory space A value of 0 for any FuncNumber will cause that function to be ignored and not downloaded Any RST or power ON condition will require re execution of this module The object Select PC UNIX Files contains file name and directory paths necessary to make the module execute properly on PC or UNIX platforms Figure 5 8 of the previous example shows that object open for observation Note that the default location of the VT1419A example programs is c dabund
382. s module The object Select PC UNIX Files contains file name and directory paths necessary to make the module execute properly on a PC or UNIX platform Figure 5 8 also shows that object open for observation The default location of the VT1419A example programs is c dabundle A typical UNIX path is included for example The example uses the Agilent VEE function whichOS to determine which directory structure to use Chapter 5 155 VEE Programming Examples Custom Function Generation Custom Function Generation fn_1419 vee This program is designed to be merged into an application program It provides all the necessary objects to build up to 32 custom functions callable from VT1419A algorithms The program eufn1419 vee demonstrates how to use this module The Agilent VEE programming necessary to build the tables is somewhat complex and beyond the scope of this text In fact there is an additional program written in C that is called by this module pc fn exe Both the source code for this program and the DOS executable are included with the VT1419A examples The source code is provided so the the program can be compiled on other platforms where Agilent VEE is supported UNIX etc A command similar to cc Aa fn 141x c o unix fn Im would be issued which would compile the program under a typical UNIX environment Note that the name unix fn and pc fn have significant meaning to this module o in 0 31 F
383. s transition mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none Chapter 6 295 VT1419A Command Reference STATUS Comments The lt transition_mask gt parameter may be sent as decimal hex 4H octal Q or binary B If both the STAT OPER PTR and STAT OPER NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit in the Event register If neither the STAT OPER PTR or STAT OPER NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition register will have no effect on the Event register Related Commands STAT OPER NTR STAT OPER PTR Cleared By STAT PRESet and power on RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER NTR 16 When Measuring bit goes false set bit 4 in Status Operation Event register STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation NTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Negative Transition Filter NTF register Comments Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 Related Commands STAT OPER NTR RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER NTR Enter statement returns current value of bits set in the NTF register STATus OPERation PTRansition Parameters STATus OPERation PTRansition lt transition_mask gt sets bits in the Positive Transition Filter PTF register When a bit in the PTF register is set to one the corresponding bit in the Condition register must change from a
384. s ACTive PASSive 349 Freq PWM FM SCP output interrupts 350 Watchdog SCP enable disable timer 351 Watchdog SCP relay drive and coil closed 352 Watchdog SCP relay drive and coil open 353 Watchdog SCP I O Disconnect line 354 Watchdog SCP I O Disconnect supply WAI Wait to continue Prevents an instrument from executing another command until the operation begun by the previous command is finished sequential operation NOTE Do not use WAI to determine when the CAL SETUP or CAL TARE commands have completed Instead use their query forms CAL SETUP or CAL TARE CAL SETUP and CAL TARE return a value only after the CAL SETUP or CAL TARE operations are complete 320 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference Command Quick Reference Command Quick Reference The following tables summarize SCPI and IEEE 488 2 Common commands for the VT1419A Multifunction Command ABORt ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay lt alg_name gt lt array_name gt lt block_data gt ARRay lt alg_name gt lt array_name gt DEFine lt alg name gt lt swap size gt lt program data SCALar lt alg name gt lt var name gt lt value gt SCALar lt alg name gt lt var name gt SCAN RATio alg name gt lt ratio gt RATio alg name gt SIZe alg name gt SSTATe alg name gt ON OFF SSTATe alg name gt TIME alg name MAIN FUNCtion DEFine lt function_name gt lt range gt lt offset gt lt func_data gt
385. s Current Current Lo from VT1505A LB Figure 2 9 Preferred Signal Connections Chapter 2 37 Field Wiring Preferred Measurement Connections Terminal Module SCP External Connections 1kQ G0 o T VAYAS gt gt 0 1 uF GND to GRD Jumper 10 ko removable For each SCP Position 1kQ G7 o gt GND to GRD Jumper 10 ka removable Jv V Figure 2 10 GRD GND Circuitry Opt 12 Terminal Module Removing Guard to Ground on Channel o E 00 Figure 2 11 Grounding Option 12 Guard Terminals 38 Chapter 2 Wiring and Attaching the Terminal Module Field Wiring Wiring and Attaching the Terminal Module Figures 2 12 and 2 13 show how to open wire and attach the terminal module to a VT1419A Remove Clear Cover E B Press Tab Forward and Release 3 Make Connections Special tool P N 8710 2127 E shipped with Terminal o 28 Use wire 5mm 0 2 Push down on lever insert wire into terminal and release 2 Remove and Retain Wiring Exit Penal Remove
386. s Units alg name string ALGI ALG32 none 194 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Comments Since the returned value is the memory allocated to the algorithm it will only equal the actual size of the algorithm if it was defined by ALG DEF without its lt swap size gt parameter If enabled for swapping if lt swap size gt included at original definition the returned value will be equal to lt swap size gt 2 NOTE If lt alg name gt specifies an undefined algorithm ALG SIZ returns 0 This can be used to determine whether algorithm lt alg_name gt is defined e Returned Value numeric value up to the maximum available algorithm memory this approximately 46k words The type is int32 e RST Condition returned value is 0 ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe ALGorithm EXPLicit STATe lt alg_name gt lt enable gt specifies that algorithm alg name gt when defined should be executed ON or not executed OFF during run time NOTES 1 The command ALG STATE lt alg_ name gt ON OFF does not take effect until an ALG UPDATE or ALG UPD CHAN command is received This allows multiple ALG STATE commands to be sent with a synchronized effect 2 ALG STATE places a variable update request in the Update Queue Do not place more update requests in the Update Queue than are allowed by the current setting of ALG UPD WINDOW or a Too many updates send ALG UPDATE command error mess
387. s are required if all 64 channels are needed These cables do not come with the VT1419A Option A3F and must be ordered separately Standard Cable This cable VT1588A is a 16 channel twisted pair cable with an outer shield This cable is suitable for relatively short cable runs HF Common Mode Filters Optional High Frequency Common Mode Filters are on the VT1586A Rack Mount Terminal Panel s input channels VT1586A 001 RF Filters They filter out ac common mode signals present in the cable that connects between the terminal panel and the device under test The filters are useful for filtering out small common mode signals below 5 Vp p To order these filters order VT1586A 001 46 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction About This Chapter The focus of this chapter is to show the programming model of the VT1419A Multifunction Data Acquisition and Control System It introduces the concept of configuring the VT1419A using SCPI organizing C programs that execute directly on the VT1419A VXI card using those C programs to make high speed decisions and acquiring data from the VT1419A s sophisticated FIFO and Current Value Table to display within a VEE graphical environment To simplify the discussion Agilent VEE is used and referenced in this manual and examples for Agilent VEE are provided This chapter contains e Overview of the VT1419A Multifunction page 47 Operating
388. s in non volatile RAM These two display areas will indicate errors from calibration or testing CAL Test Results or ERROR must be pressed to see these results These are the status monitor lights CARD is either IDLE MEAS or BUSY which indicates no operations pending START active or performing CALIBRATION or TEST CAL TEST is either OK or an ERR condition If ERR data will be present in section C ERROR is either OK or ERR which indicates the need to press the ERROR button This is the strip chart area Up to three traces can be selected from any of the input channels seen in the section F display Pressing INPUT 1 2 3 will provide valid selections The current channel will be displayed next to the strip chart Traces are colored The CLEAR button will erase all current traces Auto Scale will compress all current data into the available window Update rates vary with the processing power of the computer but can range from sub second to several second updates This is the section that displays the type of SCP and its channel input values when START is active Note that the beginning channel number is displayed in the upper left corner of each SCP window Channel data is displayed as 0 1 2 so that designator must be added to the upper left corner number to obtain the actual channel number of the SCP This is the Analog Output selector Pressing SELECT OUTPUT will provide a list of all available analog output channels Choosing o
389. s ref temp compensation for lt type gt Configure channels to measure frequency Configure channels to sense resistance measurements Links measurement channels as having read bridge voltage from Full BENding Full Bending Poisson Full POisson Half BENding Half Poisson QUARter 85 92 thermocouples thermistors Configure channels for temperature measurement types above excitation current comes from Current Output SCP Configure channels to count digital state transitions Configure channels for de voltage measurement RTDs thermistors Configure channel for reference temperature measurements above Groups reference temperature channel with TC measurement channels Specifies the temperature of a controlled temperature reference junction Specifies the Excitation Voltage by channel to the strain EU conversion Specifies the Excitation Voltage by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Excitation Voltage set for lt channel gt Specifies the Gage Factor by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Gage Factor set for lt channel gt Specifies the Poisson Ratio by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Poisson Ratio set for lt channel gt Specifies the Unstrained Voltage by channel to the strain EU conversion Returns the Unstrained Voltage set for lt channel gt Configure digital channels to output frequency modulated signal Returns state of channels for FM output Configures channels to output stat
390. se 222 DIAGnostic IEEE 223 DIAGnostic IEEE 223 DIAGnostic OTDetect 101 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD 225 Digital evaluation of type float 127 Directly reading status groups 93 Disabling flash memory access optional 21 Disabling the input protect feature optional 21 Does what CAL 71 Drivers 23 DSP 368 E ENABle STAT OPER ENABle 294 STAT QUES ENABle 299 ENABle STAT OPER ENABle 294 STAT QUES ENABle 299 Enabling and disabling algorithms 85 Enabling events to be reported in the status byte 91 Environment the algorithm execution 108 Equality expression 131 Equality operator 131 Error Messages 359 366 Self Test 361 ERRor SYST ERRor 304 EU 368 EU Conversion 368 EVENt STAT OPER EVENt 295 STAT QUES EVENt 299 Example command sequence 86 87 Example language usage 107 Example programs about 23 Examples operation status group 92 Index 385 Examples questionable data group 91 Examples standard event group 92 EXCitation SENSe STRain EXCitation 279 SENSe STRain EXCitation 280 Executing the programming model 53 55 Execution conditional 134 Exiting the algorithm 124 Expression 131 Expression statement 132 F Faceplate connector pin signal lists 29 FIFO reading values from the 113 FIFO sending data to 112 FIFO time relationship of readings in 113 FIFO writing values to 113 Filters 99 Filters adding circuits to terminal module 43 Filters con
391. se channels specified by lt ch_list gt Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units poisson_ratio numeric flt32 0 1 0 5 none ch list channel list string 100 163 none e The lt ch list gt parameter must specify channels used to sense strain bridge output not channel positions on a Bridge Completion SCP e Related Commands FUNC STRAIN STRAIN POISson e RST Condition Poisson ratio 1s 0 3 STRAIN POISSON 5 124 131 set Poisson ratio for sense channels 24 through 31 POISson SENSe STRain POISson lt channel gt returns the Poisson ratio currently set for the sense channel specified by lt channel gt Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none e Returned Value numeric value of the Poisson ratio C SCPI type is f1t32 Chapter 6 281 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE e The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only e Related Commands FUNC STRAIN STRAIN POISSON Usage STRAIN POISSON 0131 query for the Poisson ratio specified for sense channel 31 enter statement here enter the Poisson ratio value SENSe STRain UNSTrained SENSe STRain UNSTrained lt unstrained_v gt lt ch_list gt specifies the unstrained voltage value to be used to convert
392. se the El419 s flash memory excluding the calibration constants Save and download the flash driver that you entered by filename The process can take 3 5 minutes so please be patient To prevent the program from performing any step press the HP VEE main Stop in place of the Continue button HEWLETT PACKARD E1419A 1419A00001 A 04 00 Wed Apr 2 10 29 32 MST 1997 Done 0 No error Figure 5 17 Example of Firmware Flash Download Chapter 5 171 Notes 172 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference Using This Chapter This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI command set and the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the VT1419A e Overall Command Index o o page 173 e Command Fundamentals a a o o page 178 e SCPI Command Reference oe ss ecos su ee eoa eu a page 184 e Common Command Reference ooo page 311 e Command Quick Reference ooo a page 321 Overall Command Index SCPI Commands ABOR ss E SN page 185 ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay alg name gt lt array_name gt lt block_data gt page 187 ALGorithm EXPLicit ARRay alg name gt lt array name gt ooo page 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit DEFine alg name gt lt swap_enable gt lt size gt lt source_code gt page 188 ALGorithm EXPLicit SCALar alg name gt lt var_name gt lt value gt aaa page 192 AL
393. sequence on page 84 for an example Verifying a Successful Configuration Note Among the VEE example programs supplied with the VT1419A is a program file name panl1419 vee that can be used to verify the VT1419A configuration and installation When the Front Panel program starts it communicates with the VT1419A and executes instructions to determine and display the installed SCP types It also simulates a strip chart recorder so that input channels can be selected to monitor and display Buttons are included that will run the VT1419A s self test as well as well as perform an auto calibration Self test and Cal can take 3 to 15 minutes to complete depending upon the number and type of SCPs installed in the VT1419A When the Agilent VEE program that communicates with the VT1419A is first loaded it will display a dialog box asking for the GPIB address string to use Chapter 1 23 24 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Field Wiring About This Chapter This chapter shows how to plan and connect field wiring to the VT1419A s Terminal Module The chapter explains proper connection of analog signals to the VT1419A both two wire voltage type and four wire resistance type measurements Connections for other measurement types e g strain using the Bridge Completion SCPs refer to specific SCP manual in the SCP Manuals section Chapter contents include e Planning Wiring Layout for the VTIAI9A
394. set output channel 56 bit 0 to a digital 1 then after the time it takes to execute the second statement the bit would return to a digital 0 Because both of these statements are executed BEFORE any values are sent to the output hardware only the last statement has any effect Even if these two statements were in separate algorithms the last one executed would determine the output value In this example the bit would never change The same applies to analog outputs The buffered I O sequence explained previously can be used advantageously Multiple algorithms can access the very same buffered channel input value without having to pass the value in a parameter Any algorithm can read and use the value that any other algorithm has sent to the output buffer as its input In order for these features to be of use the order in which the algorithms are executed must be known When algorithms are defined they are given one of 32 pre defined algorithm names These range from ALG1 to ALG32 The algorithms will execute in order of its name For instance if ALGS is defined then ALG2 then ALG8 and finally ALG1 when they are run they will execute in the order ALGI ALG2 ALGS and ALG8 Defining Algorithms ALG DEF ALG DEFINE in the Programming Sequence This section discusses how to use the ALG DEFINE command to define algorithms Later sections will discuss what to define RST erases all pre
395. sets the channel function and the other sets the condition that will reset the totalizer count to zero For more on this VT1534A capability see the SCP s User s Manual To set the VT1534A s totalize reset mode SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE INIT TRIG lt ch_list gt To configure VT1534A channels to the totalizer function SENSe FUNCtion TOTalize lt ch_list gt Setti ng U p D ig ital Digital outputs can be configured for polarity output drive type and depending on Outputs the SCP model a selection of output functions as well The following discussion will explain which functions are available with a particular Digital I O SCP model Setting a digital channel s output function is what defines it as an output channel Chapter 3 67 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels Setting Output Polarity Setting Output Drive Type To specify the output polarity logical sense for digital channels use the command OUTPut POLarity lt mode gt lt ch_list gt This capability is available on all digital SCP models This setting is valid even while the specified channel in not an output channel If and when the channel is configured for output an output FUNCtion command the setting will be in effect e The lt mode gt parameter can be either NORMal or INVerted When set to NORM an output channel set to logic 0 will output a TTL compatible low When set to INV an output channel s
396. should be connected to ground at the DUT and left open at the VT1419A Floating DUTS or transducers are an exception Connect the shield to VT1419A GND or GRD terminals for this case whichever gives the best performance This will usually be the GND terminal A single point shield to ground connection is required to prevent ground loops This point should be as near to the noise source as possible and this is usually at the DUT The following lists some recommended wiring techniques 1 Use individually shielded twisted pair wiring for each channel 2 Connect the shield of each wiring pair to the corresponding Guard G terminal on the Terminal Module 3 The Terminal Module is shipped with the Ground Guard GND GRD shorting jumper installed for each channel These may be left installed or removed dependent on the following conditions a Grounded Transducer with shield connected to ground at the transducer Low frequency ground loops dc and or 50 60 Hz can result if the shield is also grounded at the Terminal Module end To prevent this remove the GND GRD jumper for that channel b Floating Transducer with shield connected to the transducer at the source In this case the best performance will most likely be achieved by leaving the GND GRD jumper in place 4 In general the GND GRD jumper can be left in place unless it is necessary to break low frequency below 1 kHz ground loops 372 Appendix D Wiring and Noise Reduc
397. single channel only e This command is for programmable filter SCPs only e Returned Value Numeric value of Hz as set by the INP FILT FREQ command The C SCPI type is float32 Chapter 6 235 VT1419A Command Reference INPut e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands INP FILT LPAS FREQ INP FILT STATE e RST Condition MIN Usage INPUT FILTER LPASS FREQ 0155 Check cutoff freq on channel 55 INP FILT FREQ 100 Check cutoff freq on channel 0 INPut FILTer LPASs STATe Parameters Comments Usage INPut FILTer LPASs STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables or disables a programmable filter SCP channel When disabled enable OFF these channels are in their pass through mode and provide no filtering When re enabled enable ON the SCP channel reverts to its previously programmed setting Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none ch_list channel list string 132 163 none e Ifthe SCP has not yet been programmed ON enables the SCP s default cutoff frequency e When Accepted Not while INITiated e RST Condition ON INPUT FILTER STATE ON 132 134 Channels 32 and 34 return to previously set or default cutoff frequency INP FILT OFF 132 139 Set channels 32 39 to pass through state INPut FILTer LPASs STATe Parameters Comments INPut FILTer LPASs STATe l
398. sion table Compensating for System Offsets System Wiring Offsets The VT1419A can compensate for offsets in a system s field wiring Apply shorts to channels at the Unit Under Test UUT end of the field wiring and then execute the CAL TARE lt ch_list gt command The instrument will measure the voltage Chapter 3 97 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Compensating for System Offsets Important Note for Thermocouples Residual Sensor Offsets Operation at each channel in lt ch_list gt and save those values in RAM as channel Tare constants e Do not use CAL TARE on field wiring that is made up of thermocouple wire The voltage that a thermocouple wire pair generates cannot be removed by introducing a short anywhere between its junction and its connection to an isothermal panel either the VT1419A s Terminal Module or a remote isothermal reference block Thermal voltage is generated along the entire length of a thermocouple pair where there is any temperature gradient along that length To CAL TARE thermocouple wire this way would introduce an unwanted offset in the voltage temperature relationship for that thermocouple If a thermocouple wire pair is inadvertently CAL TARE d see Resetting CAL TARE on page 99 Do use CAL TARE to compensate wiring offsets copper wire not thermocouple wire between the VT1419A and a remote thermocouple reference block Disconnect the thermocouples and introduce copper shor
399. so applies here Lower layout also applies here SCHEMATIC OF MODIFIABLE PARTS come LOCATOR Figure 2 16 Additional Component Location Information SH Zoos HI HI a Sm e T D OhIms i 10 kOhms N i y A TOPSER WIRING TOTO TO USER WIRING 2I TO VT1419A mr SL LO O gt Lo SL 2 ns DOR OWoO gt de M10 kOhms f hi Fd a i 0 3 T 1 No T a Default Circuit Normal Mode Low Pass Filter Circuit SH PRES HI HI gt OWO gt 00hms S B TO USER WIRING E os ol TO VT1419A S z J LO SL 8 al LO gt DOn q 7 2 gt 4 20 mA NOTE Input must not exceed common mode limits usually ms x 16 Volts unless attenuated with a VT1513A E y y 4 to 20 mA Sense 5 V Full Scale with 250 Ohm must use 16 Volt range 4 V Full Scale with 200 Ohm can use 4 Volt range for better resolution Figure 2 17 Series amp Parallel Component Examples Chapter 2 43 Field Wiring Option 11 Terminal Module Wiring Map Option 11 Terminal Module Wiring Map Figure 2 18 shows the Terminal Module map for the VT1419A 3 r r r adi Pe a Errem OM olslololo Slolelola S o 3 pa Edd sd Ta T AT ja Ta Tal ia ias I Te bed re Land ES Ed Pe Peel PA ET AU Lal EEHEEEBE BE SEDE EE EE E Lo ScP seres ba pa hay a o La bd id bt E JIx o pa po pe pa Sp SP HS 0 OST IA MINIS pa o od PR fi mi PA O OTI IN th STi iO i O vjioelr
400. source and only at that point to eliminate line frequency ground loops which can be high enough to burn up a shield It is recommended that this practice be followed and if high frequency common mode noise is seen or suspected tie the shield to the VT1419A ground through a 0 1 uF capacitor At high frequencies this drives the shield voltage to O volts at the VT1419A input Due to inductive coupling to the signal leads the Ecm voltage on the signal leads is also driven to Zero 374 Appendix D thermocouple Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods Noise Source A VT1586A SCSI cable E zi VT1419A with Filter Option 001 j O i 9i Normal Mode 110 dB CMR to 10 MHz ioci differential Ro 98 RC filter TI ilter shielded twisted pair cable N 4 rt M i V jumper configured removable Common Mode jumper Noise Source c Note RC filter is a series 5 11 kOhm resistor with ES a 220 pF capacitor to GND Ecm T1DUT Ground VT1419A Ground rh Figure D 2 HF Common Mode Filters Reduci ng Common One VT1413 customer determined that greater than 100 dB CMR to 10 MHz was Mode Reje ction required to get good thermocouple TC measurements in his test environment To accomplish this requires the use of tri filar transformers which are an option to the Using Tri Filar VT1586A Remote Rack Terminal Panel This also provides superior isothermal Transf
401. st be limited place JM2201 in the protected position and cover the shield retaining screws with calibration stickers See following illustration for location of JM2201 Chapter 1 21 Getting Started Configuring the VT1419A Flash Memory Protect Jumper Default PROG recommended E 1 Locate 2 Cut Input Protect Jumper Warning Cutting This Jumper Will Void Your Warranty 22 Chapter 1 Getting Started Instrument Drivers Instrument Drivers The Agilent HP E1405B E1406A downloadable driver is supplied with the VT1419A on the VXIplug amp play Drivers amp Product Manuals CD ROM and is also available through a VXI Customer and Sales Representative About Example Programs Examples on CD Example Command Sequences All example programs mentioned by file name in this manual are available on the VXIplugkplay Drivers amp Product Manuals CD supplied with the VT1419A See the VEE program examples chapter page 143 for specific location of files on the CD Where programming concepts are discussed in this manual the commands to send to the VT1419A are shown in the form of command sequences These are not example programs because they are not written in any computer language They are meant to show the VT1419A SCPI commands in the sequence they should be sent Where necessary these sequences include comments to describe program flow and control such as loop end loop and if end if See the code
402. st gt sets the SOURce function to PULSE for the channels in cA list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch list string 132 163 none Comments This PULSe channel function is further defined by the SOURce FM STATe and SOURce PULM STATe commands If the FM state is enabled then the frequency modulated mode is active If the PULM state is enabled then the pulse width modulated mode is active If both the FM and the PULM states are disabled then the PULSe channel is in the single pulse mode SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare W lt ch_list gt sets the SOURce function to output a square wave 50 duty cycle on the channels in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units ch_list string 132 163 none Comments The frequency control for these channels is provided by the algorithm language function 0149 2000 set channel 49 to 2 kHz SOURce PULM STATe SOURce PULM STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enable the pulse width modulated mode for the PULSe channels in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none ch list string 132 163 none Comments This command is coupled with the SOURce FM command If the FM st
403. stom function that can be called from within a custom algorithm See Appendix E Generating User Defined Functions for full information Also see the Agilent VEE example program fn_1419 vee on page 156 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units function name string valid C identifier none if not already defined in GLOBALS range numeric float32 see comments none offset numeric float32 see comments none func data 512 element array of uintl6 see comments none Comments By providing this custom function capability the VT1419A s algorithm language can be kept simple in terms of mathematical capability This increases speed Rather than having to calculate high order polynomial approximations of non linear functions this custom function scheme loads a pre computed look up table of values into memory This method allows computing virtually any transcendental or non linear function in about 18 us Resolution is 16 bits e The function name gt parameter is a global identifier and cannot be the same as a previously define global variable A user function is globally available to all defined algorithms Chapter 6 197 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm Values are generated for lt range gt lt offset gt and lt func_data gt with the Agilent VEE program fm 1419 vee supplied with the VT1419A See Appendix E Generating User De
404. strain bridge readings for the channels specified by lt ch_list gt This command does not control the output voltage of any source Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units unstrained v numeric flt32 16 through 16 volts ch_list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Use a voltage measurement of the unstrained bridge sense channel to determine the correct value for lt unstrained_v gt e The ch list gt parameter must specify the channel used to sense the bridge voltage not the channel position on a Bridge Completion SCP e Related Commands SENSE STRAIN UNST SENSE FUNC STRAIN e RST Condition Unstrained voltage is zero Usage STRAIN UNST 024 100 set unstrained voltage for channel 0 SENSe STRain UNSTrained SENSe STRain UNSTrained lt channel gt returns the unstrained voltage value currently set for the sense channel specified by lt channel gt This command does not make a measurement Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments Returned Value Numeric value of unstrained voltage The C SCPI type is f1t32 e The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only 282 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe e Related Commands STRAIN UNST Usage STRAIN UNST 0107 query unstrained voltage for channel 7 enter statement here returns the unstrained voltage set by STR UNST SENSe
405. surements linking resistance 60 Measurements linking strain 65 Measurements linking temperature 61 Measurements linking voltage 59 Measurements reference measurement before thermocouple 64 Measurements thermocouple 62 Measuring the reference temperature 63 MEM VME ADDR 242 MEM VME ADDR 242 Index 387 MEM VME SIZE 242 MEM VME SIZE 243 MEM VME STATe 243 MEM VME STATe 244 Messages error 359 366 min expressionl expression2 124 MODE SENS DATA FIFO MODE 264 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 283 Mode selecting the FIFO 76 MODE SENS DATA FIFO MODE 264 SENSe TOTalize RESet MODE 284 Mode which FIFO 83 Model determining SCPI programming 313 Modifier the static 125 Modifying running algorithm variables 85 Modifying the terminal module circuit 43 Module SCPs and Terminal 30 Modules Terminal 30 32 More on auto ranging 101 Multiplicative expression 130 Multiplicative operator 130 N NaN 230 Noise Common mode 374 Normal mode 374 Noise due to inadequate grounding 373 Noise reduction with amplifier SCPs NOTE 103 Noise reduction wiring techniques 372 Noise Rejection 374 Noisy measurements Quieting 36 Non Control algorithms 121 Normal mode noise 374 Not a Number 230 NOTES CAL and CAL TARE turns off then on OTD 225 RST effect on custom EU tables 96 TST sets default ASC 7 data format 230 amp overvoltage return format from FI
406. t Also note that values of X 2 2 and X 2 will result in Y infinity C sin 1 570798 1 000000 VT1419A sin 1 570798 0 999905 C sin 1 256639 0 951057 VT1419A sin 1 256639 0 950965 C sin 0 942479 0 809018 VT1419A sin 0 942479 0 808944 C sin 0 628319 0 587786 VT1419A sin 0 628319 0 587740 C sin 0 314160 0 309017 VT1419A sin 0 314160 0 308998 C sin 0 000000 0 000000 VT1419A sin 0 000000 0 000000 C sin 0 314160 0 309017 VT1419A sin 0 314160 0 308998 C sin 0 628319 0 587786 VT1419A sin 0 628319 0 587740 C sin 0 942479 0 809018 VT1419A sin 0 942479 0 808944 C sin 1 256639 0 951057 VT1419A sin 1 256639 0 950965 C sin 1 570798 1 000000 VT1419A sin 1 570798 0 999905 Table 1 C Sin x Vs VT1419A Haversine Function for Selected Points Appendix E 379 Generating User Defined Functions Limitations As stated earlier there are limitations to using this custom function technique These limitations are directly proportional to the non linearity of the desired waveform For example suppose the function X X X or X is to be represented over a range of 1000 The resulting binary range would be 1024 and the segments would be partitioned at 1024 64 intervals This means that every 16 units would yield an Mx B calculation over that segment As long as numbers are inputted that
407. t sample period lt 10 us for the VT1419A If significant normal mode noise is presented to its inputs that noise will be part of the measurement To make quiet accurate measurements in electrically noisy environments use properly connected shielded wiring between the A D and the device under test Figure 2 9 shows recommended connections for powered transducers thermocouples and resistance transducers See Appendix D for more information on Wiring Techniques 1 Try to install Analog SCPs relative to Digital 1 O as shown in Separating Digital and Analog Signals in Appendix D 2 Use individually shielded twisted pair wiring for each channel Xd 0 aa 10 11 Connect the shield of each wiring pair to the corresponding Guard G terminal on the Terminal Module see Figure 2 10 for schematic of Guard to Ground circuitry on the Terminal Module The Terminal Module is shipped with the Ground to Guard GND GRD shorting jumper installed for each channel These may be left installed or removed see Figure 2 10 to remove the jumper dependent on the following conditions a Grounded Transducer with shield connected to ground at the transducer Low frequency ground loops dc and or 50 60 Hz can result if the shield is also grounded at the Terminal Module end To prevent this remove the GND GRD jumper for that channel Figure 2 9 A C b Floating Transducer with shield connected to the transducer at the source
408. t AMPLitude OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude lt amplitude gt lt ch_list gt sets the VT1505A Current Source SCP channels specified by lt ch_list gt to either 488 uA or 30 uA This current is typically used for four wire resistance and resistance temperature measurements NOTE This command does not set current amplitude on SCPs like the VT1532A Current Output SCP Chapter 6 245 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units amplitude numeric float32 MIN 30E 6 MAX 488E 6 A de ch_list channel list string 132 163 none Comments Usage Select 488E 6 or MAX for measuring resistances of less than 8000 O Select 30E 6 or MIN for resistances of 8000 Q and above amplitude may be specified in yA ua For resistance temperature measurements SENSe FUNCtion TEMPerature the Current Source SCP must be set as follows Required Current Temperature Sensor Types and Amplitude Subtypes MAX 488 yA RTD 85 92 and THER 2250 MIN 30 A THER 5000 10000 When CAL is executed the current sources are calibrated on the range selected at that time When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands CAL OUTP CURR AMPL RST Condition MIN OUTP CURR AMPL 488ua 140 147 OUTP CURR AMPL 30E 6 148 OUTPut CURRent AMPLitude Set Current Source SCP at channels 40 through
409. t V nerit enu APENA ME A AER DEA eA a E H 1 Fl H E 1 4 2j Y 1 E E 3 d 1 1 4 E E Appendix A 342 os 001 050 00 0 01x23 Baq LII eS nU nt INA AC As gat 343 A EEEE EE LLL ee ee manero de dec E i AJO PA pox EL AO VENSILA 7777 pes pue c rd AJO e 8X ELIO VEQSILA j a os tO IMA ZL 140 VZOSLLA 4 i 4 AJO Jota 1 O VIOSILA Appendix A 001 050 00 O 01 X 9 Bad t E M PEIE EPER A BEIC gt DZ Lj Mnt tenete t Ae A A ARAS 44 kak 145 RP ID Suen PURA URP T dul LM E E dos pp id E AVA E d L wore ipm DS 3 E AAA ee po K4ATAaE T RT 440 391119 81 dO V8OCLLA Appendix A 344 2 Sad JO EMI 49X C1 dO VCOSLLA AA e ee er E AJO TOU 8X CT 140 VEOSTLA ERE JdO ytd C1 300 VCOSLIA 440 291114 TIM O VIOSTLA 00 00p 00 007 um mem me td da st giae FN papae a F 00 Appendix A 345 o Seg 440 39114 61 140 VEOSILA ue rat rr rra YAT E AJO 40114 87 O VSOSTLA 0000 00 00 00 602 00 0 000017 00 00C 346 Appendix A 2 Sad Mom dem er A aan E E E cn a Me u
410. t channel gt returns the currently set state of filtering for the specified channel If the channel is not on an input SCP the query will return zero Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none e Returned Value Numeric value either O off or pass through or 1 on The C SCPI type is int16 e The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only 236 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference INPut Usage INPUT FILTER LPASS STATE 0115 Enter statement returns either 0 or 1 INP FILT 0115 Same as above INPut GAIN INPut GAIN lt gain gt lt ch_list gt sets the channel gain on programmable amplifier Signal Conditioning Plug Ons Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units gain numeric float32 see comment none discrete string MIN MAX ch_list channel list string 132 163 none Comments A programmable amplifier SCP has a choice of several discrete gain settings The gain set will be the one closest to the value specified by lt gain gt Refer to the SCP manual for specific information on the SCP being programmed Sending MAX will program the highest gain available with the SCP installed Sending MIN will program the lowest gain e Sending a value for lt gain gt that is greater than the highest or less than the lowest setting
411. t channel offsets Sequence CAL TARE to return the success flag from the CAL TARE operation CAL STORE TARE Optional depending on necessity of long term storage CALibration VALue RESistance CALibration VALue RESistance ref ohms gt sends the value of the on board reference resistor as measured with the external calibration DVM to the module This value will be used to calibrate current sources 214 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference CALibration Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Value Units ref_ohms numeric float32 7 500 4 ohms Comments Use the CAL CONF RES command to configure the reference resistor for measurement at the Calibration Bus connector e A four wire measurement of the resistor is made with an external multimeter connected to the H Cal L Cal H ohm and L ohm terminals on the Terminal Module or the V H V L Q H and Q L terminals on the Cal Bus connector e The ref ohms gt parameter must be within 4 of the 7500 Q nominal resistor value or a 222 Data out of range error will be generated e The lt ref ohms gt parameter may be specified in kQ kohm e When Accepted Not while INITiated e Related Commands CAL CONF RES CAL STORE ADC Command CAL CONF RES Sequence now measure ref resistor with external DMM CAL VAL RES lt measured value gt Send measured value to module CALibration VALue VOLTage CALibration VALue
412. t into the VT1419A are stored in a library in the module s non volatile flash memory When a specific channel is linked to a standard EU conversion using the SENSe FUNC command the module copies that table from the library to a segment of RAM allocated to the specified channel When a single EU conversion is specified for multiple channels multiple copies of that conversion table are put in RAM one copy into each channel s Table RAM Segment The conversion table per channel arrangement allows higher speed scanning since the table is already loaded and ready to use when the channel is scanned Custom EU conversion tables are loaded directly into a channel s Table RAM Segment using the DIAG CUST LIN and DIAG CUST PIEC commands The DIAG CUST commands can specify multiple channels To link custom conversions to their tables execute the SENSe FUNC CUST lt range gt lt ch_list gt command Unlike standard EU conversions the custom EU conversions are already linked to their channels tables loaded before the SENSe FUNC CUST command is executed but the command allows the A D range for these channels to be specified The RST command clears all channel Table RAM segments Custom EU conversion tables must be re loaded using the DIAG CUST commands The VT1419A uses two types of EU conversion tables linear and piecewise The linear table describes the transducer s response slope and offset y mx b The piecewis
413. t must occur in order to start the Trigger Timer The default Arm source is IMMediate always armed ARM SOURce source S g TRIGger TIMer lt interval gt 3 o Trigger Only while gt 5 Timer abril is ON gt TRIG SOUR is IMM gt x TRIGger SOURce source TiMer gt BUS 8 gt B 5 EXTernal 2 a gt 3 a HOLD o Internal S 2 Trigger Trigger Sign 2 IMMediate 3 P Enable E gt 2 z TTLTrg lt n gt gt go SCP Trig Trigger Counter TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Figure 3 7 Logical Arm and Trigger Model Selecting the In order to start an algorithm execution cycle a trigger event must occur The Trigger Source source of this event is selected with the TRIGger SOURce source command The following table explains the possible choices for lt source gt Chapter 3 Parameter Value Source of Trigger after INITiate command BUS TRIGger IMMediate TRG GET for GPIB EXTernal TRG signal input on terminal module HOLD TRIGger IMMediate IMMediate The trigger signal is always true scan starts when an INITiate command is received SCP SCP Trigger Bus future SCP Breadboard TIMer The internal trigger interval timer must set Arm source TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTLTRG lines n 0 through 7 TT Programming the VT14
414. t strain bridge readings for the channels specified by lt ch_list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units gage_factor numeric flt32 1 5 none ch_list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The lt ch list parameter must specify the channel used to sense the bridge voltage not the channel position on a Bridge Completion SCP e Related Commands SENSE STRAIN GFAC SENSE FUNC STRAIN e RST Condition Gage factor is 2 Usage STRAIN GFAC 3 100 107 set gage factor for channels O through 7 SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe STRain GFACtor lt channel gt returns the gage factor currently set for the sense channel specified by lt channel gt 280 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments Returned Value Numeric value of gage factor The C SCPI type is f1t32 e The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only e Related Commands STRAIN GFACTOR Usage STRAIN GFAC 107 query gage factor for channel 7 enter statement here returns the gage factor set by STR GFAC SENSe STRain POISson Parameters Comments Usage SENSe STRain Parameters Comments SENSe STRain POISson lt poisson_ratio gt lt ch_list gt sets the Poisson ratio to be used for EU conversion of values measured on sen
415. tatement will return value from condition register STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle lt enable mask gt sets bits in the Enable register that will enable corresponding bits from the Event register to set the Operation summary bit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable_mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none Comments enable mask may be sent as decimal hex 4H octal Q or binary 4B e VXI Interrupts When Operation Status Group bits 4 8 9 10 or 11 are enabled VXI card interrupts will occur as follows When the event corresponding to bit 4 occurs and then is cleared the card will generate a VXI interrupt When the event corresponding to bit 8 9 10 or 11 occurs the card will generate a VXI interrupt NOTE In C SCPI the C SCPI overlap mode must be on for VXIbus interrupts to occur e Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT OPER COND STAT OPER EVENT STAT OPER ENABLE Cleared By STAT PRESet and power on e RST Condition No change Usage STAT OPER ENABLE 1 Set bit O in the Operation Enable register STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle returns the value of bits set in the Operation Enable register 294 Chapter 6 Comments Usage VT1419A Command Reference STATUS e Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands STB SPOLL STAT OPER C
416. tatus E Byte The summary bit sets the RQS request service bit in the Status Byte Using Reg ister this Summary bit and those from the other status groups the Status Byte can be polled and the RQS bit checked to determine if there are any status conditions which need attention In this way the RQS bit is like the GPIB s SRQ Service Request line The difference is that while executing a GPIB serial poll SPOLL releases the SRQ line executing the STB command does not clear the RQS bit in the Status Byte The Event Register must be read of the group whose summary bit is causing the RQS Readi ng Status Itis possible to directly poll status groups for instrument status rather than poll the Groups Di rectly Status Byte for summary information Chapter 3 93 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction VT1419A Background Operation Reading Event Registers Clearing Event Registers Reading Condition Registers The Questionable Data Operation Status and Standard Event Groups all have Event Registers These Registers log the occurrence of even temporary status conditions When read these registers return the sum of the decimal values for the condition bits set then are cleared to make them ready to log further events The commands to read these Event Registers are STAT QUES EVENT Questionable Data Group Event Register STAT OPER EVENT Operation Status Group Event Register ESR Standard Event Group Event Register To clear
417. te that not all outputs will occur at the same time but will take approximately 10 us per channel to write When delay is 0 the Output phase begins immediately after the Execute Algorithms phase This provides the fastest possible execution speed while potentially introducing variations in the time between trigger and beginning of the Output phase The variation can be caused by conditional execution constructs in algorithms or other execution time variations 198 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm If lt delay gt is set to less time than is required for the Input Update Execute Algorithms phases ALG OUTP DELA Y will report the time set but the effect will revert to the same that is set by ALG OUTP DELAY 0 Output begins immediately after Execute phase When lt delay gt is AUTO the delay is set to the worst case time required to execute phases 1 through 3 This provides the fastest execution speed while maintaining a fixed time between trigger and the OUTPUT phase To set the time from trigger to the beginning of OUTPUT use the following procedure After defining all algorithms execute ALG OUTP DEL AUTO sets minimum stable delay ALG OUTP DEL returns this minimum delay ALG OUTP DEL lt minimum additional gt additional desired minimum Note that the delay value returned by ALG OUTP DEL is valid only until another algorithm is loaded After that it is necessary to re issue the ALG OUTP DEL AUTO
418. te command subsystem Figure 6 5 shows the overall Trigger System model The shaded area shows the ARM subsystem portion ARM SOURce lt source gt TRIGger TIMer interval Only while INIT CONT is ON amp Trigger Timer TRIG SOUR is IMM Arm Source Selector TRIGger SOURce lt source gt S 5 o o e o 2 External e Internal B 8 Trigger Trigger Signal o 2 Enable 3 IMMediate 3 E TTLTrg lt n gt E 3 lt Trigger Counter TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Figure 6 5 Logical Trigger Model CAUTION e Algorithms execute at most once per trigger event Should trigger events cease external trigger source stops or become ignored TRIGger COUNt reached algorithm execution will stop In this case control outputs are left at the last value set by the algorithms Depending on the process this uncontrolled situation could be dangerous Make certain that the process is in a safe state before halting stop triggering execution of a controlling algorithm e The Agilent HP E1535 Watchdog Timer SCP was specifically developed to automatically signal that an algorithm has stopped controlling a process Use of the Watchdog Timer is recommended for critical processes Chapter 6 305 VT1419A Command Reference TRIGger Event Sequence Figure 6 6 shows how the module responds to various trigger arm configurations Trigger Idle _
419. ter 5 147 VEE Programming Examples Function Test Function Test test1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is easy to merge it directly into a VEE application program to provide easy access to the testing sequence The Agilent VEE detail view is all that is developed as illustrated in Figure 5 4 A counter in the upper right hand section of the detail gives the number of seconds elapsed so that it can be determined 1f progress is being made This program performs a TST Any errors detected will be displayed so that the exact channels in question can be identified Testing may take from 3 to 10 or more minutes to occur depending upon the number and type of SCPs loaded nn m This example can be merged directly into your application program to provide testing of the E1419A card and its Signal Conditioning Plug ons Any error ssages generated during TST will be reflected and channel related errors will be displayed Figure 5 4 Functional Test Detail View 148 Chapter 5 VEE Programming Examples Programming Model Example Programming Model Example temp1419 vee This program operates stand alone It is written to follow the programming model outlined in Chapter 3 Examples can be found for writing multiple algorithms variable monitoring and modification interrupts temperature measurements and data display Please refer to Figure 5 5 for the remainder of the disc
420. termine when the CAL SETUP or CAL TARE commands have completed Instead use their query forms CAL SETUP or CAL TARE 314 Chapter 6 PMC RMC lt name gt RST WARNING VT1419A Command Reference Common Command Reference Purge Macros Command Purges all currently defined macros Remove individual Macro Command Removes the named macro command Reset Command Resets the VT1419A as follows e Frases all algorithms e All elements in the Input Channel Buffer 1100 1163 set to zero e All elements in the Output Channel Buffer 0100 0163 set to zero e Defines all Analog Input channels to measure voltage e Configures all Digital 1 O channels as inputs e Resets VT1531A and VT1532A Analog Output SCP channels to zero e When Accepted Not while INITiated Note the change in character of output channels when RST is received Digital outputs change to inputs appearing now is 1 kW to 3 V a TTL one and analog control outputs change to zero current or voltage Keep these changes in mind when applying the VT1419A to the system or engineering a system for operation with the VT1419A Also note that each analog output channels disconnects for 5 6 milliseconds to discharge to zero at each RST It isn t difficult to have the VT1419A signal the system when RST is executed A solution that can provide signals for several types of failures as well as signaling when RST is executed is the Agilent HP E1535 Watchdog Timer SCP
421. text boxes are good tools for storing the algorithm code and will be used extensively by this manual See the temp1419 vee example program in Chapter 5 which illustrates downloading algorithms to the VT1419A It may have been noticed in the examples above that a variable can be initialized to a particular value However that value is a one time initialization Later program execution may alter the variable and re issuing an INIT command to re start program execution will NOT re initialize that variable Instead any scalar or array can be altered using SCPI commands prior to issuing the INIT command or the intrinsic variable First_loop can be relied upon to conditionally preset variables after receiving the INIT command First_loop is a variable that is preset to non zero due to the execution of the INIT command With the occurrence of the first scan trigger and when algorithms execute for the first time First_loop s value will be non zero Subsequent triggers will find this variable cleared Here s an example of how First_loop can be used ALG DEF alg1 0static float a b c start some array 4 if First loop a 1 b 2 c 3 LF EOI To pre set variables under program control before issuing the INIT command the ALG SCALAR and ALG ARRAY commands can be used Assume the example algorithm above has already been defined To preset the scalar start and the array some_array the following commands can be used ALG SCAL alg1
422. the Event Registers without reading them execute CLS clears all group s Event Registers The Questionable Data and Operation Status Groups each have a Condition Register The Condition Register reflects the group s status condition in real time These registers are not latched so transient events may be missed when the register is read The commands to read these registers are STAT QUES COND Questionable Data Group Condition Register STAT OPER COND Operation Status Group Condition Register VT1419A Background Operation The VT1419A inherently runs its algorithms and calibrations in the background mode with no interaction required from the driver All resources needed to run the measurements are controlled by the on board Control Processor DSP The driver is required to set up the type of measurement to be run modify algorithm variables and to unload data from the card after it appears in the CVT or FIFO Once the INIT IMM command is given the VT1419A is initiated and all functions of the trigger system and algorithm execution are controlled by its on board control processor The driver returns to waiting for user commands No interrupts are required for the VT1419A to complete its measurements While the module is running algorithms the driver can be queried for its status variables and algorithms can be accessed and data can be read from the FIFO and CVT The ABORT command may be given to force continuous execution to
423. the first four SCP positions 0 through 3 can only be configured with non programmable SCPs SCPs with programmable gain filter digital input output analog output strain gage etc are NOT supported in these slots This restriction encompasses channels 100 131 Chapter 3 53 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Executing The Programming Model Power On or RST Step 1 Set up SCP Amps filters and INP OUTP commands Measurement Excitation Sources Link Engineering Units Functions Step 2 to Analog Input Channels SENSe FUNC commands Step 3 Set up Digital I O Channels INP OUTP SENSe SOUR Step 4 Calibrate Channel Setup CAL or CAL SETup command after 1 hour warm up ARM SOUR TRIG SOUR TRIG COUN Sepo Set up Trigger System TRIG TIMer commands Step 6 Select Data Format FORMat command Select FIFO Mode Step 7 if using History Mode SENSe DATA FIFO MODE command Step 8 Define Global Variables ALG DEF GLOBALS P optional command Step 9 Set up Algorithm s and ALG DEF ALG ARRay ALG SCALar p Preset Algorithm Variables ALG SCAN RATio ALG UPDate Step 10 Initiate Trigger System INITiate command Trigger events execute algs SENS DATA FIFO SENS CVT Retrieve Data ALG SCAL and ALG ARR commands Modify Algorithm Variables Figure 3 4 Programming Sequence ALG ARRay ALG SCALar Sepia ALG STAT ALG SCAN RATio ALG UPD
424. therwise behaves as a global variable Also note variables cannot be declared within a compound statement Chapter 4 125 The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference Data Structures The VT1419A Algorithm Language allows the following data structures e Simple variables of type float Declaration static float simp_var any var Use simp_var 123 456 any_var 23 45 Another_var 1 23e 6 Storage Each simple variable requires four 16 bit words of memory e Single dimensioned arrays of type float with a maximum of 1024 elements Declaration static float array_var 3 Use array_var O array_var 1 array_var 2 array_var 3 0 1 1 2 2 34 5 Storage Arrays are double buffered This means that when an array is declared twice the space required for the array is allocated plus one more word as a buffer pointer The memory required is words of memory 8 num elements 1 This double buffered arrangement allows the ALG ARRAY command to download all elements of the array into the B buffer while the algorithm is accessing values from the A buffer An ALG UPDATE command can then cause the buffer pointer word to point to the newly loaded buffer between algorithm executions 126 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference Using Type Float in There are certain situations where integers would normally be used but w
425. thm 1 that the output value to 0132 consists of both the waveform array plus the variable offset The vertical slider controls the value of offset and the horizontal slider controls the variable inc When the toggle switch is in the DDS direct digital synthesis mode the horizontal slider modifies inc to generate lower resolution higher frequency waveforms When in the PPC point per cycle mode the slider modifies the ALG SCAN RATIO command of Algorithm 1 to vary how many trigger cycles to walt before executing the algorithm and writing different data to the output channel This has the effect of slowing down the waveform and lowering its frequency Algorithm 2 simply copies each value of channel 132 to the FIFO every trigger cycle With Algorithm 1 only executing at some multiple of the trigger rate there will be repeated FIFO readings of the same value indicating a slower frequency The Offset Frequency object has the SCPI commands used to control the scalar variable updates and the object Download Waveform controls writing to the array waveform in Algorithm 1 Chapter 5 169 VEE Programming Examples Driver Download Driver Download drvr1419 vee This program allows the VT1419A driver and any other drivers that might be need to be downloaded into an Agilent HP E1405 6 Command Module Specify the directory where the driver files are found and the actual driver files DU to be downl
426. tifiers Channel identifiers appear as variable identifiers within the algorithm and have a fixed reserved syntax The identifiers 1100 to 1163 specify input channel numbers The I must be upper case They may only appear on the right side of an assignment operator The identifiers 0100 to 0163 specify output channel numbers The O must be upper case They can appear on either or both sides of the assignment operator Trying to declare a variable with a channel identifier will generate an error The VT1419A s Algorithm Language supports the following operators assignment example addition subtraction multiplication division examples unary minus unary plus is equal to examples is not equal to is less than is greater than is less than or equal to is greater than or equal to or examples and not example c 1 2345 c a b c a b c a b c a b c a b c a b nes al b a lt b a gt b a lt b a gt b a b a c a b amp amp a c b Chapter 4 123 The Algorithm Language and Environment Algorithm Language Reference Intrinsic Functions and Statements Program Flow Control Conditional Constructs Exiting the Algorithm The result of a comparison operation is a boolean value It is still a type float but its value is either O zero if false or 1 one if true Any variable may be tested with the if statement A valu
427. ting of main When the module is INITiated a set of control variables and a function calling sequence is created for all algorithms defined The value of variable State_n is set with the ALGorithm STATe command and determines whether the algorithm will be called The value of Ratio_n is set with the ALGorithm SCAN RATio command and determines how often the algorithm will be called relative to trigger events Since the function calling interface to an algorithm is fixed in the main function the header of an algorithm function is also pre defined This means that unlike standard C language programming an algorithm program a function need not must not include the function declaration header opening brace and closing brace Simply supply the body of the function the VT1419A s driver supplies the rest Think of the program space in the VT1419A in the form of a source file with any global variables first then the main function followed by as many algorithms as have been defined Of course what is really contained in the VT1419A s algorithm memory are executable codes that have been translated from the downloaded source code While not an exact representation of the algorithm execution environment Figure 4 1 shows the relationship between a normal C program and two VT1419A algorithms 108 Chapter 4 The Algorithm Language and Environment Accessing the VT1419A s Resourc
428. ting wires between each channel s HI and LO then execute CAL TARE for these channels To remove offsets like those in an unstrained strain gage bridge execute the CAL TARE command on those channels The module will then measure the offsets and as in the wiring case above remove these offsets from future measurements In the strain gage case this balances the bridge so all measurements have the initial unstrained offset removed to allow the most accurate high speed measurements possible After CAL TARE lt ch_list gt measures and stores the offset voltages it then performs the equivalent of a CAL operation This operation uses the Tare constants to set a DAC which will remove each channel offset as seen by the module s A D converter The absolute voltage level that CAL TARE can remove is dependent on the A D range CAL TARE will choose the lowest range that can handle the existing offset voltage The range that CAL TARE chooses will become the lowest usable range range floor for that channel For any channel that has been CAL TARE d Autorange will not go below that range floor and selecting a manual range below the range floor will return an Overload value see table on page 230 As an example assume that the system wiring to channel 0 generates a 0 1 volts offset with O volts a short applied at the UUT Before CAL TARE the module would return a reading of 0 1 volts for channel 0 After CAL TARE 100 the m
429. tion At RST or Power on Control Processor has found a checksum error in the Calibration Constants Read error s with SYST ERR command and re calibrate areas that lost constants 9 512 Trigger Too Fast Scan not complete when another trigger event received 10 1024 FIFO Overflowed Attempt to store more than 65 024 values in FIFO 11 2048 Overvoltage Tf the input protection jumper has not been cut the input relays have Detected on been opened and RST is required to reset the module Overvoltage will Input also generate an error 12 4096 VME Memory The number of values taken exceeds VME memory space Overflow 13 8192 Setup Changed Channel Calibration in doubt because SCP setup may have changed since last CAL or CAL SETup command RST always sets this bit Operation Status Group Bit Bit Value Event Name Description 0 1 Calibrating Set by CAL TARE and CAL SETup Cleared by CAL TARE and CAL SETup Set while CAL executing then cleared 4 16 Measuring Set when instrument INITiated Cleared when instrument returns to Trigger Idle State 8 256 Scan Complete Set when each pass through a Scan List is completed 9 512 SCP Trigger Reserved for future SCPs 10 1024 FIFO Half Full FIFO contains at least 32 768 values 11 2048 Algorithm Interrupt The interrupt function was called in an executing algorithm Standard Event Group Bit Bit Value Event Name Description 0 1 Operation Complete OPC command executed and instrument has completed all pendi
430. tion Methods VT1419A Guard The VT1419A guard connection provides a 10 kQ current limiting resistor between Connections _ the guard terminals G and VT1419A chassis ground for each 8 channel SCP bank This is a safety device for the case where the Device Under Test DUT isn t actually floating the shield is connected to the DUT and also connected to the VT1419A guard terminal G The 10 kQ resistor limits the ground loop current which has been known to burn out shields This also provides 20 kQ isolation between shields between SCP banks which helps isolate the noise source Common Mode Be very careful not to exceed the maximum common mode voltage referenced to Voltage Limits the card chassis ground of 16 volts 60 volts with the VT1513A Attenuator 9 SCP There is an exception to this when high frequency 1 kHz 20 kHz common mode noise is present see VT1419A Noise Rejection below Also if the DUT is not grounded then the shield should be connected to the VT1419A chassis ground When to Make itis not always possible to state positively the best shield connection for all cases Shield Connections Shield performance depends on the noise coupling mechanism which is very difficult to determine The above recommendations are usually the best wiring method but if feasible experiment with shield connections to determine which provides the best performance for a given installation and environment NOTE For a thorough rigorous disc
431. tions for the Examples olere RR eR as page 143 Virtual Front Panel Program panl1419 vee This program performs virtually all calibration testing and general wiring connection verification needs It s a quick way to get the card up and running and making measurements Analog outputs can be set all input channels can be looked at SCP configurations can be seen strip chart comparisons performed among any channel and data can be logged to a disk This program includes an Agilent VEE 4 0 version that is compiled to load and run faster page 144 Calibration cal 1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is easy to merge it directly into an VEE application program to provide easy access to the calibration Sequence usina page 147 Functional Test test1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is easy to merge it directly into any VEE application program to provide easy access to the card functional test sequence o oooooooooocoococo oo page 148 Programming Model Example temp1419 vee This program operates stand alone It is written to follow the programming model outlined in Chapter 3 Examples cna be found for writing multiple algorithms variable monitoring and modification interrupts temperature measurements and data displ y sesta auc ee dai page 149 Error Checking err 1419 vee This program operates stand alone However it is designed to be merged into an appli
432. to four wire resistance and resistance temperature device circuits during execution of CAL TARE for those channels e When Accepted Not while INITiated Related Commands OUTP CURR AMPL CAL TARE e RST Condition OUTP CURR OFF all channels Usage OUTP CURR OFF 140 147 turn off current source channels 40 and 47 OUTPut CURRent STATe OUTPut CURRent STATe lt channel gt returns the state of the Current Source SCP channel specified by lt channel gt If the channel is not on a VT1505A Current Source SCP the query will return zero Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 132 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Returned Value returns for enabled 0 for disabled C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands OUTP CURR STATE OUTP CURR AMPL Usage OUTP CURR 147 query for state of Current SCP channel 47 execute enter statement here enter query value either 1 or 0 Chapter 6 247 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut OUTPut POLarity OUTPut POLarity lt select gt lt ch_list gt sets the polarity on digital output channels in lt ch list gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units select discrete string NORMal INVerted none ch_l
433. tring length not exceed a single program line Example ALG DEF ALG1 static float outval 0 0132 outval outval outval 1 Definite Length Block Program Data For longer code segments like complete custom algorithms this parameter works well because it specifies the exact length of the data block that will be transferred The syntax for this parameter type is lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt is 1 9 and represents the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Example from Quoted String Chapter 6 189 VT1419A Command Reference ALGorithm ALG DEF ALG1 2110132 1100 0 where is a null byte required for C SCPI only NOTE for For Block Program Data the Algorithm Parser requires that the lt source_code gt C SCPI data end with a null byte The null byte must be appended to the end of the block s lt data byte s gt and account for it in the byte count lt digit s gt from above If the null byte is not included or lt digit s gt doesn t include it the error Algorithm Block must contain termination 0 will be generated Indefinite Length Block Program Data This form terminates the data transfer when it receives an End Identifier with the last data byte Use this form only when it is certain that the controller platf
434. ttempts to program flash memory failed 3069 Programming voltage jumper not set properly See Disabling Flash Memory Access in Chapter 1 JM2201 3070 Identification of Flash ROM incorrect 3071 Checksum error on flash memory 3074 WARNING Old Opt 16 or Opt 17 card can damage SCP modules must use VT1506A or VT1507A 362 Appendix B 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 Error Messages Too many entries in CVT list Invalid entry in CVT list Can only be 10 to 511 Too many updates in queue Must send UPDATE command To allow more updates per ALG UPD increase ALG UPD WINDOW Invalid Algorithm name Can only be ALG1 through ALG32 or GLOBALS or MAIN Algorithm is undefined In ALG SCAL ALG SCAL ALG ARR or ALG ARR Algorithm already defined Trying to repeat ALG DEF with same lt alg_name gt and is not enabled to swap or trying to define GLOBALS again since last RST Variable is undefined Algorithm exists but has no local variable by that name Invalid Variable name Must be valid C identifier see Chapter 5 Global symbol variable or custom function already defined Trying to define a global variable with same name as a user defined function or vice versa User functions are also global Appendix B 363 Error Messages 3084 3084 3085 3086 3088
435. tus system 95 VXI 95 Intrinsic functions and statements abs expression 124 interrupt 124 max expressionl expression2 124 min expression1 expression2 124 writeboth expression cvt_element 124 writecvt expression cvt_element 112 124 writefifo expression 113 124 Intrinsic Functions and Statements interrupt 113 Intrinsic statement 132 Isothermal reference measurement NOTE 28 K Keywords special VT1419A reserved 122 Keywords standard reserved 122 L Language syntax summary 129 132 Language overview of the algorithm 106 107 Layout Terminal Module 32 LEVel INPut THReshold 239 Lifetime limitation Flash memory 211 Limits Common mode voltage 373 LINe DIAG INT LINe 223 LINe DIAG INT LINe 224 Lines comment 136 Linking channels to EU conversion 58 Linking Commands 181 Linking output channels to functions 66 Linking resistance measurements 60 Linking strain measurements 65 Linking temperature measurements 61 Linking voltage measurements 59 Lists Faceplate connector pin signal 29 Logical operators 123 Logical AND expression 131 LOW INPut LOW 238 INPut LOW 238 Low noise measurements HINTS 36 max expressionl expression2 124 Maximum Common mode voltage 330 Input voltage 330 Tare cal offset 330 Maximum tare capability 99 Measurement accuracy dc volts 330 Ranges 329 Resolution 329 Measurements terminal block considerations for TC 35 Mea
436. ubsystem allows configuring output SCPs as well as linking channels to output functions Subsystem Syntax SOURce FM SSTATe 1 0 ON OFF O lt ch_list gt SSTATe lt channel gt FUNCtion SHAPe CONDition lt ch_list gt PULSe lt ch_list gt SQUare lt ch list gt PULM SSTATe 1 0 ON OFF O lt ch_list gt SSTATe lt channel gt PULSe PERiod lt period gt lt ch_list gt PERiod lt channel gt WIDTh lt pulse_width gt lt ch_list gt WIDTh lt channel gt SOURce FM STATe SOURce FM STATe lt enable gt lt ch_list gt enables the Frequency Modulated mode for a PULSe channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none ch_list string 132 163 none Comments This command is coupled with the SOURce PULM STATE command If the FM state is ON then the PULM state is OFF If the PULM state is ON then the FM state is OFF If both the FM and the PULM states are OFF then the PULSe channel is in the single pulse mode e Ifthe channels specified are not on a Frequency Totalize SCP an error will be generated e Use SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare to set FM pulse train to 50 duty cycle Use SOURce PULSe PERiod to set the period e RST Condition SOUR FM STATE OFF SOUR PULM STATE OFF SENS FUNC COND and INP POL for all digital SCP channels Chapter 6 285 e Related Comman
437. unction as example above only first channel of each SCP specified DIAG OTDETECT STATE OFF 108 disable OTD for the 8 channels on the second SCP only first channel of SCP specified DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe DIAGnostic OTDetect STATe lt channel gt returns the current state of Open Transducer Detection for the SCP containing the specified lt channel gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel channel list string 100 163 none Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel only e Returned Value Returns 1 enabled or O disabled The C SCPI type is int16 e Related Commands DIAG OTDETECT STATE ON OFF Usage DIAG OTD STATE 108 enter statement returns either a 1 or a 0 DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD DIAGnostic QUERy SCPREAD reg addr gt returns data word from a Signal Conditioning Plug On register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units reg addr numeric int32 0 65 535 none Comments Returned Value returns numeric register value C SCPI type is int32 Usage DIAG QUERY SCPREAD 258 read Watchdog SCP s config status register enter statement here return SCP ID value Chapter 6 225 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic DIAGnostic VERSion DIAGnostic VERSion returns the version of the firmware currently loaded into flash
438. upted DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear DIAGnostic CUSTom LINear lt table range gt lt table block gt lt ch_list gt downloads a custom linear Engineering Unit Conversion table in table block to the VT1419A Contact a VXI Technology System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for specific applications Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units table range numeric float32 0 015625 0 03125 0 0625 0 125 volts 0 25 10 5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 table block definite length see comments none block data ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The lt table block gt parameter is a block of 8 bytes that define 4 16 bit values SCPI requires that lt table block gt include the definite length block data header C SCPI adds the header automatically The lt table range gt parameter specifies the range of voltage that the table covers from lt table range gt to lt table range gt The value specified must be within 5 of one of the nominal values from the table above e The ch list gt parameter specifies which channels may use this custom EU table e Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom e RST Condition All custom EU tables erased Usage program puts table constants into array table block DIAG CUST LIN table_block 116 123 send table to VT1419A for chs 16 23 SENS FUNC CUST LIN 1 1 116 123 link c
439. urce program lt amplitude gt to 0 e Related Commands OUTP VOLT AMPL e RST Condition MIN 0 Usage OUTP VOLT AMPL 5 132 135 set excitation voltage for channels 32 35 OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude OUTPut VOLTage AMPLitude lt channel gt returns the current setting of excitation voltage for the channel specified by lt channel gt If the channel is not on a VT1511A SCP the query will return zero Comments The lt channel gt parameter must specify a single channel e Returned Value Numeric one of 0 1 2 5 or 10 C SCPI type is float32 252 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference OUTPut e Related Commands OUTP VOLT AMPL Usage OUTP VOLT AMPL 135 returns current setting of excitation voltage for channel 3 Chapter 6 253 ROUTe The ROUTE subsystem provides a method to query the overall channel list definition for its sequence of channels Subsystem Syntax ROUTe SEQuence DEFine POINts ROUTe SEQuence DEFine ROUTe SEQuence DE Fine lt type gt returns the sequence of channels defined in the scan list Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type string AIN AOUT DIN DOUT none Comments The channel list contents and sequence are determined primarily by channel references in the algorithms currently defined The SENS REF CHANNELS and SENS CHAN SETTLING commands also effect the scan list contents The
440. ure and convert a reading to engineering units as fast as once every 10 us measuring a high level signal followed by a very low level signal may require some extra settling time As seen from the point of view of the VT1419A s Analog to Digital converter and its Range Amplifier this situation is the most difficult to measure For example look at two consecutive channels the first measures a power supply at 15 5 volts the next measures a thermocouple temperature First the input to the Range Amplifier is at 15 5 volts near its maximum with any stray capacitances charged accordingly then it immediately is switched to a thermocouple channel and down ranged to its 0 0625 volt range On this range the resolution is now 1 91 uV per Least Significant Bit LSB Because of this sensitivity the time to discharge these stray capacitances may have to be considered Chapter 3 101 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Settling Characteristics Checking for Problems Fixing the Problem Use Amplifier SCPs Thus far in the discussion it has been assumed that the low level channel measured after a high level channel has presented a low impedance path to discharge the A D s stray capacitances path was the thermocouple wire The combination of a resistance measurement through a VT1501A Direct Input SCP presents a much higher impedance path A very common measurement like this would be the temperature of a thermistor If measured through a
441. uring the VT1419A Installing SCPs The following illustrations show the steps used to install Signal Conditioning Plug Ons SCPs The VT1419A supports only non programmable analog input SCPs in positions 0 through 3 Any mix of SCP types can be installed in SCP positions 4 through 7 CAUTION Use approved Static Discharge Safe handling procedures anytime the covers are removed from the VT1419A or are handling SCPs Setting Logical Address Switch VT1419A 0 SS zl lt Default Switch Setting LOGICAL ADDRESS 208 e y 4 ARNS NNNNNSSNSNS NNNNSNNSNNNNSNSY 16 Chapter 1 Note The only SCPs supported in SCP positions O through 3 are VTI1501A VT1502A VT1508A VT1509A VT1512A VT1513A VT1514A VT1515A VT1516A VT1517A 1 Installing SCPs Removing the Cover VT1419A Remove the SCP Retainer Screws Remove 2 Screws Pull Cover Out of the 3 slots Getting Started Configuring the VT1419A Chapter 1 Getting Started Configuring the VT1419A 2 Installing SCPs VT1419A Connectors with the Module Connectors and then Push In Tighten the SCP Retainer Screws 18 Chapter 1 Getting Started Configuring the VT1419A 3 Installing SCPs Reinstalling the Cover VT1419A lt BR Line up the three tabs with the three slots th
442. ussion 0001 0000 0001 0002 0021 0000 static float card running 0003 0004 0020 static float vee running f Average and test temperature static float count sum average intr if First loop count 1 sum 0 card running 1 intr 0 sum sum 1102 sum temperature if count 16 check count average sum 16 average writecvt average 10 CVT 10 count 1 sum 0 P reset vars else count count 1 return F if count lt 16 exit Code executed every 16 times if average gt 30 amp amp intr interrupt intr 1 Interrupt VEE 0156 B0 1 Set digital bit else if average lt 29 0156 B0 0 Clear digital bit intr 0 writecvt O156 B0 12 9355 degrees C 2 cvr 0 2 v A step A o lo 900 x name Interrupt Handler 100 Auto scale average 29 0003 card running gt 30 Degrees 0000 0001 Program to show card operating card running card running 0002 writecvt card running 11 CVT 11 7 vee running 876 Figure 5 5 Programming Model Detail View The hardware configuration assumes that a type T thermocouple is attached to channel 102 that the thermocouple reference sensor is attached to channel 103 and that t
443. ussion of measurement noise shielding and filtering see Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems by Henry W Ott of Bell Laboratories published by Wiley amp Sons ISBN 0 471 85068 3 Noise Due to Inadequate Card Grounding If either or both of the VT1419A and Agilent HP E1482 MXI Extender Modules are not securely screwed into the VXIbus Mainframe noise can be generated Make sure that both screws top and bottom are screwed in tight If not it 1s possible that CVT data could be more noisy than FIFO data because the CVT is located in A24 space the FIFO in A16 space more lines moving could cause noisier readings Appendix D 373 Wiring and Noise Reduction Methods VT1419A Noise Rejection Normal Mode Noise Enm Common Mode Noise Ecm Keeping Common Mode Noise out of the Amplifier See Figure D 2 for the following discussion This noise is actually present at the signal source and is a differential noise Hi to Lo It is what is filtered out by the buffered filters on the VT1502A VT1503A VT1508A and VT1509A SCPs This noise is common to both the Hi and Lo differential signal inputs Low frequency Ecm is very effectively rejected by a good differential instrumentation amplifier and it can be averaged out when measured through the Direct Input SCP VT1501A However high frequency Ecm is rectified and generates an offset with the amplifier and filter SCPs such as VT1502A VT1503A VT1508A and VT15
444. ustom EU with chs 16 23 INITiate then TRIGger module Chapter 6 221 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise Parameters Comments Usage DIAGnostic CUSTom PIECewise lt table range gt lt table block gt lt ch_list gt downloads a custom piece wise Engineering Unit Conversion table in lt table block gt to the VT1419A Contact a VXI Technology System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for specific applications Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units table_range numeric float32 0 015625 0 03125 0 0625 0 125 volts 0 25 10 5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 table block definite length see comments none block data ch list channel list string 100 163 none e lt table block gt is a block of 1 024 bytes that define 512 16 bit values SCPI requires that lt table block gt include the definite length block data header C SCPI adds the header automatically e lt table range gt specifies the range of voltage that the table covers from lt table range to lt table range gt lt ch list gt specifies which channels may use this custom EU table e Related Commands SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom e RST Condition All custom EU tables erased program puts table constants into array table_block DIAG CUST PIEC table_block 124 131 send table for chs 24 31 to VT1419A SENS FUNC CUST PIEC 1 1 124 131 link
445. ut calculate output cycle When the number of trigger events set with the TRIGger COUNt command is reached the module returns to the Trigger Idle State needs to be INITiated again The default Trigger Count is 0 which is the same as INF can be triggered an unlimited number of times This setting will be used most often because it allows un interrupted execution of control algorithms To set the trigger count to 50 perhaps to help debug an algorithm TRIG COUNT 50 execute algorithms fifty times then return to Trig Idle State The VT1419A can output trigger signals on any of the VXIbus TTLTRG lines Use the OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe ON OFF command to select one of the TTLTRG lines and then choose the source that will drive the TTLTRG line with the command OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce command For details see OUTP TTLTRG commands starting on page 249 To output a signal on the TTLTRGI line each time the Trigger Timer cycles execute the commands TRIG SOUR TIMER select trig timer as trig source OUTP TTLTRG1 ON select and enable TTLTRGI line OUTP TTLTRG SOUR TRIG each trigger output on TTLTRGI Chapter 3 T9 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Initiating Running Algorithms Initiating Running Algorithms Starting Algorithms 4 TPUT ut table to SCP innels 1 INPUT from SCP channels analog amp digital Trigger Event variables amp execute all enabled algorithms algorithims When the INITiate
446. ut output channels downloading algorithms etc After INIT and when trigger events are taking place the DSP is busy measuring input channels executing algorithms and updating outputs However there are periods of time between trigger events where the DSP is waiting for I O or just waiting for the next trigger event This time is utilized to accept a limited command set from the supervisory program Agilent VEE for example to change scalars arrays elements or to download new algorithms Agilent VEE communicates with the VT1419A s driver and the driver then interfaces with the DSP FIFO CVT etc in cooperation with the operating state The When Accepted comments in the Command Reference chapter specify which commands may be accepted before or after INIT 52 Chapter 3 Programming the VT1419A Muttifunction Executing The Programming Model Executing The Programming Model This section shows the sequence of programming steps that should be used for the VT1419A Within each step most of the available choices are shown using example command sequences Further details about various SCPI commands can be found in the Command Reference Chapter 6 A command sequence example can be found on page 84 of this chapter Many VEE programming examples can be found in Chapter 5 Important It is very important while developing applications that error checking be included at least at the end of each major programming step by us
447. ut table constants into array lt table_block gt DIAG CUST PIEC 1 table_block 108 send characterized reference transducer table for use by channel 8 SENS FUNC CUST REF 25 108 link custom ref temp EU with ch 8 include this channel in a scan list with thermocouple channels REF channel first INITiate then TRIGger module Chapter 6 269 VT1419A Command Reference SENSE SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple Parameters Comments SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom TCouple lt type gt lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels with the custom Engineering Unit Conversion table loaded with the DIAG CUST PIECE command The table is assumed to be for a thermocouple and the type parameter will specify the built in compensation voltage table to be used for reference junction temperature compensation SENS FUNC CUST TC allows an EU table to be used that is custom matched to thermocouple wire characterized Contact a VXI Technology System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for specific applications Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete string E EEXT J K N R S T none range numeric float32 see comments V de ch_list channel list string 100 163 none e See Linking Input Channels to EU Conversion on page 57 for more information The range parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V dc 1 V
448. uts send SENS FUNC COND 148 151 156 Chapter 6 267 VT1419A Command Reference SENSe SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom SENSe FUNCtion CUSTom lt range gt lt ch_list gt links channels with the custom Engineering Unit Conversion table loaded with the DIAG CUST LINEAR or DIAG CUST PIECE commands Contact a VXI Technology System Engineer for more information on Custom Engineering Unit Conversion for specific applications Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric float32 see first comment V dc ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments The range parameter The VT1419A has five ranges 0 0625 V dc 0 25 V dc 1 V dc 4 V dc and 16 V dc To select a range simply specify the range value for example 4 selects the 4 V dc range Ifa value is specified larger than one of the first four ranges the VT1419A selects the next higher range for example 4 1 selects the 16 V dc range Specifying a value larger than 16 causes an error 222 Data out of range Specifying 0 selects the lowest range 0 0625 V dc Specifying AUTO selects auto range The default range no range parameter specified is auto range If using amplifier SCPs set them first and keep their settings in mind when specifying a range setting For instance if the expected signal voltage is to be approximately 0 1 V dc and the amplifier SCP for that channel has a
449. viously defined algorithms All algorithms must be erased before they re defined except in the special case described in Changing an Algorithm While it s Running later in this section 116 Chapter 4 ALG DEFINE s Two Data Formats NOTE for C SCPI The Algorithm Language and Environment Defining Algorithms ALG DEF For algorithms the ALG DEFINE lt alg_name gt lt source_code gt command sends the algorithm s source code to the VT1419A s driver for translation to executable code The lt source_code gt parameter can be sent in one of three forms 1 SCPI Quoted String For short segments single lines of code enclose the code string within single apostrophes or double quotes Because of string length limitations within SCPI and some programming platforms it is recommend that the quoted string length not exceed a single program line Example ALG DEF ALG1 if First loop 0132 0 0132 0132 017 2 SCPI Indefinite Length Block Program Data This form terminates the data transfer when it receives an End Identifier with the last data byte Use this form only when it is certain that the controller platform will include the End Identifier If it is not included the ALG DEF command will swallow whatever data follows the algorithm code The syntax for this parameter type is 0 lt data byte s gt lt null byte with End Identifier gt Example from Quoted String above ALG DEF ALG1 20013
450. voltage source greater than 16 volts If an enabled channel has an open transducer the input signal becomes the source voltage and the channel returns an input over range value The value returned is 9 91E 37 ASCII Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units enable boolean uint16 1 0 ON OFF none ch list channel list string 100 163 none Comments Open Transducer Detection is enabled disabled on a whole Signal Conditioning Plug On basis Selecting any channel on an SCP selects all channels on that SCP 8 channels per SCP e The DIAG CAL TARE MODE mode command affects how OTD is controlled during the CAL TARE operation When mode is set to 0 the RST Default channels are tare calibrated with their OTD current off When mode is 1 channels that have their OTD current on DIAGnostic OTDetect ON Q ch list gt are tare calibrated with their OTD current left on e Related Commands DIAG OTDETECT STATE DIAG CAL TARE MODE e RST Condition DIAG OTDETECT OFF 224 Chapter 6 VT1419A Command Reference DIAGnostic NOTE If OTD is enabled when CAL or CAL TARE is executed the module will disable OTD wait 1 minute to allow channels to settle perform the calibration and then re enable OTD Usage DIAG OTD ON 100 107 115 123 select OTD for the first and third SCP complete channel lists for readability only DIAG OTD STATE ON 100 115 same f
451. wer case letters can be used Therefore SEQUENCE sequence and SeQuEnCe are all acceptable Implied Implied commands are those which appear in square brackets in the command Commands syntax Note that the brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument Suppose a root command is sent but not the preceding second level implied command In this case the instrument assumes the implied command was intended to be used and it responds as if it was sent Examine the INITiate subsystem shown below INITiate IMMediate The second level command IMMediate is an implied command To set the instrument s trigger system to INIT IMM send either of the following command statements INIT IMM or INIT Variable Some commands will have what appears to be a variable syntax As an example Command Syntax output tigen gt STATe ON In these commands the lt n gt is replaced by a number No space is left between the command and the number because the number is not a parameter The number is part of the command syntax The purpose of this notation is to save a great deal of space in the Command Reference In the case of TTLTrg lt n gt n can be from 0 through 7 An example command statement OUTPUT TTLTRG2 STATE ON Parameters Parameter Types The following section contains explanations and examples of parameter types that will be seen later in this chapter Parameter Types Explanations and Examples Nu
452. wer four channels of a VT1511A SCP e The optional range parameter can be used to choose a fixed A D range When not specified defaulted the module uses auto range To link channels 40 through 43 to the quarter bridge strain EU conversion SENS FUNC STR QUAR 140 143 uses autorange Other commands used to set up strain measurements are SENSe STRain POISson SENSe STRain EXCitation SENSe STRain GFACtor SENSe STRain UNSTrained For more detailed programming information see the individual SCP manual NOTE Because of the number of possible strain gage configurations the driver must generate any Strain EU conversion tables and download them to the instrument when INITiate is executed This can cause the time to complete the INIT command to exceed one minute Chapter 3 65 Programming the VT1419A Multifunction Setting Up Digital Input and Output Channels Custom EU Conversions Linking Output Channels to Functions See Creating and Loading Custom EU Conversion Tables on page 96 Analog outputs are implemented either by a VT1531A or VT1537A Voltage Output SCP or a VT1532A Current Output SCP Channels where these SCPs are installed are automatically considered outputs No SOURce FUNCtion command is required since the VT1531A and VT1537A can only output voltage while the VT1532A can only output current The only way to control the output amplitude of these SCPs is through the VT1419A s Algorithm Language
453. x mathematical operations to achieve the desired result With some complex waveforms 1t may be beneficial to break up the waveform into several functions in order to get the desired accuracy For example suppose square root function is needed for both voltage and strain calculations The voltages are only going to range from 0 to 16 volts worst case The strain measurements return numbers in microstrain which range in the 1000 s Trying to represent the square root function over the entire range would severely impact the accuracy of the approximation Remember the entire range is broken up into only 128 segments of Appendix E 377 Generating User Defined Functions Mx B operations To increase accuracy the range over which calculations are made must be limited Many transcendental functions are simply used as a scaling multiplier For example a sine wave function is typically created over a range of 360 degrees or 27 radians After which the function repeats itself It s a simple matter to make sure the x term is scaled to this range before calculating the result This concept should be used almost exclusively to obtain the best results Haversine Example The following is an example of creating a haversine function a sine wave over the range of 1 2 to 1 2 The resulting function represents a fairly accurate approximation of this non linear waveform when limited to the range indicated Since the tables must be bui
454. ze 275 Totalizer function 67 Transducers detecting open 100 TRIG COUNt 307 TRIG COUNt 307 TRIG IMMediate 308 TRIG SOURce 308 TRIG SOURce 309 TRIG TIMer 309 TRIG TIMer 310 TRIGger subsystem 305 310 trigger system ABORt subsystem 185 ARM subsystem 204 206 INITiate subsystem 232 TRIGger subsystem 305 310 Trigger variable width pulse per 69 TTLTrg SOURce OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce 250 TTLTrg lt n gt OUTP TTLT lt n gt STATe 251 OUTP TTLTrg lt n gt STATe 250 TYPe OUTPut TYPE 251 Type setting output drive 68 TYPe OUTPut TYPE 252 Types data 125 Unary arithmetic operator 134 Unary logical operator 123 Unary operators 123 Unary expression 130 Unary operator 130 Unexpected channel offsets or overloads 99 UNSTrained SENSe STRain UNSTrained 282 SENSe STRain UNSTrained 282 pdating the algorithm variables 85 pdating the algorithm variables and coefficients 85 pdating the status system and VXI interrupts 95 sage example language 107 sing the status system 88 93 coco a V Value types parameter data 183 returned 183 Values assigning 133 Variable Command Syntax 179 Variable definition global 73 Variable frequency square wave output FM 70 Variable width pulse per trigger 69 Variable width pulses at fixed frequency PWM 69 Variables reading directly 83 Variables declaring 133 Variables global 128 Variables initializing 112 Variables
455. zero to a one in order to set the corresponding bit in the Event register When a bit in the PTF register is zero a positive transition of the Condition register bit will not change the Event register bit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units transition_mask numeric uint16 0 32767 none 296 Chapter 6 Comments Usage VT1419A Command Reference STATUS e transition mask may be sent as decimal hex H octal Q or binary ZB e If both the STAT OPER PTR and STAT OPER NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one any transition positive or negative will set the corresponding bit in the Event register e f neither the STAT OPER PTR or STAT OPER NTR registers have a corresponding bit set to one transitions from the Condition register will have no effect on the Event register e Related Commands STAT OPER PTR STAT OPER NTR e Set to all ones by STAT PRESet and power on e RST Condition No change STAT OPER PTR 16 When Measuring bit goes true set bit 4 in Status Operation Event register STATus OPERation PTRansition STATus PRESet Comments Usage Comments Usage STATus OPERation PTRansition returns the value of bits set in the Positive Transition Filter PTF register e Returned Value Decimal weighted sum of all set bits The C SCPI type is uint16 e Related Commands STAT OPER PTR e RST Condition No change STAT O

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Ikelite Canon A630 User's Manual  "取扱説明書"  leggi e normative nazionali e comunitarie su sicurezza, salute e  ASUS K553MA TR8778 User's Manual  IP-24, "Removal and Installation" - Z  MANUAL do UTILIZADOR  ZoomText Mac  CONGRATULAÇÕES  Kit para Automóviles Bluetooth de co-ne  MSAT User Manual 1460KB Mar 11 2009 04:36:56  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file